Home

MOS 25S - AskTOP.net

1. B 1 Glossary oen temet ete eres Glossary 1 References isses cesar anon aoo E Ra Een SPEARS References 1 iv 19 May 2005 STP 11 25S14 SM TG PREFACE This publication is for skill levels SLs 1 2 3 and 4 soldiers holding military occupational specialty MOS 25S and for trainers and first line supervisors It contains standardized training objectives in the form of task summaries to train and evaluate soldiers on critical tasks that support unit missions during wartime Trainers and first line supervisors should ensure soldiers holding MOS 25S SLs 1 2 3 4 have access to this publication When applicable a chapter is devoted to listing duty specific tasks or those tasks and skills which are not common to all soldiers in MOS 25S SLs 1 2 3 4 It should be made available in the soldier s work area unit learning center and unit libraries This publication applies to the Active Army the Army National Guard ARNG Army National Guard of the United States ARNGUS and the U S Army Reserve USAR The proponent for this publication is U S Army Training and Doctrine Command TRADOC Send comments and recommendations on Department of the Army DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms directly to Commander US Army Signal Center and Fort Gordon ATTN ATZH DTM Fort Gordon Georgia
2. Ie 3 54 Supervise the Operation of SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 39 AN FSC 78 AN GSC 52 or 5 86 3 59 Supervise the Installation of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 86 3 62 Supervise the Operation of Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V 3 65 Supervise the Maintenance of Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V 3 68 Manage a Maintenance 3 70 Manage Publications 3 72 Skill Level 4 Subject Area 7 SATCOM Terminal Direction Prepare Emergency Pla ert abere kd ote reu 3 74 Manage a Facility Physical Security 3 77 Evaluate Communications Security COMSEC for Insecurities 3 78 Direct the Maintenance of Defense Communications Satellite Subsystem CSS cM M MM wh 3 79 Direct the Operation of Defense Communications Satellite Subsystem M M eae a 3 80 Establish Network Plans for GMF cccceceeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeeseccaeeeeeeetesennieaeeeeeees 3 82 Direct the Maintenance of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 or AN TSC 93 V 3 84 Direct the Operation of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 or AN TSC 93 3 86 Direct the Maintenance of SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 39 AN FSC 78 AN GSC 52 or 5 86 0
3. 13 Verified that the operator correctly repaired the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM 14 Ensured that the operator verified the successful repair of the SGG by testing operating NOTE The following performance measures were performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the FCG Did the soldier ensure that the supervisor verified the following performance measures 15 Verified that the operator determined the faulted portion of the FCG 16 Ensured that the operator inspected all components and cables for defects and proper connections 17 Verified that the operator isolated fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment 18 Verified that the operator correctly repaired the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM 19 Ensured that the operator verified the successful repair of the FCG by testing operating NOTE The following performance measures were performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the Transmitter Group Did the soldier ensure that the supervisor verified the following performance measures 20 Verified that the operator determined the faulted portion of the Transmitter Group 21 Ensured that the operator inspected all com
4. replacement procedures outlined in the appropriate TM 4 36 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 7 Verified that using the digital data test set restored communications 8 Completed all maintenance forms for replacement parts or to request a higher maintenance level Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related DISA CIR 800 E70 11 DISA CIR 800 E70 7 DISA CIR 800 E70 8 DISA CIR 800 E70 9 TM 11 5895 1179 13 TM 11 5895 808 13 1 TM 11 5895 808 13 11 TM 11 5895 808 13 2 TM 11 5895 808 13 3 TM 11 5895 808 13 4 TM 11 5895 808 13 5 TM 11 5895 808 13 6 TM 11 5895 808 13 7 TM 11 5895 808 13 8 TM 11 5895 808 13 9 TM 11 5895 808 23P UNIT SOP 19 May 2005 4 37 This page intentionally left blank STP 11 25814 SM TG CHAPTER 5 Digital Common Core Subject Area 11 Digital Common Core Operate Automated Net Control Device ANCD AN CYZ 10 113 609 2053 Conditions As a radio operator in a field environment given data transfer device AN CYZ 10 C and TB 11 5820 890 12 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 and DA Form 2404 Given a requirement to operate the AN CYZ 10 Standards Performed in sequence the transfer of COMSEC keys a
5. 3 88 Direct the Operation of SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 39 AN FSC 78 AN GSC 52 or AN TSC 86 3 93 Direct the Operation of Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V 3 96 Direct the Maintenance of Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V 3 97 19 May 2005 STP 11 25S14 SM TG 113 611 1013 Perform Site 3 98 113 611 5012 Maintain a Situation 3 100 113 611 5016 Direct the Establishment of a Signal Site 3 102 113 613 7198 Manage Site Configuration 3 105 Chapter 4 Duty Position Tasks 2 icc cccccccesssteecessssicecssntivesusstteessasteies es sntteecasnedeesestinees ecantiivesastevesesncnertennee 4 1 Subject Area 8 ASI 1C 113 616 2018 Conduct Electronic Counter Countermeasures ECCM Network Controller ENC Operations within the Defense Satellite Communications System D SCS ie tanita Aled iota Teta tine ree fec ls 4 1 113 616 2022 Conduct Frequency Division Multiple Access FDMA Network Control FNC within the Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS 4 5 113 616 2023 Conduct Communications Payload Controller CPC Operations within the Defense Satellite Communications System 05 5 4 8 113 616 2028 Conduct
6. Select the Route Attributes button Select the Analyze Route button oN oO A N Select the Circular Line of Sight button on the bottom of the Analyze Route dialog box 9 Select the Travel Time button 10 Select the Edit Route button 11 Select the Manage button 12 Select the Center On button Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 19 May 2005 5 71 STP 11 25814 SM TG EMPLOY QUICK SEND FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0024 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system with software version 3 4 loaded precision lightweight global positioning system receiver PLGR enhanced position location radio system EPLRS if equipped and single channel ground air radio system SINCGARS with Internet controller INC Standards As a minimum you must Employ screen operations functions to manage and exchange information to include Applying a message to the Quick Send button naming the Button label and naming the Balloon label Performance Steps NOTE The operator must create and save a message to associate this button to before this task can be accomplished 1 Select the Quick Send button T
7. required Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related AR 25 11 AR 25 400 2 DA FORM 12 R DA FORM 17 DA FORM 17 1 DA PAM 25 30 DA PAM 25 33 DA PAM 25 40 DA PAM 25 33 DA PAM 25 40 19 May 2005 3 73 STP 11 25814 SM TG Subject Area 9 MILSTAR Skill Level 4 Subject Area 7 SATCOM Terminal Direction Prepare Emergency Plan 113 573 0006 Conditions Given a requirement to prepare an emergency plan AR 380 40 AR 380 5 and TB 380 41 Standards Prepared an emergency plan NOTE Due to the nature of this task a time limit is not established Performance Steps 1 Coordination and planning are vital to effective emergency procedures Emergency plans involving COMSEC material are coordinated with or incorporated into command emergency plans This ensures evacuation storage and or destruction is effectively and securely performed in the event of an actual emergency 2 Emergency measures are taken in the event of an emergency and include evacuation secure storage and destruction The commander decides which measures are taken and indicates those measures not considered feasible a Evacuation and or secure storage are considered before destruction However simultaneous impleme
8. 4 30 113 590 7007 Supervise the Maintenance of MILSTAR Command Post Terminal AN FRC 181 V 194 4 32 Subject Area 10 Communications Set AN USC 28 V 113 610 2046 Operate Satellite Communications Set 5 28 4 33 113 610 3085 Maintain Satellite Communications Set 28 4 36 Chapter 5 Digital Common CoMre ccieccccsecteccvsnteecceteetececatenieeevencneseeteenenedeecesceeVencnesestueneeedsnenseeubenseesinee 5 1 Subject Area 11 Digital Common Core 113 609 2053 Operate Automated Net Control Device ANCD 2 10 5 1 171 147 0001 PREPARE SEND COMBAT MESSAGES USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 5 3 171 147 0005 APPLY MESSAGE ADDRESSING FEATURES IN FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 5 9 171 147 0006 PERFORM MESSAGE MANAGEMENT USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 5 13 171 147 0007 PREPARE SEND OVERLAYS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 5 15 171 147 0008 PREPARE SEND REPORTS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 5 22 171 147 0009 PREPARE SEND FIRE ALERT MESSAGES USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 5 26 19 May 2005 iii STP 11 25814 SM TG 171 147 0010 PREPARE SEND ORDER REQUEST MESSAGES USING FBCB2 EE 5 30 171 147 0011 PERFORM BEFORE OPERATIONS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FBCB2 VE
9. Identify the control hierarchy A Perform TCCC operations a Perform reporting and notification procedures 1 Perform ENC reporting procedures a Prepare ECCM 8 hour S NET report Prepare SATCOM equipment report SER c Prepare HAZCON report d Prepare site status report SSR 2 Perform operational reporting to the SNC and senior DSCS controller SDC 8 Perform DECS operations a Initialize the DECS CC 1 Check the terminal connections 2 Apply power to the terminal 3 Apply power to the printer 4 Apply power to the MICROVAX II computer 5 Initialize the MICROVAX II computer 6 Establish a connection to the AN USC 28 from the CC operations terminal 7 Perform NCB transfer from CC maintenance account to operational system b Perform an orderly shutdown of the DECS CC 1 Perform notification procedures 2 Disable polling and LPM 3 Terminate DECS CC operations 4 Remove power from the MICROVAX II computer 5 Remove removable disk drives 6 Store removable disk drives 7 Remove power from printers 8 Remove power from terminals 9 Perform notification procedures c Verify CSU parameters 1 Verify CSU parameters for normal mode of operations 2 Verify CSU parameters for dual mode of operations 3 Perform DECS CC control transfer to the ODOC s workstation on the Operations floor 4 Assign the SPR function d Perform polling operations 1 Copy a polling sched
10. a Connected cables to antenna b Installed shelter power cable from transfer box to shelter 19 May 2005 3 23 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 8 Performed final antenna adjustments a Turned elevation vernier dial clockwise and leveled to correct elevation as indicated on the SAA 9 Anchored antenna a Placed antenna anchors b Attached and tightened down anchors 10 Installed hazard fence a Ensured signs were properly spaced and visible b Secured hazard fence 11 Anchored shelter a Placed shelter anchors b Attached and tightened down shelter tie downs 12 Installed shelter Grounded shelter Installed and secured shelter ladder Connected external user cables on curbside interface Connected external user cables on roadside interface Opened all air vents on shelter 13 Placed fire point midway between the generator set the shelter Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps passed Score the soldier if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related TB 43 0129 TM 11 5895 1433 12 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 9 6115 464 12 UNIT SOP 3 24
11. Performed CPC control transfer operations Identified control hierarchy Performed TCCC operations Performed DOSS operations o ON DO A Performed SCCE operations Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related DISA CIR 800 70 1 GSD TR 5644 TM 11 5895 1214 10 1 19 May 2005 4 9 STP 11 25814 SM TG Conduct Satellite Network Controller SNC Operations within the Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS 113 616 2028 Conditions Given the Smart Multi Circuit Terminal SMCT 11 DOSS DSCS Automatic Spectrum Analyzer DASA Spectrum Plot Utility SPU and DSCS Integrated Management System DIMS while working as the SNC in a DSCSOC and DISAC 800 70 1 GSD TR 5644 GSD TR 5645 Standford Telecom 1 Standford Telecom 2 STI UN 45005 STI UM 65026 and TM 11 5895 1410 13 Standards The SNC demonstrated how to monitor and establish networks performed network analysis and conducted transfer control operations utilizing the SMCT 1 DOSS DASA SPU DIMS IAW published procedures Performance Steps 1 Prepare operational logs 2 Establish networks a Direct the access of a stra
12. Verified that the operator performed satellite tracking and ensured appropriate satellite was acquired by contacting the DSCSOC Verified that the operator performed uplink carrier alignment in conjunction with the DSCSOC and IAW appropriate governing regulations TMs SOPs Verified that the operator performed uplink carrier level adjustments in conjunction with the DSCSOC and IAW appropriate governing regulations TMs SOPs Verified that the operator performed carrier to noise density ration check Verified that the operator configured equipment for automatic switchover as applicable Verified that the operator performed uplink and downlink signal traffic monitoring Verified that the operator performed terminal equipment selection and status monitoring NOTE The following performance measures are for the AN TSC 86 terminal 10 11 12 13 Verified that the operator correctly configured equipment according to the cut sheet provided and IAW governing regulations TMs SOPs Verified that the operator acquired and tracked the appropriate satellite and the HPA was in standby Verified that the operator accessed the satellite IAW with governing regulations in conjunction with the GMF controller at the DSCSOC Verified that the operator monitored communications status of equipment and passed appropriate reports at the designated time IAW governing regulations SOPs TMs Evaluation Guidanc
13. 8 Plan for orderly withdrawal to include a Specific instructions for destruction of material which cannot be evacuated NOTE In the event it becomes necessary to withdraw from a location materials ranging from classified papers to equipment may have to be destroyed in place The unit SOP will contain instructions for the implementation of site destruction plans The procedures to follow for the destruction of classified material are contained in the performance steps of task 113 573 0001 b Positive controls for implementation of the destruction plan Evaluation Preparation Setup You are provided with an operational tactical signal site equipment and personnel Brief Soldier You will direct the establishment of a site defense Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Designed a tentative site defense plan NOTE A well prepared site defense plan gives advance warning of attackers reduces the number of possible approach routes and assists in denying or delaying penetration by the enemy 2 Positioned security outposts around the site to provide early warning of an enemy approach NOTE Listening and observation posts should be established and manned as personnel and mission requirements permit a Established posts outside the security zone in protected locations b Established posts in locations that provide an unobstructed view of possible avenues of enemy approach 3 Established entrance
14. TM 11 5805 802 13 amp P TM 11 5810 309 10 TM 11 5815 602 10 TM 11 5820 1105 12 amp P References 4 Soldier s Manual of Common Tasks Skill Level 1 Item also produced in electronic media 31 August 2003 Soldier s Manual of Common Tasks SMCT Skill Levels 2 4 Item also produced in electronic media 31 August 2003 Operator and Unit Maintenance for AN CYZ 10 Automated Net Control Device ANCD with the Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio Systems SINCGARS Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0071 1 April 1993 Security Procedures for Safeguarding Accounting and Supply Control of COMSEC Material Item only produced in electronic media and included on EM 0248 3 July 2003 Safety Requirements for Use of Antenna and Mast Equipment Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0161 15 June 1986 Operator s Manual TSEC KG 84A Dedicated Loop Encryption Device 10 December 1984 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual Multiplexers TD 202 U TD 203 U TD 204 U TD 352 U and TD 353 U Restorers Pulse Form TD 206 G and TD 206B G and Converters Telephone Signal Reprinted w Basic Incl C 1 9 30 August 1966 Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual Converters Telephone Signal CV 1548 G and CV 1548A G 30 August 1973 Service and Maintenance Instructions AN GSC 24 V Multiplexer Set 1 January 1976 Operator s and Unit Maintenance Manual for Digital
15. 11 Receive the status report from the terminal 12 Verify carrier transmit performance with the GNCC b Conduct GMFSC test frequency access 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ww SO NS Se 3 Maintain GMFSC networks a Perform power balancing on an NATO Air Base System NABS terminal after network entry 1 Determine the need for uplink power balancing 2 Power balance the NT uplink 3 Determine the need for downlink power balancing 4 Power balance the NT downlink b Perform power balancing on a lightweight multi band satellite terminal LMST after network entry 1 Determine the need for uplink power balancing 2 Power balance the NT communications modem 3 Power balance the NT ITOS modem 4 Determine the need for downlink power balancing 5 Power balance the NT downlink c Maintain positive control of GMFSC terminals 1 React to the GMFSC terminal equipment failure 2 Perform directed deaccess NOTE Directing a GMFSC terminal to deaccess the satellite is a serious issue and will impact mission communications The GNCC will ensure that they have exhausted all efforts to restore positive control communications and that deaccess is in the best interest of all parties and concurrence is received from the SNC SDC and DISA 3 React to negative contact with the GMFSC terminal 4 Perform GMFSC network analysis 19 May 2005 4 15 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 5 Per
16. Operation Converter Telephone Signal Sample TSO Telecommunications Service Order DOSS User Manual 1 May 1995 DASA User Manual Diagnostic Configuration Reference Manual March 1980 Installation and Service Manual HP 1000 E Series Computer HP 2109B and HP 2113B February 1983 Operator s Manual HP 263VG Graphics Printer December 1978 Graphics Terminal User Manual January 1979 Graphics Terminal 2648A Reference Manual August 1979 Service Manual Model 2648A Graphics Terminal April 1979 Installation Manual 7906 Disc Drive March 1982 Service Manual 7906 Disc Drive July 1983 Operating and Service Manual 13037 Disc Controller March 1982 Installation and Service Manual 13175 13178 Disc Controller Interface Kits March 1982 IDNX Contractor Manual Promina 800 Series quick Reference Guide Promina 800 Series Common Equipment Modules Manual Promina 800 Series Trunk Modules Manual Promina 800 Series Voice Modules Manual Promina 800 Series Data Modules Manual Satellite SAT Reference REF Data Handbook Volume 2 Security Procedures for Safeguarding Accounting and Supply Control of COMSEC Material Item only produced in electronic media and included on EM 0248 3 July 2003 Time Division Multiplexer Group OB 119 FCC 100 V 7 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Communications Subsystem ON 505 V 1 P T ON 505 V 5 P T Item also produced in ele
17. STP 11 25814 SM TG TM 11 5895 1196 13 2 TM 11 5895 1196 13 3 TM 11 5895 1196 13 4 TM 11 5895 1196 13 5 TM 11 5895 1196 13 6 TM 11 5895 1196 13 7 TM 11 5895 1196 13 8 TM 11 5895 1196 13 9 TM 11 5895 1197 13 1 TM 11 5895 1197 13 10 TM 11 5895 1197 13 11 TM 11 5895 1197 13 3 TM 11 5895 1197 13 4 References 6 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 52 V 1 Fixed Earth Terminal Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 3 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 March 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate DS Maintenance Manual for Medium SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 52 V 1 Fixed Earth Terminal Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 3 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 March 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate DS Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 1 Fixed Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 March 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 1 Fixed Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 March 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 1 Fixed Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic
18. TASK TITLE PERFORM SYSTEM SHUTDOWN FOR SEN TASK NUMBER SYSTEM AN TTC 48 V 113 625 2090 FA PERFORMED OPERATIONAL SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES PERFORMED STORAGE PROCEDUR PERFORMED POWER STORAGE PROCEDUR ayaa PERFORMED 2 GROUNDED STRAP AND ROD REMOVAL PROCEDURES SECURED THE SHELTER DOOR AND ALL EXTERNAL COVERS SOLDIER S NAME SPC ANDERSON DA FORM 5164 R SEP 85 EDITION OF DEC 82 IS OBSOLETE Figure B 1 Sample DA Form 5164 R B 2 19 May 2005 Section STP 11 25814 SM TG GLOSSARY Acronyms amp Abbreviations SPU C U V 1SG AAR AC ACCP AFATDS AFC AFI AIT ALTNCT AME AN ANCD ANCOC AR ARSPOC ARTEP ASC ASI ASIP 19 May 2005 spectrum plot utility Switch Processing Unit CONFIDENTIAL FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Unclassified version First Sergeant after action review alternating current Active Component assistant commandant Army Correspondence Course Program Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System automatic frequency control Army functional course automatic fault isolation Advanced Individual Training alternate network control terminal antenna mounted electronics Annually frequency code automated net control device Advanced Noncommissioned Officer Course Army Regulation Army Reserve Army space operations center Army Training and Evaluation Program AUTODIN switching center Army Servic
19. c Verify that operators complete DA Form 5988 E and DA Form 2407 2 Ensure operators properly maintain the PTF a Verify that operators identify faulty unit and reconfigure the PTF to restore communications to an operational condition b Verify that operators isolate failed unit to LRU and perform repair replacement as dictated in appropriate TM c Verify that operators complete DA Form 5988 E and DA Form 2407 3 Ensure operators properly maintain the FCS a Verify that operators isolate faulty component of the FCS and perform repair replacement as dictated in the appropriate TM b Verify that operators complete DA Form 5988 E and DA Form 2407 4 Ensure operators properly maintain the Satellite Monitoring System DFCS NCT a Verify that operators conduct a handover of network control IAW SOP if applicable b Verify that operators isolate the faulty component and perform repair replacement as dictated in the appropriate TM c Verify that operators complete DA Form 5988 E and DA Form 2407 5 Ensure operators properly maintain the RT Group OW OZ 52 G a Verify that operators isolate the faulty component and perform repair replacement as dictated in the appropriate TM b Verify that operators complete DA Form 5988 E and DA Form 2407 6 Ensure operators properly maintain SATCOM Set AN USC 28 a Verify that operators isolate the faulty component and perform repair replacement as dictated in the appropriate TM b Verify that o
20. e Place faulted module in sleep mode f Replace module g Restore the MD 1352 circuit to an operational condition then go to performance step 15 10 Troubleshoot the CQM 248A a Perform the CQM 248A self test capabilities Refer to TM CQT 6400 IOM 02 page 96 NOTE Perform a self test each time the unit is turned on Reference Description of Status Conditions and Faults on page 143 and Command Error Code on page 139 in TM CQT 6400 IOM 02 b Replace faulted CQM 248A cards Refer to TM CQT 6400 IOM 02 page 97 NOTE All CQM 248A cards are static sensitive electronics c Restore the CQM 248A to an operational condition then go to performance step 15 11 Troubleshoot the Promina a Determine the most probable location of the fault upon any communications failure as indicated by alarm condition or notification of Promina software Refer to Chapter 4 in the IDNX Documentation Master Index R13 x3 Theory of Operation and Diagnostics b Ensure that the faulted condition of the Promina is not a result of a faulted user or data equipment that provides any input into the Promina Refer to the applicable Promina manual if the fault is the result of a faulted user or data input equipment c Begin fault isolation of the Promina if all user or data input equipment is functioning correctly d Observe the Operator Interface menu screen to determine if the Alarms Pending message is displayed e Access the Event Log which re
21. one time tape orderwire printed circuit card peripheral component interconnect Precision Lightweight Global Positioning System Receiver prescribed load list preventive maintenance performance measure s preventive maintenance checks and services Point to Point Protocol patch and test facility power unit processor unit power Quarterly frequency code radio access unit Reserve Component remote control resistance capacitance Reserve Forces radio frequency radio frequency interface subsystem removable hard disk cartridge Regional Signal Support Center situational awareness semiannually frequency code Satellite Access Approval Gateway Access Approval Glossary 7 STP 11 25814 SM TG SALT SAR SAR GAR SATCOM SCCE SDC SEN SER SINCGARS SITREP SM SMCT SMU SNC 501 SPR SSN STBY STD TACSOP TADSS TCC TDI TFOM TG TI Glossary 8 size activity location and time satellite access request Satellite Access Request Gateway Access Request satellite communication s satellite configuration control element senior DSCS controller signal data converter small extension node Satellite Education Network SATCOM equipment report Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System Situation Report soldier s manual Soldier s Manual of Common Tasks switch multiplex unit SCC memory unit satellite network controller signal operation instructions shadow polling receiver Systems Program Re
22. s platform gets that warning it should show in the FIPR Queue and on the Warnings Alert Marquee 2 All of the Tab groups in the FIPR dialog box have common push buttons at the bottom of the box Display button shows the highlighted message Delete button deletes the highlighted message Delete all in tab button deletes all the messages in the tab Refresh button updates the Queue when the system receives a new message while the user was viewing the messages by showing a black flag highlighted in yellow on the Refresh button Close button closes the dialog box and Help button helps the user with the FIPR Queue button b Select the Danger Zones tab The system will display the Danger Zones tab group NOTE If there are no warnings such as an 1 report listed in the Danger Zones tab then go to the Messages Button and create NBC1 and locate it close to your platform icon on the map then send it out Once this happens it should show in the Danger Zones tab c Select one of the danger zone messages in the Danger Zones tab by highlighting it The system will show the message highlighted in black d Select the Details button at the bottom of the Danger Zones tab The system will display the Hook dialog box which shows the content of the danger zone NOTE From the Hook dialog box the user can delete and edit the message e Select the Close button The system will return to the ops screen f Reselect the FIPR button and then the Warn
23. 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Organizational Direct and General Support Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Air Conditioner Compact Vertical 208 V 3 Phase 18 000 BTU Cooling 12 000 BTU Heating Trane Models 50 60 Hz Model CE20VAL6 and 400 Hz M CQM 248A PSK Digital Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual Tactical Multichannel Radio Communications Techniques Item also produced in electronic media 3 October 1988 Introduction to the MILSTAR System 1 December 2003 MILSTAR Resource Management 1 December 2003 MILSTAR Cryptographic Management 1 October 2002 References 17 This page intentionally left blank STP 11 25814 SM TG HANDS ON EVALUATION For use of this form see STP 11 25S14 SM TG the proponent agency is TRADOC TASK TITLE TASK NUMBER SCORE Check One PASS FAIL b c d PERFORMANCE STEP TITLE ey gp sedo pe safe EVALUATOR S NAME UNIT SOLDIER S NAME STATUS GO O DA FORM 5164 R SEP 85 EDITION OF DEC 82 IS OBSOLETE APD V2 01 19 May 2005 This page intentionally left blank STP 11 25814 SM TG 19 MAY 2005 By Order of the Secretary of the Army PETER J SCHOOMAKER General United States Army Chief of Staff Official Se SANDRA R RILEY Administrative Assistant to t
24. 5 Brought up performance monitor display and verified that all system parameters were within tolerance Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related TM 11 5895 1196 13 2 TM 11 5895 1197 13 3 19 May 2005 3 13 STP 11 25814 SM TG Operate SATCOM Terminal AN FSC 78B or AN GSC 39B 113 590 2147 Conditions Given a SATCOM terminal AN FSC 78B V or AN GSC 39B V TSO from the Satellite Network Controller SNC ephemeris data and test measurement and diagnostic equipment TMDE listed in TM 11 5895 1535 12 Standards The SATCOM terminal was operational Performance Steps 1 Perform preoperational adjustments Follow the appropriate TM procedures for the AN GSC 39B AN FSC 78B AN FSC 78B Perform satellite acquisition Perform satellite tracking AN FSC 78B or AN FSC 78B Perform carrier to noise density ratio check Perform manual switchover Configure terminal equipment for automatic switchover Perform downlink traffic monitoring Perform uplink signal and traffic monitoring Perform terminal equipment selection and status monitoring Performance Measures 1 N O A N Performed preoperation
25. AMG CMA subsystem See performance measures 5 through 9 b SGG See performance measures 10 through 14 c FCG See performance measures 15 through 19 d Transmitter Group See performance measures 20 through 24 e Antenna Group See performance measures 25 through 29 4 Verified that the operator restored communications by using spare equipment before beginning repair and replacement procedures on defective equipment NOTE The following performance measures are performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the AMG 5 Verified that the operator determined the faulted portion in the AMG 6 Ensured the operator inspected all components and cables for defects and proper connections 7 Verified that the operator isolated fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment 8 Verified that the operator correctly repaired the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM 9 Ensured the operator verified the successful repair of the AMG by testing operating NOTE The following performance measures are performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the SGG 10 Verified that the operator determined the faulted portion of the SGG 11 Ensured the operator inspected all components and cables for defects and proper connections 12 Verified that the operator isolated fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment 13 Verified
26. Biological Chemical NBC 1 message allows the user to transmit observer s basic data on a single NBC attack The message will automatically create a georeference location on the SA Display a Select the Combat Msgs button on the Function Bar or the F3 button on the keyboard b Select the NBC 1 tab The system will display the NBC 1 template c Select the NBC Event Type pull down arrow The system will display the NBC Event Type options list d Select an option from the list The system displays the selection in NBC Event Type text box e Select the Delivery Means pull down arrow The system will display the Delivery Means option list f Make a selection from the option list The system will display the selection in the text box g Select the first Map button to the right of the Attack Location 1 text box The Combat Messages dialog box will disappear and the cursor will be replaced with a cross hair NOTE There are two Attack Location fields Do the same for the second Attack Location h Select a location on the map and the system will display the location in the Attack Location 1 text box i Or select the LRF button and laser the location The location will appear in the Attack Location 1 text box j Enter the Attack Time 1 Zulu data by selecting the NOW button Or Selecting the plus or buttons to increase or decrease the Day Hour and Minute k Enter the Attack Time 2 Zulu data by selecting the NOW button Or Selecting t
27. Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet and or DA Form 2407 Maintenance Request Standards Restored communications by using spare equipment Performance Steps 1 Check the fault and system status panel FSSP 14A16 for visual audible alarm situations Localize fault to a functional uplink downlink and tracking Determine the defective functional group 2 3 4 Restore communications by using spare equipment 5 Complete DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407 Performance Measures 1 Checked the FSSP 14A16 for visual audible alarm situations Localized fault to a functional uplink downlink and tracking Determined the defective functional group 2 3 4 Restored communications by using spare equipment 5 Completed DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407 Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required DA FORM 2404 DA FORM 2407 DA PAM 738 750 TM 11 5895 1532 30 TM 11 5895 1558 13 19 May 2005 Related TM 11 5895 1531 30 TM 11 5895 1533 30 TM 11 5895 1534 30 TM 11 5895 1535 12 TM 11 5895 1536 13 TM 11 5895 1537 13 TM 11 5895 1557 30 1 TM 11 5985 359 13 STP 11 25814 SM TG Maintain SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 52 V 113 590 3170 Conditions Given a defe
28. Figure 4 29 Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Set up baseband and COMSEC equipment IAW the MTPH Volume 1 Procedures 3 1 1 3 1 2 and 3 1 3 Powered up reset the terminal IAW TM 11 5820 1105 12 amp P Terminal Power Up Reset Checkout Procedures 13 sheets Figure 4 27 or the MTPH Volume 1 Procedures 3 2 2 or 3 2 3 and 3 3 1 Performed simplified terminal initialization procedures IAW the MTPH Volume 1 Procedures 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 and 3 4 4 Loaded terminal COMSEC TRANSEC keys IAW the MTPH Volume 1 Procedures 3 5 1 3 5 2 3 5 3 3 5 4 and 3 5 5 Performed terminal control procedures IAW the MTPH Volume 1 Procedures 3 6 1 3 6 2 3 6 3 3 6 4 and 3 6 5 19 May 2005 4 27 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 6 Performed message processing procedures IAW the MTPH Volume 1 Procedures 3 7 1 3 7 2 3 7 3 and 3 7 4 7 Performed EHF acquisition and logon procedures IAW the MTPH Volume 1 Procedures 3 8 1 3 8 2 3 8 3 3 8 4 3 8 5 3 8 6 3 8 7 and 3 8 8 8 Performed EHF logoff procedure IAW the MTPH Volume 1 Procedure 3 9 1 9 Powered down the terminal IAW TM 11 5820 1105 12 amp P Terminal Shutdown Procedures 5 sheets Figure 4 39 or the MTPH Volume 1 Procedure 3 2 2 or 3 2 3 Figure 4 29 Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are pa
29. Overlays and Obstacle Overlays If the user moves the Filters dialog box to the side the user can view the labels icons and symbols appear and disappear from the screen as some of the functions are selected 2 Select the SA tab if it is not already selected The system will display the SA tab group NOTE The SA tab group allows the user to access and filter SA data with the following functions All On which displays all of the SA data that has been sent or received on the SA display area All Off which filters out everything on the SA display area except the map overlays overlay objects and the platforms own position Labels which filters the labels that are attached to the SA data Friendly which enables the user to display or hide designated friendly platforms Enemy which enables the user to display or hide designated enemy platforms Unknown which displays or hides unidentified units and Georef which displays or hides geographical references a Select the None radio button under the Labels field The labels for all SA on the map will disappear 5 74 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps NOTE Notice how the word SET highlighted in yellow appeared on the Filters button on the function bar This is to inform the user that filters have been set By selecting the All button the labels will reappear b Select the Select radio button under the Friendly field The Currency Dimension Type an
30. Power DISP Display and CPU Processor Unit on the DU Controls and Indicators Panel 2 Verify that the Local Comm status is G green which is the first gumball from the left on the Classification Status Bar on the FBCB2 Ops Main screen 3 Verify that the Global Positioning System GPS status is G green on the 2 Ops Main screen which is the second gumball from the left on the Classification Status Bar 4 If so equipped verify that the Battlefield Combat Identification System BCIS status is G green on the FBCB2 Ops Main screen Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 19 May 2005 5 39 STP 11 25814 SM TG PERFORM AFTER OPERATIONS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES ON FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0014 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system with software version 3 4 loaded and a TM 11 7010 326 10 The Before and During checks have been completed Standards As a minimum you must Perform the After Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services on the FBCB2 system in sequence with the TM The Before and During checks have been completed Performance Steps 1 Check the AN UYK 128 V Computer a Ensure all computer components
31. Select an Acknowledge check box The checkmark will appear in the box NOTES 1 Use the Acknowledge function if the user wants the receiving station to confirm receipt of the message or if you want the operator to respond to the message The Acknowledge function also activates the incoming message queue of the receiving station 2 MA Machine Acknowledge The receiving system transmits an automatic response to the sending system when the message is received OA Operator Acknowledge The receiving system transmits an automatic response to the sending system when the operator opens the message There is an audible alert associated with this type of response as long as it is not muted OR Operator response The operator is required to indicate compliance and give a short written reply There is an audible alert associated with this type of response i Select the Security level radio button associated with the message The radio button will highlight If in Secret mode NOTE The Security Level allows the user to select the classification of an outgoing message This only works on a system that is configured as Secret An unclassified user cannot send a secret message j Select the Addresses tab The Addresses tab options will display NOTE This tab contains the following options Add adds addresses Delete deletes selected addresses Delete All deletes all selected addresses Search Executes a search for
32. Select the Old pull down arrow and make a selection from the list between 10 minutes and 4 hours NOTE The Old feature allows the user to set the elapse time before a friendly SA symbol becomes old grays out on the map If the system does not update its position report in the prescribed time the system marks the last position as old c Select the Purge pull down arrow and make a selection from the list between 1 hour and 20 hours The system will display the time in the Purge text box NOTES 1 The Purge Time is the elapse time before your system purges the symbol from your map deletes it off your map if the friendly system doesn t send its position report 2 You must select the settings according to your SOP 3 Restore all SA Default settings allows the user to restore the settings back to the default d Select the Apply button 10 Select the Observed Tab The system displays the Observed Tab group Complete the Observed tab exactly like the Friendly tab 11 Select the Air tab The system will display the Air tab group Complete the Air tab exactly like the Observed tab a Select the Apply button The system will save the settings b Select the OK button The system will return to the Ops screen 5 58 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Select the Admin Button F6 Select the Platform Settings Tab Select the Location tab Se
33. a Verify that operators configure the TSSP IAW the TSO b Verify that operators monitor the TSSP for alarms 5 Ensure the AN USC 63 MIDAS operates IAW TM 11 5895 1630 13 amp P a Verify that operators configure the MIDAS IAW the TSO NOTE Reference Task Number 113 583 2625 Operate Digital Communications Satellite Subsystem as well as the TM for specific steps procedures in configuring the MIDAS b Verify that operators monitor the MIDAS for alarms 6 Ensure the OM 73 modulator demodulator operates IAW TM 11 5895 1346 10 a Verify that operators configure the OM 73 IAW the TSO b Verify that operators monitor the OM 73 for alarms 7 Ensure the MD 1352 BEM operates IAW TM 11 5895 1687 13 amp P a Verify that operators configure the BEM IAW the TSO b Verify that operators monitor the BEM for alarms 8 Ensure the CQM 248A operates IAW applicable operator s manuals a Verify that operators configure the CQM 248A IAW the TSO b Verify that operators monitor the CQM 248A for alarms 9 Ensure the Promina operates IAW applicable operator s manuals a Verify that operators configure the Promina IAW the TSO NOTE Reference Task Number 113 583 2625 Operate Digital Communications Satellite Subsystem as well as applicable operator s manuals for specific steps procedures in configuring the Promina b Verify that operators monitor the Promina for alarms 3 52 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 10 Ensu
34. that permits connection of the external devices the Net ID Frequency which is the Network identification numbers and or frequency the Pckt Mode which enables the transmission and reception of data blocks containing control information such as routing address and error control as well as data f Open the R1 EPLRS Radio by selecting the sign or double clicking the folder NOTE The R1 EPLRS Radio is the Enhanced Position Location Reporting System which is an integrated Command Control and Communications C3 system that provides near real time data communications position location navigation identification and reporting information on the modern battlefield The sub components are R1 EPLRS 1 LCN 2 and so on depending on how many channels The Logical Channel Number LCN packet switched networks allocate a number at the time a call is set up which distinguishes packets belonging to one call on a link from all others 3 Select the SA Tab The system will display the SA tab group NOTE The SA Tab function is used to give the user information on the Current SA server the Broadcast net SA net member count switching of nets 1 2 and CSMA Server connectivity and status on Tl location quality a Select the Net 2 radio button The system will switch to that net if your platform has that capability NOTE When you switch the net all the information on the SA tab also switches b Select the Net 1 radio button to switch bac
35. 158 V Maintained the PTF AN FSC 160 V Maintained the SATCOM Set AN USC 28 Maintained the RT Group OW OZ 52 G Maintained the ITOS Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related DA FORM 2407 DA FORM 5988 E DA PAM 738 750 TM 11 5895 1188 12 TM 11 5895 1188 34 TM 11 5895 1328 13 TM 11 5895 1328 23P TM 11 5895 1338 13 TM 11 5895 1357 13 1 TM 11 5895 1357 13 2 TM 11 5895 1368 13 TM 11 5895 1399 13 TM 11 5895 808 13 1 TM 11 5895 808 13 10 TM 11 5895 808 13 11 TM 11 5895 808 13 2 TM 11 5895 808 13 3 TM 11 5895 808 13 4 TM 11 5895 808 13 5 TM 11 5895 808 13 6 TM 11 5895 808 13 7 TM 11 5895 808 13 8 TM 11 5895 808 13 9 TM 11 5895 808 23P 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Direct Satellite Network Control within the Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS 113 616 7035 Conditions Given shift personnel to operate the SNC FNC GNC ENC and CPC positions while working as the SDC in a DSCSOC and DIMS Manual DISAC 800 70 1 Standards The SDC ensured qualified personnel were operating the positions created shift schedules and supervised personnel on assigned duties IAW published procedures Performance Steps 1 Prepare master station log Perf
36. 30905 5735 Unless this manual states otherwise masculine pronouns do not refer exclusively to men 19 May 2005 This page intentionally left blank STP 11 25814 SM TG CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1 1 GENERAL The soldier training publication STP identifies the individual military occupational specialty MOS and training requirements for soldiers in various specialties Another source of STP task data is the General Dennis J Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library at http train army mil portal index jsp Commanders trainers and soldiers should use the STP to plan conduct and evaluate individual training in units The STP is the primary MOS reference to support the self development and training of every soldier in the unit It is used with the Soldier s Manual of Common Tasks Army training and evaluation programs ARTEPs and FM 7 0 Training the Force to establish effective training plans and programs that integrate soldier leader and collective tasks This chapter explains how to use the STP in establishing an effective individual training program It includes doctrinal principles and implications outlined in FM 7 0 Based on these guidelines commanders and unit trainers must tailor the information to meet the requirements for their specific unit 1 2 TRAINING REQUIREMENT Every soldier noncommissioned officer NCO warrant officer and officer has one primary mission to be trained and ready to fight and win our na
37. 4 Tested and verified that communications or other site requirements were restored and fully operational 5 Completed DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407 Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related DA FORM 2404 DA FORM 2407 DA PAM 738 750 TM 11 5895 846 14 3 36 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Subject Area 5 Strategic Satellite Terminal AN TSC 49 V Operate SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 49 V 113 590 2137 Conditions Given a SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 49 V DA PAM 738 750 DISAC 800 E70 11 TM 5 6115 545 12 TM 11 5895 1162 10 unit SOP applicable TSOs DA Form 2404 and DD Form 1970 Motor Equipment Utilization Record Standards The AN GSC 49 V operator powered up performed day to day operations and shut down the shelter during normal and unusual conditions DANGER HAZARD POTENTIAL POSSIBILITY OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK MOVING MACHINERY FUEL BURNS OR EXPLOSIONS EXIST WHEN PERFORMING THIS TASK Performance Steps 1 Operate generator under unusual conditions DANGER RADIO FREQUENCY RF RADIATION HAZARD 2 Adjust antenna elevation safety switches Operate power transfer switch Power up shelter Operate IF RF patch panel Operate frequenc
38. 5 6 in the TM b Replace faulted AN USC 64 components IAW Chapter 5 16 in the TM c Return system to an operational status b c d 15 Return the DCSS to an operational state a Monitor for alarms b Ensure that all communications are passing traffic Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Performed equipment power up procedures 2 Isolated fault to piece of equipment 3 Troubleshot DCSS equipment to individual piece of faulted equipment 19 May 2005 3 11 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures NOTE Not all DCSS locations are equipped with the following DCSS equipment If equipment is not listed reference equipment TM or Manufacturer s Manual o N OC A 1 Troubleshot the 100 Troubleshot the TD 1389 LRM Troubleshot the TD 1337 TSSP Troubleshot the MIDAS Troubleshot the OM 73 V G Troubleshot the MD 1352 BEM Troubleshot the CQM 248A 11 12 13 14 15 Troubleshot the Promina Troubleshot the SMU Troubleshot the Timeplex Troubleshot the AN USC 64 ICC Returned the DCSS equipment to an operational state Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related IDNX MANUAL TM 11 580
39. 7 Ensure the operator enters the electronic counter countermeasures ECCM network in TDI or TIME APPROX a Ensure the operator performs time entries b Ensure the operator schedules the CSU c Ensure the operator loads range data and code of the day COD entries d Ensure the operator loads and initializes the KGV 9 e Ensure the operator corrects for time offset as required f Ensure the operator makes initial status report to the NCT 8 Ensure the operator exits the ECCM network and re enters in standard time a Ensure the operator makes a full status report as required by DISA circulars to the NCT upon re entry into the ECCM network b Ensure the operator performs time entries as required c Ensure the operator loads range data and COD entries as required d Ensure the operator loads and initializes the KGV 9s as required e Ensure the operator corrects for time offset as required NOTE Performance step 9 is an NCT and ALTNCT function only 9 Ensure the operator performs a coordinated ECCM network control transfer IAW SOP and appropriate TM as required a Ensure the operator polls terminals for status as required b Ensure the operator monitors the probes and controls the network as required NOTE Performance steps 10 through 14 pertain to the configuration and operation of the communications receiver transmitter COMM RT 10 Verify the patching connectivity of equipment a Verify IF RF patching b Verify KY 883 co
40. A 44 Z NO SIG 7 N130C113P24 LANDSTHL GE4NM2 BLDG DIRECTIONS ADDRESS 3383 RM FL 1 CONTACT SUPERVISOR DSN 486 8604 CML 06371 86 8604 MAIL ADDRESS CDR181SIGCO CMR 402 APO AE 09180 1 A INDX T BUSS CROSS CONNECT FRONT CARD INTERFACE PRC INTERFACE PRC FRONT CARD D REAR CARD INTERFACE I F D E F UJ rv 2WEXS SLOT 15 ADNX 48 12B G CABLE CROSS CONNECT 2 A 44 CNOSIG 7 N12C35P28 LANDSTHL 4 BLDG DIRECTIONS ADDRESS 3383 RM FL 1 CONTACT SUPERVISOR DSN 486 8604 CML 0637 1 86 8604 MAIL ADDRESS CDR181SIGCO CMR 402 APO AE 09180 1 A INTERFACE CABLE CROSS CONNECT B TERM 4W C TD 1389 LOW RATE MULTIPLEXER LRM 2 A 44 R NO SIG Z J UNDTMNDL ZVOTS1 BLDG DIRECTIONS ADDRESS DEPLOYED SATCOM VAN RM FL 1 CONTACT HOME BASE SUPVR DSN 385 2115 2195 CML 06217 302115 2195 MAIL ADDRESS HOME BASE 4ASOS LGS UNIT 29903 135 APO AE 09086 1 A TD 1389 LOW RATE MULTIPLEXER LRM TERM 4W C INTERFACE CABLE CROSS CONNECT 2 A 44 R NO SIG 2 4 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG K UNDTMNDL ZVOTAC BLDG DIRECTIONS ADDRESS COMMUNICATIONS VAN RM FL 1 CONTACT HOME BASE SUPVR DSN 385 2115 2195 CML 06217 302115 2195 MAIL ADDRESS HOME BASE 4ASOS LGS UNIT 29903 BOX 135 APO AE 09086 1 CABLE CROSS CONNECT BLACK DC PATCH CONNECTOR CABLE CROSS CONNECT KG 84A RED DC PATCH CONNECTOR CABLE CROSS CONNEC
41. AN GSC 52 or AN TSC 86 113 590 7002 Conditions As a section chief SATCOM systems supervisor SATCOM maintenance NCO SATCOM operations NCO or SATCOM chief given AN GSC 52 SATCOM terminal AN FSC 78 heavy SATCOM terminal AN GSC 39 medium SATCOM terminal or SATCOM terminal AN TSC 86 in an operating condition TM 11 5895 1196 13 2 through TM 11 5895 1196 13 9 TM 11 5895 1197 13 1 through TM 11 5895 1197 13 11 TM 11 5895 1531 30 TM 11 5895 1532 30 TM 11 5895 1533 30 TM 11 5895 1534 30 TM 11 5895 1535 12 TM 11 5895 1536 13 TM 11 5895 846 14 and unit SOP supervise soldiers to operate appropriate terminal Standards Successfully supervised the operation of the AN FSC 78 AN GSC 39 AN GSC 52 or AN TSC 86 SATCOM terminal Performance Steps NOTE The following performance steps are for strategic terminals AN FSC 78 AN GSC 39 AN GSC 52 1 Verify that the operator performs preoperational adjustments and setup IAW appropriate TM and applicable TSO 2 Verify that the operator performs satellite acquisition IAW with appropriate TM and governing SOP 3 Verify that the operator performs satellite tracking and ensures that appropriate satellite is acquired by contacting the Defense Satellite Communications System Operations Center DSCSOC 4 Verify that the operator performs uplink carrier alignment in conjunction with the DSCSOC and IAW appropriate governing regulations TMs SOPs 5 Verify that the operator performs uplin
42. AN TRC 194 V 113 590 7006 Conditions Given an AN FRC 181 V or AN TRC 194 V TM 11 5820 1105 12 amp P MTPH Volumes 1 and 2 applicable TSOs and operating requirements Standards Supervised that all requirements for the operational direction of the MILSTAR Command Post Terminal were promptly completed or resolved and communications traffic was passed Performance Steps 1 N O Verify that the operator properly set up baseband COMSEC equipment IAW the MTPH 2 3 Verify that the operator follows the power up reset terminal procedures IAW the Verify that the operator correctly performs the simplified terminal initialization procedures IAW the MTPH Verify that the operator correctly loads the terminal COMSEC TRANSEC keys IAW procedures in the MTPH Verify that the operator performs the terminal control procedures IAW the MTPH Verify that the operator conducts the message processing procedures IAW the MTPH Verify that the operator performs the EHF acquisition and logon procedures IAW the MTPH Verify that the operator adheres to the EHF logoff procedures IAW the MTPH Verify that the operator powers down the terminal IAW the Terminal Shutdown Procedures in the MTPH Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Verified that the operator properly set up baseband and COMSEC equipment IAW the MTPH Verified that the operator followed the power up reset termina
43. Analyze the scenario for supportability Save the scenario in the analyst account Perform scenario compares Retrieve the scenario into the SATCOMS control account Perform DNPS processing Print database reports Review database reports 2 3 4 5 B Save the scenario the control account B b OD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Download the ODB to the DASA Verify the ODB download Annotate changes in the database log Perform notification procedures change for an alternate DSCSOC Receive ODM and supporting documents Retrieve the scenario into the analyst account Review database reports Perform DNPS processing Analyze the scenario for supportability Save the scenario in the analyst account Perform scenario compares Retrieve the scenario into the SATCOMS control account Perform DNPS processing 10 11 12 13 14 15 c OD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Review database reports 11 Save the scenario in the control account d Update DNPS orbit vectors 1 Receive orbit vectors from the CPC 2 Input vectors using the on line static database loader 3 Analyze satellite subpoint for orbit vector correctness 4 5 0 1 Perform DNPS processing Analyze the range rate summary for orbit vector correctness 4 12 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 6 Update control account sc
44. Apply power to the COMM RT unit power supplies Apply power to the COMM RT cabinet Apply power to the programmable controller Verify the position of all KGV 9 switches Set the IU switches Load the programmable controller with the operating program b Perform an orderly shutdown of the AN USC 28 1 Perform notification procedures 2 Terminate network operations 3 Zeroize KGV 9s 4 Remove power from the COMM RT cabinet 5 Remove power from the COMM RT unit power supplies 6 Remove power from the CSU cabinet 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Remove power from the CSU power supplies Remove power from the programmable controller Remove power from the IU Perform notification procedures 19 May 2005 4 3 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps c Assign COMM RT functions 1 Assign the mitigated polling receiver MPR function 2 Assign the mitigated control transmitter mitigated emergency receiver MCT MER function 3 Assign the LPM function 4 Assign the SPR function d Perform cryptographic updates e Perform time offset management f Perform initial entry transmitter IET verification g Perform a transmit IF output variation test 1 AN USC 28 initialization 2 Test setup 3 Perform control transmitter break point determination 4 Perform IET break point determination 5 Remove removable disk drives 5 Perform COMM RT break point determination 6 Determine t
45. C1 2 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 September 1991 Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminals AN TSC 85B V 1 and AN TSC 85B V 2 Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 2 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 September 1991 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminals AN TSC 93B V 1 and AN TSC 93B V 2 Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 September 1991 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminals AN TSC 93B V 1 and AN TSC 93B V 2 Organizational Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 2 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 September 1991 Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminals AN TSC 93B V 1 and AN TSC 93B V 2 Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 2 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 September 1991 Operator s System Manual for Ground Mobile Forces Satellite Communications Systems Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 1 September 1992 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Signal Generator Group 23 November 1994 19 May 2005 TM 11 5895 1532 30 TM 11 5895 1533 30 TM 11 5895 1534 30 TM 11 5895 1535 12 TM 11 5895 1536 13 TM 11 5895 1537 13 TM
46. Edit dialog box The system will cycle to the next object and display the grid coordinates of the object NOTE Each time the user selects the right arrow it will cycle to the next object b Select a grid from the list by highlighting it with the mouse pointer The grid will highlight c Select the Fill Location button The Overlay Edit dialog box will disappear and the pointer will become a cross hair d Select a spot on the map where the user wants to move the object for a single points or a dimension of a multi point object The Overlay Edit dialog box will reappear e Select the Apply button The object or dimension will move to the new location NOTE Do the same for all the objects or dimensions that need to be moved or modified f Select the OK button The system will return to the Overlay toolbox 8 Select the 2525B The system will display the 2525B tab group NOTE The 2525B sub tab function allows the user to acquire Warfighting symbols Tactical graphics weather and signal intelligence symbols The 2525B sub tab works in the same way as the Group sub tab Choose from the Dimension Type and Sub type menus in order to select the desired symbol a Select the Dimension pull down arrow The system will display the Dimension menu b Select a symbol from the list The symbol name will display in the Dimension text box c Select the Type pull down arrow The system will display the Type menu d Select a type from the me
47. Enter the network in STD j Transfer DECS CC control to the Objective DSCS Operations Center s ODOC workstation on the Operations floor k Start link power monitor LPM Start polling m Notify the Global Network Operations and Security Center GNOSC and network terminals 3 Maintain ECCM networks a Perform ECCM special terminal access procedures 1 Perform ENC pre network coordination 2 Disable polling and LPM 3 Perform monitoring of terminals 4 Perform normal subnetwork transition 5 Conduct abnormal network entry and transition b Perform ECCM network communications 1 Perform free text CCC message NCT configuration 2 Perform predefined CCC message NCT configuration 3 Perform free text return CCC RCCC message ALTNCT configuration 4 Perform predefined RCCC message ALTNCT configuration 5 Perform operator to operator communication NCT configuration FTO 19 2005 4 1 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 6 Perform operator to operator communication with the NCT ALTNCT configuration 7 Receive CCC emergency receiver ER messages c Execute a network reconfiguration 1 Coordination with DECS sites 2 Coordination with manual sites 3 Download NCB files 4 Perform network reconfiguration 5 Remove power from printers d Perform power balancing of the ECCM network Perform ECCM network analysis Perform ECCM control transfer operations
48. FCG Ensure the operator inspects all components and cables for defects and proper connections Verify that the operator isolates the fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment Verify that the operator correctly repairs the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM Ensure the operator verifies the successful repair of the FCG by testing operating NOTE The following performance steps are performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the Transmitter Group 20 21 22 23 24 Verify that the operator determines the faulted portion of the Transmitter Group Ensure the operator inspects all components and cables for defects and proper connections Verify that the operator isolates the fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment Verify that the operator correctly repairs the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM Ensure the operator verifies the successful repair of the Transmitter Group by testing operating NOTE The following performance steps are performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the Antenna Group 25 26 27 28 29 Verify that the operator determines the faulted portion of the Antenna Group Ensure the operator inspects all components and cables for defects and proper connections Verify that the operator isolates the fault to the correct LRU
49. FORM 2407 TM 11 5895 1162 24 1 DA PAM 738 750 TM 11 5895 1162 24 2 TM 11 5895 846 14 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Skill Level 2 Subject Area 6 SATCOM Terminal Supervision Supervise the Maintenance of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V 113 589 7121 Conditions Given a Tactical SATCOM terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V lint free cloth or brush cleaning compound DA PAM 738 750 TM 9 6115 464 12 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 11 5895 1433 12 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1433 34 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 TM 11 5895 1434 34 and TM 11 5895 1127 20 L3 Communications Manuals PX19671 Rev A PX19672 Rev A and PX19674 Rev B DA Form 2404 and Unit SOP Standards Correctly performed all performance measures Performance Steps 1 Verify that operational PMCS activities are accomplished for curbside equipment IAW applicable TM for equipment being inspected a Verify that before operation PMCS is accomplished b Verify that during operation PMCS is accomplished c Verify that after operation PMCS is accomplished 2 Verify that operational PMCS activities are accomplished for roadside equipment IAW applicable TM for equipment being inspected a Verify that before operation PMCS is accomplished b Verify that during operation PMCS is accomplished c Verify that after operation PMCS is accomplished 3 Verify that maintenance PMCS activities are accomplished on curbside equipment IAW app
50. Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required DA PAM 738 750 19671 REVA PX19672 REVA PX19674 REVB TM 11 5895 1433 12 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1433 34 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 TM 11 5895 1434 34 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 9 6115 464 12 UNIT SOP Related TM 11 5820 1 128 34 TM 11 5895 1 127 10 TM 11 5895 1 127 20 TM 11 5895 1 127 34 TM 11 5895 1128 10 TM 11 5895 1128 20 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Supervise the Installation of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V 113 589 7122 Conditions Given a tactical SATCOM terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V antenna group AS 3036 TSC generator set PU 405A or PU 753 M predetermined site location and predetermined azimuth and elevation TB 43 0129 TM 9 6115 464 12 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 11 5895 1433 12 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1433 34 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 and TM 11 5895 1434 34 L3 Communications Manuals PX19671 Rev PX19672 Rev and PX19674 Rev B and Unit SOP Standards Supervised the installation of the AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V within 1 hour and 30 minutes IAW appropriate manuals and SOP and observed and implemented all safety requirements listed in TB 43 0129 Perfor
51. Perform the Assign DTG 12 Perform the Assign SEN RAU command 13 Perform the Assign Terminal Service command for SEN RAU DIBTS and analog NATO 14 Save the created database according to the procedures outlined in TM 11 5805 802 13 amp P Chapter 2 c Ensure circuits are operational and passing communications 11 Operate the AN USC 64 Integrated Control Console ICC a Logon the AN USC 64 ICC 1 Login as an operator 2 Enter the default mode AlarmAndICC b Configure AN USC 64 equipment 1 Adding modifying the Alarm Rack type 74 2 Deleting the Alarm Rack type 74 3 Adding deleting configuring devices c Monitor the AN USC 64 equipment status and faults 1 Viewing current alarms 2 Visual alarm mapping 3 Viewing system configuration 12 Operate the Timeplex Link 2 system a Configure the following Timeplex Link 2 cards if applicable b Place the configuration on line c Perform software and hardware loopbacks d Monitor for alarms Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Configured equipment as specified in the TSO 2 Operated the FCC 100 IAW TM 11 5805 795 13 amp P 3 Operated the TD 1389 LRM 3 6 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 4 Operated the TD 1337 5 Operated the AN USC 63 MIDAS 6 Operated the OM 73 V G 7 Operated the MD 1352 BEM 8 9 0 Operated the CQ
52. Platform location and Quality manually setting the Course Speed Elevation and Altitude if applicable manually Determine if the proper Data Net Frequency and Radio Set ID is set setting the Requesters call sign and Medevac Voice Net Frequency setting the Display Message and audio settings Local time zone Time and Motion filters and the Reporting mode Performance Steps 1 Select the Admin Button F6 The system will display the Admin dialog box NOTE The Exit Ops Destroy FBCB2 OK Apply Close and Help buttons at the bottom of the Admin dialog box stay displayed when cycling through each of the tabs in the Admin dialog box Those buttons do the same thing in each tab 1 The Exit Ops button allows the user to exit the Ops screen and go back to the session manager screen 2 The Destroy FBCB2 button allows the user to destroy the FBCB2 by overwriting the files 3 The Ok button allows the user to make the changes and closes the dialog box 4 The Apply button allows the user to make the changes and keeps the dialog box open 5 The Help button allows the user to get help on the Admin function 2 Select the Platform Settings Tab The system will display two additional tabs the Location and the Misc tab NOTE This function allows the user to manually enter the vehicle platform location The PLGR usually provides this information If the PLGR is inoperable the user can manually enter the required settings If the platform
53. Priority 1 Used superseded classified key marked CRYPTO is the most sensitive COMSEC material It must be given the highest priority to prevent compromise All superseded and current classified key marked CRYPTO except authenticators CONFIDENTIAL tactical operations codes unused OTP and OTT and unused point to point two copy key b Priority 2 Superseded current and future card reader insert boards CRIBs c Priority 3 TOP SECRET multiholder key which will be effective within the next 30 days d Priority 4 Superseded tactical operations codes 3 74 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps e Priority 5 SECRET and CONFIDENTIAL multiholder key which will be effective within the next 30 days f Priority 6 Sensitive pages of cryptoequipment maintenance manuals or the complete manual g Priority 7 Classified COMSEC equipment elements or subassemblies such as printed circuit boards and module boards in the order listed in the appropriate maintenance manuals h Priority 8 The remaining COMSEC equipment maintenance manuals and classified operating instructions i Priority 9 All remaining classified COMSEC material and unclassified key marked CRYPTO If time permits destroy superseded authenticators and unused two copy key 4 Destruction methods and materials a Shredders Any type shredder may be used when other methods of destruction are not available and the key is mixed with an equal amount of other simil
54. Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 3 15 September 1993 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Control Communication System AN FSC 160 V P O DSCS Operations Center 15 October 1993 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Communication System AN GSC 63 Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 15 September 1991 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Control Communication System AN FSC 115 Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 September 1991 Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Amplifier Radio Frequency AM 6701 TSC NSN 5895 01 042 3421 and Power Supply PP 7920 TSC 94A V 5895 01 164 0587 1 August 1990 Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Converters Frequency Electronic CV 3198B TSC and CV 3201B TSC 1 October 1990 Operator Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance for Smart Multi Circuit Terminal SMCT Il AN FGQ 13 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 May 1992 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminals AN TSC 85B V 1 and AN TSC 85B V 2 Operation and Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 September 1991 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminals AN TSC 85B V 1 and AN TSC 85B V 2 Reprinted w Basic Incl
55. SIGNALING M NA N BF17JUN988097 O NA Q A R NA S DF T NA 9 1 2 3 V NA W NA X NA Y D ZNA AA NA AB NA AC NA AD NA AE NA AF NA AG NA AH NA Al NA AJ NA AK NA AL NA AM NA AN NA AO NA AP NA AQ NA AR NA AS NA AT NA AU NA AV NA AW NA AX NA 19 May 2005 1 STP 11 25814 SM TG FACILITY AND EQUIPMENT INFORMATION SEMBACH GE4BCO BLDG DIRECTIONS ADDRESS 203 RM FL COMM CENTER CONTACT SUPERVISOR DSN 496 7176 CML 06302 47 7176 MAIL ADDRESS 886CS SCSD UNIT 10300 APO AE 09136 1 A MESSAGE DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL TERM 4AW CABLE CROSS CONNECT RED DC PATCH CONNECTOR KG 84A BLACK DC PATCH CONNECTOR G CABLE CROSS CONNECT H INTERFACE FREDRICKS 1280A MODEM FSK 44 CABLE 22 GA 200 FT 0 0 DB LOSS CABLE CROSS CONNECT 2 A 44 C NOSIG Z SEMBACH GE4TCF BLDG DIRECTIONS ADDRESS 114 RM FL 1 CONTACT SUPERVISOR DSN 496 6620 CML 0637 1 67 6620 MAIL ADDRESS 886CS SCST UNIT 10300 APO AE 09136 1 A CABLE CROSS CONNECT B MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME 44 CABLE 22 GA 30 FT 0 0 DB LOSS C TERM 4W D INTERFACE AN FCC 98 TDM MULTIPLEXER E CABLE CROSS CONNECT 2 A 44JND6 NO SIG 7 SEMBACH GE4DP1 BLDG DIRECTIONS ADDRESS 114 RM FL R 1 CONTACT SUPERVISOR COMM 06302 67 6816 DSN 496 6816 MAIL ADDRESS 886CS SCST UNIT 10300 APO AE 09136 1 TDM MULTIPLEX B DIGITAL T1 PATCH C DIGITAL PATCH
56. STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 2 Select the FLASH tab if it is not selected already The system will display the Flash tab group NOTES 1 The FIPR dialog box contains five tabs Each tab represents message precedence in their order of rank The number on each tab indicates the number of messages for that level of precedence Flash is the highest then Immediate Priority Routine and Warnings which contains Warnings Alerts Cautions and Danger Zones If no messages have been sent to the system a 0 will be displayed on the FIPR button 2 Each tab in the FIPR queue Flash Immediate Priority Routine has six message headers which include 1 Alert informs the user if the message is an Alert or not 2 Time informs the user of the time that the message was sent 3 Sec informs the user of the Security classification of the message 4 Msg Type informs the user of the Type of message 5 OR informs the user that an operator s response is required This column will display a Y when a response is required and 6 Source Originator informs the user who sent the message The last tab which is the Warnings tab contains information on Warnings Alerts Cautions and Danger Zones a Select the message from the list by left clicking it with the mouse pointer The message will highlight b Select the Display button The dialog box for the type of message that was selected will display NOTE If a LOG Report was s
57. TM 11 5895 1162 10 TM 11 5895 1162 24 1 TM 11 5895 1162 24 2 TM 11 5895 1179 13 TM 11 5895 1 188 12 TM 11 5895 1 188 34 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Organizational Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List Including Depot Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools for Digital Data Modem MD 945 TSC 15 June 1993 Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual Modem Digital Data MD 945 TSC 25 April 1979 C1 Operator s Manual for SINCGARS Ground Combat Net Radio ICOM Manpack Radio AN PRC 119A Short Range Vehicular Radio AN VRC 87A Short Range Multiplexer FHMUX Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0071 1 December 1998 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Digital Communications Subsystem DCSS S amp I PM SATCOMA Fort Monmouth NJ 1 April 1981 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Digital Communications Subsystem DCSS S amp I PM SATCOMA Fort Monmouth NJ 1 April 1981 Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual LNA Control Translator Dual LNA Control SM D 775327 and Single LNA Control SM D 777167 Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 3 1 August 1979 Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Control Antenna C 10273 TSC and C 10817 TSC 2 May 1983 Operator s Manual for Satellite Communications Terminals AN TSC 93B V 1 and AN TSC 93B V 2 Item also produced
58. The system will add a segment to the route Each time the user selects a spot on the map it will add a segment to the route NOTE If the user added a way point on the map by mistake just select the delete button and the system will delete the last segment added to the map and each time the delete button is selected it will delete a segment of the route Or select a way point on the route and move it to the desired location b Select the OK button The system will return to the Analyze Route dialog box c Select the Close button The system will display the Navigation dialog box 11 Select the Manage button The system will display the Edit Route dialog box NOTE The Manage button allows the user to edit rename copy or delete the route of march a Place the cursor in the Name text box and type a new name for the route using the keyboard and select the Rename button The system will display the new name in the Name text box or select the Virtual Keypad and enter the new name using the Mouse pointer and select the OK button The name will display in the Name text box 5 70 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps NOTE To copy the route and add a new name the user would type a new name in the Name text box and select the Copy button The system would save a copy of the route with the new name in the Navigation dialog box To delete a route the user would type the name of the route that needs to be deleted and select
59. The system will display Two additional tabs the Display Message and the Audio tabs a Select the Display Message Tab The system will display the Display Message tab group b Select the Chembio Auto Send radio button On Off NOTE This function will be grayed out if your vehicle is not equipped with the MICAD Multipurpose Integrated Chemical Agent Detector or the LRBSDS Long Range Biological Stand Off Detection System c Select the Reminder Dialog radio On button The On button will highlight NOTE The Reminder Dialog function toggles all Periodic Reminders and Voice on off d Select the Warning Time Interval pull down arrow Make a selection from the list between 3 seconds and 10 seconds NOTE This is the time that each Alert Warning message will be displayed in the Alert Warning Marquee on the Classification Status Bar e Select the Local Time Zone pull down arrow and scroll to your time zone f Select the Apply button to make the changes 6 Select the Audio tab The system will display the Audio tab group NOTE The Audio button allows the user to set Alerts Notices and Reminder s to Tone Voice or Off It also sets the voice volume and to mute alerts or preview a voice alert a Select the Tone Voice or Off radio button under Alerts depending on if you want to hear a tone voice or nothing on the speaker b Select the Tone or Off radio button under Notices if you want to hear Notices 19 May 2005 5 57 STP 1
60. VOL 2 DIMS MANUAL DISAC 270 A85 1 DISAC 310 70 1 DISA CIR 800 70 1 DISAC 800 E70 11 References 2 Preventive Maintenance Schedule and Record 1 December 1953 Staff Organization and Operations Item also produced in electronic media 31 May 1997 Signal Support in the AirLand Battle 15 October 1990 Communications Electronics Operations Orders Records and Reports 7 April 1978 Physical Security Formerly FM 19 30 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0205 8 January 2001 Tank and Mechanized Infantry Company Team formerly FM 71 1 9 December 2002 Training the Force Item also produced in electronic media 22 October 2002 USA AMC Catalog Data Activity CDA Army Master Data File AMDF Code Reference Guides CDA pamphlets Telecommunications Service Order Army Space Command GMFSC Volume Management and Operational Procedures Version 2 0 20 September 2000 Computer Program Development Specification for Terminal Control Processing Software CPCI 2 User s Manual Volume 1 Computer Program Development Specification for Terminal Control Processing Software CPCI 2 User s Manual Volume 2 DIMS V 3 0 Users Manual Satellite Communications SATCOM Equipment Station Reporting System 1 August 1985 METHODS AND PROCEDURES DII Technical Control 25 June 1998 METHODS AND PROCEDURES Operation and Control of the Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS 15 April 1998 S
61. Verify the plan 11 Perform FMOW operations a Load the FMOW using the GNCC 1 Validate the plan 2 Save the plan 3 Configure the FMOW modem 4 Verify the FMOW load b Load the FMOW using the UTE 1 Open the UTE application 2 Decide on the link identification ID to be used 3 Enter the FMOW link data 4 Activate entered links 4 16 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 5 Verify entries 6 Close the UTE program c Communicate using the FMOW 1 Determine terminal ID 2 Select terminal ID 3 Initiate CT ring 4 Communicate with the terminal operator 5 Terminate the OW call d Perform power balancing on the FMOW 1 Display the GMFSC carrier on the DASA 2 Transmit OW spike to satellite 3 Annotate attenuation adjustments 4 Enter new attenuation values in the GNCC 5 Download new configuration data to the FMOW 6 Verify the new OW spike power level 12 Perform ITOS operations a Operate the ITOS non secure text OW 1 Send a text OW message 2 Receive text messages 3 Review archived text OW messages b Place a secure call using the ITOS 1 Initiate a secure voice call 2 Receive a secure voice request c Remove an NT from the ITOS network 1 Perform a requested NT logout 2 Perform a forced NT logout d Correct receive OW jamming 1 Identify that receive OW jamming is occurring 2 Suspend the network 3 Change the receive OW frequ
62. and adhered to 2 Determine antenna siting points for correct azimuth a First siting point b Second siting point 3 Position generator set a Place generators in proper location b Ground generators c Position and ground transfer box CAUTION One soldier must hold frame members 4b to maintain structure stability until remaining frame members are installed DO NOT over tighten frame members or they might freeze in place Face all handles down and to the rear of antenna DO NOT force the quick release pins into structure or damage and personal injury will occur 4 Assemble antenna a Position antenna ground pad b Connect front and rear leg assemblies c Connect Center Base Frame Member d Check azimuth on antenna and move structure to correct azimuth alignment e Connect right and left Front Base Frame Members f Connect right and left Base Frame Members damage will occur if stood on g Connect right and left side leg assemblies h Check and level antenna WARNING The antenna center section is heavy and fragile Special attention must be made to ensure that all portions of the antenna are properly installed secured and mounted on the frame assembly Ensure that proper lifting techniques are used for equipment especially the center reflector of the antenna by use of the hoist assembly CAUTION DO NOT step on antenna center section or equipment will be damaged i Place center section on antenna support structu
63. and increasing the level of realism At the run stage the level of difficulty for the training event intensifies Run stage training requires optimum resources and ideally approaches the level of realism expected in combat Progression from the walk to the run stage for a particular task may occur during a one day training exercise or may require a succession of training periods over time Achievement of the Army standard determines progression between stages 1 crawl walk run training the tasks and the standards remain the same however the conditions under which they are trained change Commanders may change the conditions for example by increasing the difficulty of the conditions under which the task is being performed increasing the tempo of the task training increasing the number of tasks being trained or by increasing the number of personnel involved in the training Whichever approach is used it is important that all leaders and soldiers involved understand in which stage they are currently training and understand the Army standard 2 An AAR is immediately conducted and may result in the need for additional training Any task that was not conducted to standard should be retrained Retraining should be conducted at the earliest opportunity Commanders should program time and other resources for retraining as an integral part of their training plan Training is incomplete until the task is trained to standard Soldiers will remember t
64. and single channel ground air radio system SINCGARS with Internet controller INC Standards As a minimum you must Employ screen operations functions to manage and exchange information to include Determine if a component is degraded determine the status of the network Situational awareness data the count of Observed and Friendly icons and the status of the Hard drive Performance Steps 1 Select the Status button from the Function Bar or the F5 button on the Keyboard The system will display the Status tab group NOTE The Status function provides a means for the user to observe the operational status of the Platform s communications systems the Tactical internet and the general disk employment The Status tool should also be used as a quick reference and troubleshooting tool when it is noticed that the system is not operating at its optimal level The Status Dialog box contains three Sub tabs the Systems SA and General tab The Status button contains read only information 2 Select the Systems tab The systems tab displays two columns of information Systems Name and Status NOTE System Name has small file folders that represent the user platform s Global Positioning System GPS Local Communications LOCAL COMM and other associated systems connected to the platform to include the Laser Range Finder if applicable The second tab is the Status tab which displays the diagnostic details for the associated component
65. are destroyed by first peeling off the metal backing plate and then cutting the CRIB into pieces using heavy scissors or tin snips Use an acetylene torch if available to completely destroy the circuitry on the remaining pieces 6 Emergency task cards are used for carrying out emergency plans They identify each specific task that will be done Record each task and the approximate completion time on a separate 5 X 8 card Ensure the task cards are in the priority order in paragraph 3 In an emergency personnel will report to a predesignated location A COMSEC officer or other designated individual issues the task cards one at a time to individuals Each individual will carry out the designated task as written on the card and return to the person in charge to report the task is completed The individual is then given the next task This continues until all tasks are completed b Under this system many tasks are completed at the same time maximum personnel are employed and the emergency action progress is known at all times 7 Reporting measures a Whenever emergency plans are executed message reports are sent to CDR USACSLA FT HUACHUCA AZ SELCL PP and CDR INSCOM AHS VA IAOPS CI P In addition an information copy is sent to the activity providing COMSEC support and to the unit s next higher headquarters b A report of an emergency incident which did not result in insecurity will include as a minimum a list of the mat
66. between 1 4X to 8X n Select the 2X and select the apply button The system will display the map in 2X magnification Select the Brightness slide bar and drag it left or right to adjust the brightness of the map display p Select the Contrast slide bar and drag it left or right to adjust the Contrast q Select the Zoom pull down menu and select 50K and select apply r Select the Zoom pull down button and select 1X and select apply The system will display the standard map 3 Select the Grid tab The system will display the Grid tab group NOTE The Grid tab allows the user to customize the map display grid lines The Grid tab contains two areas Grid type and Grid Lines The Grid Type area includes two combo boxes Coordinate Type and MGRS Accuracy a Select the Coordinate pull down arrow The system will display the coordinate types NOTE The four Coordinate types are Military Grid Reference System MGRS Longitude and Latitude LAT LON Degrees Minutes Seconds DMS Universal Traverse Mercator UTM b Select the MGRS if it is not already set to that type which is the standard coordinate type for the military The system will display the MGRS in the Coordinate type text box c Select MGRS Accuracy pull down arrow The system will display 1 10 and 100 meters d Select 1m The system will display 1m in the MGRS Accuracy text box e Select the box to the left of Show Grid to check the box The system will show a c
67. box by selecting it with the mouse pointer c Select the OK button The system will return to the Overlay Edit dialog box d Select the or key to increase or decrease the year or select the NOW button NOTE Do the same for the Month Day Hour and Minute for each object that is entered on the overlay e Select the Additional Information text box and type the information or select the virtual keyboard by entering the information with the mouse pointer NOTE The Additional Information function allows the user to enter supplementary facts about the object f Select the Unique Designation text box and type the specification or select the virtual keyboard and enter the specification with the mouse pointer and select OK g Select the Apply button The system will apply the entries and keep the Overlay Edit dialog box open 5 18 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 7 Select the Location tab The system will display the Location Tab group NOTE The Location Tab displays the Current Grid Points of a selected object whether it is a single point object or a multi point object The Location tab facilitates moving single point objects such as a unit and modifying the points of multi point objects such as routes The user can move an object to another location on the map by using the Fill Location button and modify the dimensions of a multi point object a Select the right arrow at the bottom left of the Overlay
68. build and send a message within 10 seconds The Combat Msgs Function has six tabs which include SALT Size Activity Location and Time MEDEVAC Medical Evacuation NBC1 Nuclear Biological Chemical Fire Mission Check Fire All SITREP Situations Report The system defaults to the SALT tab or the last tab selected when using Combat Messages 2 Prepare and send a SALT message NOTE Subordinate units use the SALT message to provide combat intelligence information on enemy units to higher echelons The user can initiate a call for fire message from within this template The SALT message automatically generates and broadcasts enemy georeference icons to friendly platforms throughout the Brigade The user can submit an abbreviated Call for Fire Message using the information entered in the SALT Message The dual message capability saves the user time and eliminates repetitive data input a Select the SALT tab The system displays the combat messages SALT template b Select the equipment pull down arrow The system will display the equipment options list NOTE If there is more than one different type of equipment put the most dangerous target in the first equipment text box c Select an option from the list The system displays the selection in the equipment combo box d Select the or button to the right of the Equipment pull down arrow Select the button to increase the number or the button to decrease the number NOTE The
69. button will become active NOTE If the Add Addresses button does become active click on another name then back the correct name in the left window and the button should become active 19 May 2005 5 11 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps g Select the Add Address button The address will be added to the Folder on the right side window NOTE Continue these same steps until all of the addresses are added h Select the Folder that was created with all the addresses in it NOTE If there is a plus sign next to the folder click on it to open the folder to view all of the addresses within the folder i Select a name that is in the folder by highlighting it The Delete Address button becomes active j Select the Delete Address button The address is deleted from the window on the right NOTE Continue this until all the addresses that the user wants to delete are deleted If the user wants to delete a whole group it is done the same way Highlight the folder name and the Delete Group button becomes active The user just selects the Delete Group button to delete the whole group k Select the OK button The system will save and exit the Edit Address Groups dialog box and return to the Messages dialog box Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Set the Default Message Addressing settings 2 Create Address Groups Eval
70. common push buttons at the bottom of the Tab which consists of Execute which activates the selection Close which closes the dialog box and Help which gives help on that tab c Select the Orders Requests radio button from the Msg Type Field The radio button will highlight d Select the Fragmentary Order from the Message windowpane The Fragmentary Order will be highlighted NOTE The Default Transmission Settings should be completed prior to the PCC PCIs You cannot send or save a message until you have set the Default Transmission Settings for each type of message or the Transmission Settings from within the Message e Select the Execute button The system will display the Create FRAGO Template f Select the Outline tab The system will display the M Mandatory O Optional OG Optional Groups fields NOTE All the Fields with the M in front of them and are red in color must be completed in order for the message to be sent or saved If you try to send or save the file without entering data into the mandatory fields an error message saying The Mandatory field Scan URN is not complete with an OK button If this happens select the OK button and go back and enter the Mandatory fields that were missed g Select the mandatory field OPORD Name from the Outline windowpane The option will be highlighted h Select the OPORD Name text box from the window on the right of the Create FRAGO Template The OPORD Name text box will acti
71. displayed in the text box q Select the OK button The Save As Confirmation dialog box will be displayed saying Message was saved r Select the OK button The system will return to the Create Airborne Fire Mission Template s Select the Send button The system will display the Message Sent dialog box saying The message was sent t Select the OK button The system will return to the Airborne Fire Mission Template u Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops MAP screen NOTE You must select the Messages button on the Function Bar or the F4 button on the keyboard and the Fires Alerts radio button each time to get to the next Fires and alerts message 2 Perform a Subsequent Adjust NOTE Subsequent Adjust Fire message is used to adjust fall of shot against an area target or for a registration fire mission A Message to Observer MTO must be received by the users system from Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System AFATDS before the user can access the Subsequent Adjust Check Fire On Call Fire Cmd and EOM tabs a Select the FIPR button The FIPR dialog box will be displayed b Select the tab that has the MTO message c Highlight the MTO Message by selecting it from the list d Select the Display button at the bottom of the FIPR dialog box The system will display the Combat Messages dialog box with Fire Mission Tab and Summary Sub Tab selected NOTE The Subsequent Adjust Check Fire On Cal
72. done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related TM 11 5895 846 14 19 May 2005 3 35 STP 11 25814 SM TG Maintain SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 86A 113 590 3173 Conditions Given a defective AN TSC 86 V DA PAM 738 750 TM 11 5895 846 14 and DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407 Standards The equipment was operational Performance Steps 1 Isolate the AN TSC 86 V system failure to a faulty unit 2 Restore communications by performing the following in sequence a If failed equipment has redundancy transfer to standby equipment b If equipment is not totally redundant the highest priority circuits receive precedence for restored service 3 Coordinate with the satellite controller if any changes in transmit power are required 4 Test and verify that communications or other site requirements are restored and fully operational 5 Complete DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407 Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Isolated the AN TSC 86 V system failure to a faulty unit 2 Restored communications by performing the following in sequence a If failed equipment had redundancy transferred to standby equipment b If equipment was not totally redundant the highest priority circuits received precedence for restored service 3 Coordinated with the satellite controller if any changes in transmit power were required
73. entered text Keypad Access a victual keyboard OK Accepts changes and closes the dialog box Apply Applies changes and keeps the dialog box open Restore Defaults Restores message addressing settings back to original defaults Close Closes the dialog box without saving changes Help Accesses context sensitive Help k Select the Select From pull down arrow The system will display the Select From menu NOTE This menu contains three options 1 Master Address Book contains the addresses of all units in the current UTO the user cannot add or delete addresses from the Master address Book 2 User Address Groups Groups created by the user Battalion Address Book Contains the addresses within the units platform Select the Master Address Book The Master Address Book will Highlight and display the Select From text box and all the addresses in the current UTO will appear in the pane below 5 10 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps NOTE The user can select an address by selecting it from the list or by typing the name in the search text box m Select a unit from the pane by left clicking on the sign to expand the major unit and left clicking on the unit or type the name in the Search text box and select the Search button The name will highlight in the Select From pane n Select the Add button The name will appear in the Address pane on the right NOTE Do the same for each ad
74. exit points and lanes for traffic flow within the site NOTE Protective physical barriers must be established to provide security for the security zone a Determined the size of the area by the complexity of the site and the degree of compartmentalization required b Established positive barriers to 1 Controlled vehicular and pedestrian traffic flow 2 Checked identification of personnel entering or departing 3 Defined a buffer zone for more highly classified areas 4 Coordinated with engineer elements for assistance in establishing field fortifications for communication assemblages as required 5 Directed the location and construction of individual and crew served fighting positions a Located these positions to take maximum advantage of natural cover and concealment b Located these positions to provide good clear fields of fire so a credible defense of the site is accomplished c Constructed individual fighting positions as small as possible but large enough for individual soldiers in full combat gear d Constructed overhead protection if time and the tactical situation permit 19 May 2005 3 103 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO e Constructed crew served weapons fighting positions larger than individual fighting positions due to the requirements for two or more soldiers to man the weapons f Constructed crew served weapons fighting positions to provide f
75. for accuracy and forward the paperwork and defective equipment to the appropriate maintenance level Performance Measures G NO GO NOTE The following performance steps are for the initial assessment of a failure in the SATCOM strategic terminals AN FSC 78 AN GSC 39 AN GSC 52 The supervisor will ensure that the operators take appropriate actions as directed in the operator level critical tasks that cover the specific piece of equipment and IAW governing regulations TMs SOPs When the functional group in which the fault is located has been determined find the appropriate section of this task for further steps in restoral of faulted equipment For maintaining the AN TSC 86 see performance steps 30 through 34 1 Soldier ensured that the supervisor verified the alarm monitoring subsystem for visual audible alarm situations 2 Soldier ensured that the supervisor verified localized fault to a functional uplink downlink or tracking failure 3 Soldier ensured that the supervisor verified what the correct functional group was a AMG CMA subsystem See performance measures 5 through 9 b SGG See performance measures 10 through 14 c FCG See performance measures 15 through 19 d Transmitter Group See performance measures 20 through 24 e Antenna Group See performance measures 25 through 29 4 Soldier ensured that the supervisor verified that using spare equipment before begi
76. for the CCC TCC unit for operation 6 Configure the TSEC KG 84 CCC TCC 7 Load the TSEC KG 84 CCC TCC for network operations 8 Enter the ECCM network in time date initialization TDI or TIME APPROX a Perform time entries b Perform CSU schedules c Load the range data and COD d Load and initialize the KGV 9 e Adjust for time offset as required f Send initial status report to the NCT 9 Exit from the ECCM network 10 Enter the ECCM in standard time a Send full status report as required by DISA circulars to the NCT upon re entry into the ECCM network Perform time entries as required Load range data and COD entries as required Load and initialize the KGV 9s as required e Adjust for time offset as required NOTE Performance step 11 is an NCT and ALTNCT function only 11 Perform a coordinated ECCM network control transfer IAW SOP appropriate as required a Poll terminals for status as required b Monitor probes and control the network as required 19 May 2005 4 33 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps NOTE Performance steps 10 through 14 pertain to configuration and operation of the COMM RT 12 Perform necessary patching of the equipment a Perform IF RF patching b Perform KY 883 configuration 13 Configure the COMM RT IAW applicable TM and NCB and schedule the COMM RT 14 Configure the UTE 15 Place the UTE in LOW mode 16 Configure the KG 84 and load for LOW ne
77. frame members d Check side leg assemblies e Check antenna level WARNING The antenna center section is heavy and fragile Special attention must be made to ensure that all portions of the antenna are properly installed secured and mounted on the frame assembly Check the actuators and the protective boots to see if damage occurred during installation 5 Verify siting points a Ensure the antenna is on the correct azimuth as shown in the SAA b Ensure the antenna is on the correct elevation as shown in the SAA 19 May 2005 3 43 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 6 Ensure proper antenna cable installation a Verify that all cables are correctly installed and attached to antenna and shelter b Verify that the cable messenger strap is installed and supports the weight of cables from shelter to antenna c Verify that the antenna is properly grounded WARNING Care must be taken when checking the waveguide installation Verify that the O ring is present and that the waveguide is properly seated against the interlock sensor Check for cracks and dents in waveguide Improper installation may inhibit communications cause serious damage to equipment or result in injury to personnel 7 Verify antenna anchor a Verify that antenna anchors are properly placed b Verify that antenna anchors are properly secured to the antenna 8 Ensure proper Radiation Hazard fence placement a Verify that the hazard fence is properly secu
78. higher headquarters publications indexes Prepare the required transmittal form 7 Prepare DA Form 17 and DA Form 17 1 to request local and higher headquarters publications Refer to DA PAM 25 33 and local higher headquarters publications requisitioning procedures 8 Ensure published changes are posted to appropriate publications Refer to DA PAM 25 40 and publication change instructions 9 Remove obsolete rescinded superseded publications from the library Refer to DA PAM 25 40 and publication change instructions 10 Arrange publications in proper order and in a suitable location 11 Label binders used for storing library publications Refer to AR 25 400 2 and DA PAM 25 40 12 Notify personnel to return loaned publications to the library in a timely manner 13 Update the United States Army Printing Agency USAPA local and higher headquarters publications accounts as required Refer to DA PAM 25 33 and local higher headquarters publications account instructions Evaluation Preparation Setup A supervisor in a support maintenance unit or activity is required to establish a publications library to support the maintenance activity If equipment listings of the unit and supported units are not available the applicable table of organization and equipment modified table of organization and equipment TOE MTOE should be used Have unit equipment listing and supported units equipment listings available Have ava
79. is fitted with EPLRS the Net Control Station reports the EPLRS location and compares the quality of SA on the Tactical Internet 3 Select the Location tab The system will display the Location tab group a Select the Location text box and type in the grid where you want your platform to be or select the Fill Loc Button and select a position on the Map The system will display your icon on the map NOTE If the Admin dialog box is in the way of your icon left click the dark gray area at the top of the Admin dialog box and drag it to the side b Select the Quality Down arrow and make a selection from the list NOTE If a PLGR was connected to the FBCB2 and functioning correctly this information would be entered automatically The Quality is the degree of accuracy which is the Figure of Merit on the PLGR c Select the Course text box and type in a direction in degrees or select the virtual keypad and type the degrees in using the mouse pointer select any degree between 0 and 359 and select OK The system will return to the Admin dialog box d Select the Speed text box and type in the speed in Kph between 0 and 2047 or use the virtual keypad as before 5 56 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps e Select the Elevation text box and type in the elevation in feet between 1 and 65536 or use the virtual keypad f Select the Apply button The system will apply the entries NOTE Notice how your Platform icon is displ
80. is properly secured b Verify that the hazard fence signs are properly spaced and visible 9 Verify site power a Verify that power cables are connected to the transfer box b Verify that the shelter power cable is properly installed from the transfer box to the shelter 10 Verify fire point a Verify that the fire point is placed at midpoint between the generator set and the shelter b Verify that the fire point has all necessary items as per SOP Evaluation Preparation Setup Have a copy of the performance steps appropriate TMs and local Unit SOP available Brief soldier Not applicable Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Verified site selection Verified generator positioning Verified shelter installation Verified proper antenna support structure assembly Verified siting points Ensured proper antenna cable installation Verified antenna anchors Verified proper radiation hazard fence placement Verified site power El o N O A O N _ Verified fire point ear Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task 19 May 2005 3 63 STP 11 25814 SM TG Refere
81. list The selection will appear in the Status text box c Select the color pull down arrow The system will display the colors that can be selected d Select the Affiliation pull down arrow The system will display the Affiliation menu NOTE The Affiliation field allows the user to set the affiliation that is associated with the selected object e Select an affiliation from the menu The affiliation will display in the Affiliation text box f Select the Mobility pull down arrow The system will display the Mobility menu NOTE The Mobility field allows the user to set what type of mobility if any the object is g Select the Size pull down arrow The system will display the Size menu NOTE The Size field allows the user to set the size of the object h Select a size from the menu The Size will display in the Size text box i Place a Checkmark in the Check box next to either HQ Task Force Feint or Installation depending on what the Icon represents The user can place checkmarks in more than one check box j Select the Apply button The changes will apply and return to the Overlay Edit dialog box 6 Select the Labels tab The system will display the Labels tab group NOTE The Labels function allows the user to modify an objects icon labels a Select the First DTG button The system will display the DTG keypad NOTE The DTG button allows the user to enter the Date Time group associated with the object b Select the Year text
82. local frequency manager to obtain frequency clearance for each GMF terminal location 9 Prepared and issued to each GMF terminal and DSCS gateway if applicable terminal deployment orders consistent with the SAA and the circuit level communications requirements 10 Assisted in contingency planning exercises as necessary 11 Provided the RSSC after action reports for each mission Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related ASC 1 DISA CIR 800 70 1 TM 11 5895 1448 10 19 May 2005 3 83 STP 11 25814 SM TG Direct the Maintenance of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 or AN TSC 93 V 113 589 7124 Conditions Given a tactical SATCOM terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V lint free cloth or brush cleaning compound DA PAM 738 750 TM 9 6115 464 12 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 11 5895 1433 12 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1433 34 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 TM 11 5895 1434 34 and TM 11 5895 1127 20 L3 Communications Manuals PX19671 Rev A PX19672 Rev A and PX19674 Rev B and DA Form 2404 Standards Directed the restoral of SATCOM terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V Performance Steps 1 Direct personnel that P
83. name will be highlighted Select the Unload Selected button The system will display the Unload Selected Overlay dialog box stating You are about to unload overlay with the name Continue with this action with an OK button Select the OK button The system will unload the overlay and return to the Overlays tab 5 Select the Obstacle Overlays tab The system will display the Obstacle Overlays tab group with a All and None radio button and the names of the Originators and DTG of all the Obstacle Overlays that have been created received and saved on the system NOTE An Obstacle overlay must be loaded in order to view this function a Select the None button All the Obstacle Overlays that are displayed on the map will disappear b Select the All radio button The Obstacle overlays will reappear on the map c Select an Obstacle Overlay by highlighting the Originator The name of the Originator will highlight d Select the Delete Selected button The system will remove the Obstacle Overlay from the Obstacle Overlays tab group but not from the system e Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Select the Filters button on the Function bar or the F2 button on the keyboard Select the SA tab if it is not already selected Select the Collapse Expand tab 2 3 4 Select the Overlays tab 5 Select the Obstacle Over
84. on roadside equipment listed in performance step 2 IAW applicable TMs for equipment being inspected 19 May 2005 3 29 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 5 Restored equipment after communications failure a Verified alarm at the FAMU 1 Reset minor alarms glitches and hits in the network 2 Isolated major alarms loss of lock equipment failure b Notified the SNC GNC of equipment failure c Isolated localized fault to the LRU d Restored communications with redundant equipment 1 Prepared spare equipment for operation IAW unit mission and TSO 2 Made patch connection at IF and or data patch panels e Verified that communications were restored and all alarm conditions were corrected 6 Performed maintenance to correct deficiencies a Performed operator level troubleshooting procedures IAW appropriate TM b Isolated localized fault to the LRU c Repaired replaced fault LRU above operator crew level 7 Completed DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407 IAW DA PAM 738 750 Recorded all deficiencies that could not be immediately corrected 8 Scheduled next PMCS Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Require
85. or oriented in The system will display the selection in the Course text box n Select the CFF Msgs Check box The system will display a check mark in the box which will give access to the Method Of Engagement window NOTE This function enables a request for fire support when sending a SALT message Select the Method of Engagement combo box down arrow button The system will display the Fire Request Type options list p Select an option from the list The system displays the selection in the Method Of Engagement text box q Select the Save button to save the message The system will save the message and display Message saved to file Spot with the DTG after it r Select the Send button to send the message The system will transmit the message and display Last SALT message sent at DTG s Select the Close button to close the Combat Messages dialog box The system will close the combat messages dialog box 3 Prepare and send a fire mission message a Select the Combat Msgs button on the Function Bar or the F3 button on the keyboard b Select the Fire Mission tab The system displays the Fire Mission tab group NOTE The Fire Mission template is used to request indirect fire support from supporting fire support units The Fire Mission Tab group consists of Summary CFF Subsequent Adjust Check Fire On Call Fire Cmd and EOM tabs The Summary and CFF tabs are enabled at all times The Subsequent Adjust Check Fire On Call Fir
86. parameters outlined in the TSO and using Appendix G in the OSP 1310 Software Operator User s Guide paragraph 3 6 8 Verify the I O card by clicking on the Verify button on the I O card configuration window 9 Correct any errors or discrepancies identified NOTE Card placement in the chassis is limited by software and hardware limitations The software on the OIU will only allow card placement in areas designated for the chosen card type 10 Using the TSO determine the type of DMD card needed to support specified user data multiplexing requirements 11 Select DMD from the Card Pallet and place in specified location on the desired chassis card complement window 12 Double click on the DMD card and configure the card according to the parameters outlined in the TSO and using Appendix G in the OSP 1310 Software Operator User s Guide paragraph 3 6 13 Verify the DMD card by clicking on the Verify button on the DMD card configuration window 14 Correct any errors or discrepancies identified 15 Once verify is completed on each individual I O and DMD card perform a complete configuration verify by clicking on Tools on the Menu tool bar and choosing Verify All 16 Correct any warnings and errors in the configuration repeating step 15 above until no errors or warnings remain 17 When all errors and warnings are rectified select File Save As from the Menu tool bar and save the new configuration parameters acco
87. prepared and submitted appropriate maintenance forms for replacement parts or to request a higher maintenance level Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related DA FORM 2404 TM 11 5895 808 13 2 DA FORM 2407 DA PAM 738 750 DISA CIR 800 E70 11 DISA CIR 800 E70 7 DISA CIR 800 E70 8 DISA CIR 800 E70 9 NCB TM 11 5895 1179 13 TM 11 5895 808 13 1 TM 11 5895 808 13 10 19 May 2005 3 69 STP 11 25814 SM TG Manage a Maintenance Program 113 623 6014 Conditions Given communications systems TMs listed in DA PAM 25 30 TMDE listed in appropriate TMs DA PAM 710 2 1 DA PAM 738 750 and DD Form 314 Preventive Maintenance Schedule and Record Standards Scheduled and performed PMCS properly completed all maintenance forms and initiated all required corrective actions or reports Performance Steps 1 7 Determine maintenance requirements a Determine equipment requiring preventive maintenance PM b Determine frequency of required PM c Determine tools TMDE and materials necessary to perform PM d Determine level of PM to perform e Determine personnel available to perform PM Schedule PM a Coordinate with training officer NCO b Coordinate with high
88. soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG References Required Related DISA CIR 800 70 1 GSD TR 5644 GSD TR 5645 STANFORD TELECOM 1 STANFORD TELECOM 2 STI UM 45005 STI UM 65026 TM 11 5895 1410 13 4 14 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Conduct Ground Mobile Forces Satellite Communications GMFSC Network Controller GNC Operations within the Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS 113 616 2029 Conditions Given the TCCC DOSS DASA frequency modulation orderwire FMOW and interim tactical orderwire subsystem ITOS while working as the GNC in a DSCSOC ASC 1 DISAC 800 70 1 GNCC Users Manual 5 O amp M Manual and TM 11 5895 1188 12 Standards The GNC demonstrated how to monitor and establish networks performed network analysis and conducted transfer control operations utilizing the TCCC DOSS DASA FMOW and ITOS IAW published procedures Performance Steps 1 Prepare operational logs 2 Establish GMFSC networks a Administer a satellite access via the FMOW 1 Retrieve required reports from the DOSS 2 Enter configuration data into the GMF Network Control Center Download the FMOW Analyze the OW carrier Receive initial terminal operating parameters Direct terminal to data mode Analyze the transmit carrier Perform power adjustments Perform IF attenuation adjustments 10 Verify terminal is operating according to the SAA
89. terminal and completed and forwarded the correct maintenance documentation Performance Steps NOTE The following performance steps are for the initial assessment of a failure in the SATCOM strategic terminals AN FSC 78 AN GSC 39 AN GSC 52 The supervisor will ensure that the operators take appropriate actions as directed in the operator level critical tasks that cover the specific piece of equipment and IAW governing regulations TMs SOPs When the functional group in which the fault is located has been determined find the appropriate section of this task for further steps in restoral of faulted equipment For maintaining the AN TSC 86 see performance steps 30 through 34 1 Ensure the supervisor verifies the alarm monitoring subsystem for visual audible alarm situations 2 Ensure the supervisor verifies localized fault to a functional uplink downlink or tracking failure 3 Ensure the supervisor verifies what the correct functional group is AMG CMA subsystem See performance steps 5 through 9 b SGG See performance steps 10 through 14 c FCG See performance steps 15 through 19 d Transmitter Group See performance steps 20 through 24 e Antenna Group See performance steps 25 through 29 4 Ensure the supervisor verifies that using spare equipment before beginning the repair and replacement procedures on defective equipment restores communications NOTE The following performance steps are performed for repair a
90. that is under the heading Self The system will display the Situation Report Details dialog box NOTE The Unit Role is a dual purpose button that identifies the Unit Role associated with the report and displays the Situation Report details There are three push buttons in this dialog box which are Edit which displays the SITREP long form message template the Close button which closes the dialog box and the Help button which gives help on the Situation Report Details dialog box e Select Close The system will close the dialog box and display the Ops Map Screen f Select the Combat Msgs button on the Function Bar or the F3 button on the keyboard The system will display the Combat Messages dialog box g Select the SITREP Tab The system will display the SITREP tab group h Select the White box with a W in it under the heading Fuel The box will turn Black with a B in it NOTE Each time you click on that box it will change color Select the color to indicate what the status is for that category Each Category is done the same way i Select the Unit Tab The system will display the Unit Situation NOTE If you are the Platoon Sergeant or Platoon Leader you will have your subordinate platform s status under your own j Select the Save button The system will display Sit Rep saved at and the DTG k Select the Send button if you desire to send the message The system will transmit the message Select the Close button The system
91. that the operator correctly repaired the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM 14 Ensured the operator verified the successful repair of the SGG by testing operating NOTE The following performance measures are performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the FCG 15 Verified that the operator determined the faulted portion of the FCG 16 Ensured the operator inspected all components and cables for defects and proper connections 17 Verified that the operator isolated fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 18 Verified that the operator correctly repaired the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM 19 Ensured the operator verified the successful repair of the FCG by testing operating NOTE The following performance measures are performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the Transmitter Group 20 Verified that the operator determined the faulted portion of the Transmitter Group 21 Ensured the operator inspected all components and cables for defects and proper connections 22 Verified that the operator isolated fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment 23 Verified that the operator correctly repa
92. the Delete button The system would delete the route b Select the Map button The system will display the Edit Route function bar with the route displayed on the map NOTE From here the user can add or delete segments of the route c Select the OK button The system will return to the Edit Route dialog box d Select the List button The system will display the Edit way points dialog box with all the grids to the waypoints in the route NOTE From here the user can add modify and delete waypoints and save the route e Scroll down and select the last way point in the list and then select the delete button The system will delete the last waypoint f Select the Save button The system will redisplay the route with the last way point deleted and return to the Edit Route dialog box g Select the Close button The system will return to the Navigation dialog box 12 Select the Center On button The system will center on the route a Select the Msg Addressing button The system will display the Message Addressing dialog box NOTE Refer to Task 171 147 0005 to address and send the route b Select the Close button on the Navigation dialog box The system will return to the Ops screen Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Select the NAV button Select the Route Tab if it is not already selected Select the Manage button Select the List button Select the Reverse button
93. the SA map on the selected ROM and transmit the Land Route Report The Roll over Mode option when used with the driver s display will display the bearing and distance to the next way point as each way point is passed 2 Select the Route Tab if it is not already selected The system will display the Route Tab group NOTE The Route ID function allows the user to select and display a route that has been previously created and saved by selecting the drop down arrow and highlighting the saved route Once a saved route is selected all of the other function buttons on the Route dialog box become active a Select the create button The system will display the Create New Route dialog box NOTE The Create New Route dialog box has three buttons Map List and Cancel The Map button allows the user to select locations on the map The list button displays the Create Waypoints dialog box and allows the user to enter waypoints by typing them in the Enter Way point combo box b Place the cursor in the Enter New Route Name text box and select the back space key to delete the name that appears then type the name that you want to call the route up to 9 characters NOTE You can also type the name by selecting the Virtual Keyboard and using the mouse to select the keys on the Virtual Keyboard or your fingers on the touch screen c Select the Map button The system will display the Map with the Create Route Function Bar to the right and the cursor be
94. the current overlay 1 Select the Messages button from the Function Bar or the F4 button on the keyboard The system will display the Message dialog box a Select the Create tab The system will display the Create Tab options b Select the Overlays radio button under the Msg Type field The Overlays radio button will highlight and show a list of available Overlay types NOTE If there is a scroll bar to the right of the list then there are more types of overlays to view c Select an Overlay type from the list by highlighting it NOTE If the user doesn t set the Default Message Addressing Settings at this time then the user can set them before the message is sent d Select the Execute button The system will display the Overlay Toolbox dialog box NOTE The system will display Three tabs the Overlay Object and Group Setup tab The Overlay tab is used to select the Overlay type save an overlay and reference specific information about the overlay The Object tab is used to add and edit symbology to the map SA area The Group Setup tab allows the operator to create a customized group of icons for specific missions e g Operations symbology or Fire Coordination symbology 19 May 2005 5 15 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 2 Select the Overlay tab if it is not already selected The system will display the Overlay tab fields NOTE The Overlay tab allows the user to set the basic information for the overlay This is where t
95. typing the name that you want to call it and selecting the New Folder button This will create a new folder in the Folders windowpane o Highlight the new folder in the Folders windowpane Select the File text box and type the name that you want to call the message Select the OK button The Save As dialog box will be displayed saying Message was saved with an OK button Select the OK button The system will return to the Create Free text dialog box with the new name at the top s Select the Send button The system will display the Message Sent dialog box Select the OK button The system will return to the Create Free Text dialog box u Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen naO 33L Ls a 19 May 2005 5 31 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 3 Prepare and send a MEDEVAC Request NOTES 1 Use the MEDEVAC request message to request ground or aircraft support to evacuate friendly and or enemy casualties The MEDAVAC tab group is accessed from Combat Msgs button on the Function Bar or the F3 button on the keyboard or from the Messages button under Orders Request 2 The MEDEVAC Request is also addressed as part of the task 171 146 0001 Prepare Send Combat Messages Using FBCB2 Version 3 3 a Select the Messages button on the Function Bar or the F4 button on the keyboard b Select the MEDAVAC Request The system will highlight the MEDAVAC Request c INSER
96. wants to delete a group highlight the Group name and select the Delete Group button d Select the Close button The system returns to the Ops screen 5 20 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Select the Messages button from the Function Bar or the F4 button on the keyboard Select the Overlay tab if it is not already selected Select the Object tab Select the Group Sub tab default Select the Attributes tab Select the Labels tab Select the Location tab Select the 2525B Select the UTO sub tab o o O A N _ Select the Overlay tab Select the Group Setup Tab N Select the Object tab then the Group sub tab 13 Select the Group Setup tab Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the Soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 19 May 2005 5 21 STP 11 25814 SM TG PREPARE SEND REPORTS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0008 Conditions Given an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system with software version 3 4 loaded You have received an operation order OPORD or fragmentary order FRAGO to conduct a tactical operation Default Messag
97. will close the Combat Messages dialog box and return to the Ops screen 19 May 2005 5 7 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Select the Combat Msgs button Prepare and send a SALT message Prepare and send a fire mission message Prepare and send a MEDEVAC message Prepare and send an NBC 1 message Prepare and send a Check Fire message Prepare and send a SITREP message Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG APPLY MESSAGE ADDRESSING FEATURES IN FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0005 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system with all of it s components with software version 3 4 loaded and a completed message Standards As a minimum You must apply the Message Addressing settings so that the message can be transmitted to other platforms Performance Steps NOTE Message Addressing allow the operator to set the default message options for each message subtype These default message options should be standardized and included in the unit s TACSOP This will help speed the message sending process If the settings and addresses for each message subtype are set ahead of time that is one less thing that the operator to do prior t
98. will display the Estimated times under the Route Data and Segment Data c Select the Minimize button The system will display the Minimize dialog box over the Analyze Route dialog box with the Travel Time dialog button with arrows facing left and right and two numbers with a between them The left number represents the waypoint that the data is displayed for and the number on the right represents the total number of waypoints d Select the Right arrow The number on the left of the should change to 2 and the number on the right should stay the same e Select the Travel Time Dialog button The system will display the Travel Time dialog box with the new Estimated times for the second segment NOTE The user will need to select Minimize each time that the user wants to move to the next way point then select the Travel Time dialog button to see the Estimated times f Select the Close button The system will return to the Analyze Route Dialog box 10 Select the Edit Route button The system will display the Map with the Edit Route Function bar on the right of the map and the route highlighted in blue with the last way point highlighted with a white circle NOTE The Edit Route Button allows the user to edit the route on the map graphically It also allows the user to grab zoom and view draw description delete and target a location route by name a Place the cursor at a spot on the map after the last way point and left click the mouse
99. 1 25814 SM TG Performance Steps c Select the Tone1 Tone2 or Off radio button under the Reminders NOTE There are two different tones that you can hear for Reminders d Select the Voice volume slider by left clicking and holding Move the slider right to increase and left to decrease the volume e Check the Mute all box if you don t want to hear anything NOTE Mute All is not recommended f Select the Preview Voice pull down arrow Make a selection from the list g Select the Play button and listen to the speaker NOTE If you want to hear a voice make sure that Alerts is set to voice h Select the Apply button to make the changes 7 Select the SA Settings Tab The system will display the SA Tab Group 8 Select the Own tab The System will display the Own Tab Group NOTE This feature allows the user to set their own Time and Motion filters and the reporting Mode settings a Select the Time Filter pull down arrow and make a selection from the list between 10 seconds and 60 minutes b Select the Motion Filter pull down arrow and make a selection from the list between 50 meters and 2500 meters c Select the Reporting Mode radio button Auto Manual or Off d Select the Apply button 9 Select the Friendly Tab The system will display the Friendly Tab Group a Select the Stale pull down arrow and make a selection from the list between 5 minutes and 2 hours The system will display the time in the Stale text box b
100. 100 is populated with the proper cards b Configure the FCC 100 V hardware according to the TSO Gateway Access Authorization GAA or cut sheets c Configure the FCC 100 V software with the TSO GAA or cut sheets d Place the FCC 100 off line Configuration on line e Employ FCC 100 loopbacks 1 Aggregate loopback 2 Port loopback f Monitor for alarms 3 Operate TD 1389 Low Rate Multiplexer LRM a Configure the TD 1389 off line memory according to the TSO or cut sheets b Place the TD 1389 off line memory on line c Perform a TD 1389 restart 1 Press RST key 2 Press STEP ADV key 3 Press LIST ADV key 4 Press STEP ADV key d Perform TD 1389 loopback 1 Perform composite loopback 2 Perform user card loopback e Monitor the TD 1389 for alarms 19 May 2005 3 1 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 4 Operate TD 1337 Tactical Satellite Signal Processor TSSP a Configure the TD 1337 according to the TSO GAA or cut sheets 1 Configure orderwire OW 2 Configure local multiplexer MUX 3 Configure remote MUX b Place the TD 1337 configured memory on line c Perform the TD 1337 loopback option d Monitor the TD 1337 for alarms 5 Operate AN USC 63 Multiplexer Integration and DCSS Automation System MIDAS a Configure the AN USC 63 MIDAS NOTE The steps below pertain to cards in slots 1 5 In the event this task is performed at a communications facility that is operation
101. 11 5895 1557 30 1 TM 11 5895 1558 13 TM 11 5895 1630 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1686 13 TM 11 5895 1687 13 TM 11 5895 797 14 TM 11 5895 808 1 3 1 TM 11 5895 808 13 10 TM 11 5895 808 13 1 1 TM 11 5895 808 1 3 2 TM 11 5895 808 13 3 TM 11 5895 808 1 3 4 TM 11 5895 808 13 5 TM 11 5895 808 13 6 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Alarm Monitor Group 23 November 1994 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Frequency Transmitter Group 23 November 1994 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Frequency Converter Group 23 November 1994 Operator s and Unit Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminal AN FSC 78B 23 November 1994 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual RF Amplifier 23 November 1994 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Up Down Converter 23 November 1994 Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminals AN FSC 78B V 1 V 2 V 3 V 4 V 5 AN FSC 1 2 and AN GSC 39B Ancillary Equipment Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Reference Signal Generator 23 November 1994 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Communication Subsystem AN USC 63 MIDAS 14 March 2002 Integrated Control Console Operators Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Operator s Organizational Direct Support and General Support Main
102. 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Operate SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V 113 589 2008 Conditions Given a SATCOM terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V installed antenna group AS 3036 TSC installed generator set PU 405A or PU 753 M predetermined site location azimuth and elevation TM 9 6115 464 12 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 11 5895 1433 12 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1433 34 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 and TM 11 5895 1434 34 L3 Communications Manuals PX19671 Rev A PX19672 Rev A and PX19674 Rev B and cut sheets Standards The AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V was fully operational and stopping procedures were completed within 1 hour and 30 minutes Performance Steps NOTE Perform one or all of the following loopback procedures equipment baseband translator system loop test not on satellite and satellite loop authorized satellite usage WARNING Ensure power and ground cables are properly connected and grounded before turning on equipment Open all air vents and turn on environmental control units ECUs to prevent overheating of equipment 1 Operate generator set a Set generator frequency and voltage b Apply power to the transfer box 2 Operate transfer box a Set generator on line switch to correct generator If it is necessary to swap generators follow procedures according to appropriate TM NOTE Located at the left pillow block of the antenna the antenna elevation safety swi
103. 1987 Organizational Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminals AN GSC 49 V 1 AN GSC 49 V 2 and AN GSC 49 V 3 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 1 September 1987 Organizational Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminals AN GSC 49 V 1 AN GSC 49 V 2 Volume 2 of 2 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 September 1987 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 52 V 1 Fixed Earth Terminal Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 3 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 March 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate DS Maintenance Manual for Medium SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 52 V 1 Fixed Earth Terminal Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 3 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 March 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate DS Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 1 Fixed Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 March 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 1 Fixed Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 March 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support M
104. 2 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1433 34 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 and TM 11 5895 1434 34 L3 Communications Manuals PX19671 Rev A PX19672 Rev A and PX 19674 Rev B Standards Directed the operation of SATCOM terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V Performance Steps 1 Ensure the terminals are assigned generators that supply the proper power requirements for operation Ensure the supervisors accounted for all assigned equipment and personnel Ensure the supervisors completed PMCS and safety checks of all assigned equipment Advise appropriate supervisors of equipment configurations a A N Direct the supervisors to keep you informed on system status until continuity is established with interfacing media 6 Direct the supervisors to keep you informed on any system failures or HAZCON that may affect the operation of the system on a case by case basis Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Ensured terminals were assigned generators that supplied the proper power requirements for operation 2 Ensured the supervisors accounted for all assigned equipment and personnel 3 Ensured the supervisors completed PMCS and safety checks of all assigned equipment 4 Advised appropriate supervisors of equipment configurations 5 Directed the supervisors to keep manager informed on system status until continuity was established with interfac
105. 3 113 589 3048 Conditions In an operational environment given SATCOM terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V TMDE and tools listed in TMs dry clean lint free cloth or brush cleaning compound DA PAM 738 750 TM 9 6115 464 12 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 11 5895 1433 12 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1433 34 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 TM 11 5895 1434 34 and TM 11 5895 1127 20 L3 Communications Manuals PX19671 Rev A PX19672 Rev A and PX19674 Rev B and DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407 Standards Completed all PMCS and identified the equipment as ready available or not ready available Performance Steps NOTE Perform during operations in one or all of the following loopback procedures equipment baseband translator system loop test not on satellite and satellite loop authorized satellite usage WARNING Ensure power and ground cables are properly connected and grounded before turning on equipment for the during portion of the PMCS 1 Perform before during and after PMCS procedures on the following curbside equipment IAW applicable TMs for equipment being inspected a Generators b User entry panels c Signal conditioning equipment d First level multiplexers e Second level multiplexers f Baseband patches and switches g User interface equipment 2 Perform before during and after PMCS procedures for the following roadside equipment IAW applicable TMs for equipment being inspected a
106. 3 7 TM 11 5895 1197 13 8 TM 11 5895 1197 13 9 TM 11 5895 1531 30 TM 11 5895 1532 30 TM 11 5895 1533 30 TM 11 5895 1534 30 TM 11 5895 1535 12 TM 11 5895 1536 13 TM 11 5895 846 14 19 May 2005 3 95 STP 11 25814 SM TG Direct the Operation of Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V 113 610 7003 Conditions Given an AN USC 28 V NCB SECRET keying materials SECRET KAO 184A TSEC KYK 13 KOI 18 fill cable DISAC 800 E70 7 for the NCT DISAC 800 E70 8 for the ALTNCT DISAC 800 E70 9 for the NT and DISAC 800 E70 11 for AN GSC 49 terminals TM 11 5895 808 13 1 TM 11 5895 808 13 10 and TM 11 5895 1179 13 KY 883 and site SOP Standards Correctly configured all equipment and equipment was operational Performance Steps 1 Ensure the AN USC 28 V is powered on IAW procedures outlined in the applicable TM Refer to Task Number 113 610 7001 Supervise the Operation of Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V for further breakdown of performance steps 2 Ensure correct COMSEC material is on hand for personnel to conduct operations 3 Ensure the CSU is configured and operating properly 4 Ensure coordinated ECCM is conducted IAW SOP and appropriate TM s 5 Ensure the COMM RT is configured and operating properly Performance Measures GO 1 Ensured the AN USC 28 V was powered on IAW procedures outlined in the applicable TM 2 Ensured correct COMSEC material was on hand for personnel to co
107. 35 Direct Satellite Network Control within the Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS Supervise the Maintenance of Control Equipment in a Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS Operations System DSCSOC Subject Area 9 MILSTAR 113 590 7006 113 590 7007 Supervise the Operation of MILSTAR Command Post BNCOC Terminal AN FRC 181 V or AN TRC 194 V Supervise the Maintenance of MILSTAR Command Post BNCOC Terminal AN FRC 181 V or AN TRC 194 V QT 3 4 QT 3 4 Skill Level 4 Subject Area 7 SATCOM Terminal Direction 113 573 0006 113 573 0013 113 573 2032 113 583 7097 113 583 7098 113 589 6001 113 589 7124 113 589 7125 113 590 7004 113 590 7005 113 610 7003 113 610 7004 113 611 1013 113 611 5012 113 611 5016 113 613 7198 Prepare Emergency Plan Manage a Facility Physical Security Program Evaluate Communications Security COMSEC for Insecurities Direct the Maintenance of Defense Communications Satellite Subsystem DCSS Direct the Operation of Defense Communications Satellite Subsystem DCSS Establish Network Plans for GMF Direct the Maintenance of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 or AN TSC 93 V Direct the Operation of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 or AN TSC 93 V Direct the Maintenance of SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 39 AN FSC 78 AN GSC 52 or AN TSC 86 Direct the Operation of SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 39 AN FSC 78 AN GSC 52 or AN TSC 86 Direct the Operat
108. 5 1433 12 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1433 34 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 TM 11 5895 1434 34 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 9 6115 464 12 UNIT SOP 19 May 2005 3 45 STP 11 25814 SM TG Supervise the Operation of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V 113 589 7123 Conditions Given a SATCOM terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V installed antenna group AS 3036 TSC installed generator set PU 405A or PU 753 M on a predetermined site and on correct azimuth and elevation TM 9 6115 464 12 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 11 5895 1433 12 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1433 34 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 and TM 11 5895 1434 34 L3 Communications Manuals PX19671 Rev A PX19672 Rev A and PX19674 Rev B and unit SOP Standards Powered up placed into a fully operational condition and powered down the AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V within a time limit of 1 hour and 30 minutes Performance Steps 1 Verify that generator is set for operation a Ensure generator is set at proper frequency and voltage b Ensure power is made available to the transfer box 2 Verify transfer box operation a Verify that the generator on line switch is set to correct generator b If it is necessary to swap generators ensure that procedures are followed according to appropriate TM 3 Verify that the antenna elevation safety switch is correctly set 4 Ensure the power up procedures for the shelter are followed according to appropri
109. 5 795 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1215 20 TM 11 5895 1346 13 TM 11 5895 1630 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1686 13 TM 11 7025 221 20 TM CQT 6400 IOM 02 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Subject Area 2 Strategic Satellite Terminal AN GSC 52 V AN GSC 39 V and AN FSC 78 V Operate SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 52 V 113 590 2135 Conditions Given a satellite communications SATCOM terminal AN GSC 52 V and TM 11 5895 1196 13 2 or TM 11 5895 1197 13 3 Standards The terminal was operational Performance Steps 1 Ensure alternating current AC power is applied to all equipment 2 Ensure all subsystem controllers are set in the REMOTE position Low noise amplifier LNA Transmit Frequency Control monitor and alarm CMA Antenna OE 371 Downconverter Upconverter Keyboard i Digital computer CP 1676 G 3 Ensure all local equipment set in the REMOTE position 4 Bring up earth terminal ET display and ensure all subsystems are operational 5 Bring up performance monitor display and verify all system parameters are within tolerance Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Ensured AC power was applied to all equipment 2 Ensured all subsystem controllers were set in the REMOTE position 3 Ensured all local equipment was set in the REMOTE position 4 Brought up earth terminal ET display and ensured all subsystems were operational
110. 7 113 583 7098 113 589 6001 113 589 7124 113 589 7125 113 590 7004 113 590 7005 113 610 7003 113 610 7004 Maintain SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 93 3 28 Subject Area 4 Strategic Satellite Terminal AN TSC 86A Install SATCOM Terminal 5 86 3 31 Operate SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 86A 3 34 Maintain SATCOM Terminal 86 3 36 Subject Area 5 Strategic Satellite Terminal AN TSC 49 V Operate SATCOM Terminal 49 3 37 Maintain SATCOM Terminal 65 40 emen 3 39 Skill Level 2 Subject Area 6 SATCOM Terminal Supervision Supervise the Maintenance of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 V or cots ides teet meet e meet der ifii fem est coe i eru oe matus 3 41 Supervise the Installation of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC OS M ee A Gee hic ess SO ie uin ion f fe snc t ea es 3 43 Supervise the Operation of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC teeta tin Mentre ere TON oa 3 46 Skill Level 3 Subject Area 6 SATCOM Terminal Supervision Supervise the Maintenance of the 55 3 49 Supervise the Operation of the 55 3 52 Supervise the Maintenance of SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 39 AN FSC 78 AN GSC 52 or 5 86
111. 895 1368 13 Standards Maintained network control prevented or minimized network outages and conducted transfer control operations IAW published procedures Performance Steps 1 Operate the RFIS AN FSQ 150 a Perform RFIS power on procedures b Perform initial checks c Perform operating procedures d Perform stopping procedure e Perform emergency shutdown 2 Operate the PTF AN FSC 160 V a Perform system power up procedures b Perform initial patching and configuration setup as required c Initialize and load keying material d Perform system shutdown procedures 3 Operate the FCS AN FSQ 158 V a Perform system power up procedures b Perform initial patching and configuration of the 5 MHz distribution amplifiers as required c Perform initial patching and switching of downconverters and upconverters d Tune and adjust correct uplink and downlink frequencies e Set correct RF transmit power levels f Perform system shutdown procedures 4 Operate a spectrum analyzer a Perform a manual spectrum analyzer calibration b Perform manual measurement c Determine link Eb No using a spectrum analyzer Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Operated the RFIS AN FSQ 150 2 Operated the PTF AN FSC 160 V 3 Operated the FCS AN FSQ 158 V 4 Operated a spectrum analyzer Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the sold
112. 94 V TM 11 5820 1105 12 amp P DISAC 310 70 1 DA PAM 738 750 applicable TSOs and operating requirements Standards Successfully supervised the preventive maintenance or restoral of the MILSTAR Command Post Terminal Performance Steps 1 Ensure the operator monitors equipment for faulted degraded condition 2 Verify that the operator correctly identifies the faulted degraded piece of equipment 3 Verify that the operator troubleshoots equipment IAW the applicable TM a Verify that the operator replaces and or repairs faulted equipment IAW the applicable TM b Verify that the operator restores the faulted piece of equipment 4 Verify that the operator restores and verifies communications traffic 5 Verify that the operator completes all equipment turn in maintenance forms IAW DA PAM 738 750 or similar reference Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Ensured the operator monitored equipment for faulted degraded condition 2 Verified that the operator correctly identified the faulted degraded piece of equipment 3 Verified that the operator troubleshot equipment IAW the applicable TM 4 Verified that the operator restored and verified communications traffic 5 Verified that the operator completed all equipment turn in maintenance forms IAW DA PAM 738 750 or similar reference Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the sol
113. 97 13 3 TM 11 5895 1197 13 4 TM 11 5895 1197 13 5 TM 11 5895 1197 13 6 TM 11 5895 1197 13 7 TM 11 5895 1197 13 8 TM 11 5895 1197 13 9 TM 11 5895 1531 30 TM 11 5895 1532 30 TM 11 5895 1533 30 TM 11 5895 1534 30 TM 11 5895 1535 12 TM 11 5895 1536 13 TM 11 5895 846 14 TM 11 5985 398 13 Related DA PAM 738 750 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Direct the Operation of SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 39 AN FSC 78 AN GSC 52 or AN TSC 86 113 590 7005 Conditions As a section chief given an AN GSC 52A V3 SATCOM terminal AN FSC 78C V2 heavy SATCOM terminal AN GSC 39C medium SATCOM terminal SATCOM terminal AN TSC 86 TM 11 5895 1196 13 2 through TM 11 5895 1196 13 9 TM 11 5895 1197 13 1 through TM 11 5895 1197 13 11 TM 11 5895 1531 30 TM 11 5895 1532 30 TM 11 5895 1533 30 TM 11 5895 1535 12 TM 11 5895 1536 13 and TM 11 5895 846 14 direct the operation of SATCOM equipment and ensure supervisors complete their tasks as indicated Standards Directed the operation of appropriately identified SATCOM terminal s Performance Steps NOTE The following performance steps are for the AN GSC 39 AN FSC 78 and AN GSC 52 1 Ensure the supervisor verifies that the operator performs preoperational adjustments and setup IAW appropriate TM and applicable TSO Ensure the supervisor verifies that the operator performs satellite acquisition IAW with appropriate TM and governing SOP Ensure the supervisor verifies that the operator p
114. AC 800 70 1 GSD TR 5644 and TM 11 5895 1214 10 1 Standards The CPC demonstrated how to monitor and establish communication payload configurations performed communication payload analysis and conducted transfer control operations utilizing the TCCC DOSS and SCCE IAW published procedures Performance Steps 1 Prepare operational logs 2 Establish communications payload configurations a Configure multibeam antenna MBA b Perform gimballed dish antenna pointing c Perform transponder channel gain state change d Perform transponder PMAX test procedures e Change antenna connectivity 3 Maintain communications payload configurations Monitor the telemetry stream Collect system status data Frequency standard adjustment Perform single channel transponder commanding Perform word of the day procedure Perform battery data collection Perform orbit vector ephemeris generation Perform jammer location electronics calibration i Perform RAMPATCH data procedures TM 4 Perform communications payload analysis a React to a jammer 1 Verify unauthorized access U A or jammer 2 Read the telemetry data 3 Obtain hardcopies 4 Report data b Interpret transmit level sensor data c React to anomaly out of tolerance conditions d React to HESSA failures 5 Perform CPC control transfer operations 6 Identify control hierarchy 7 Perform TCCC operations a Perform rep
115. AND ACCESS SYSTEM DPAS DPASMML CMD CONN CRS TO 1 031 001 044 001 TC 0011 0011 TRB DPAS DATA TYP OPER FDX DPAS FRAME ID 1 DPAS NPC FM PORT CHNL 031 001 DPAS NPC TO PORT CHNL 044 001 DPAS TRUNK CONDITIONING NO SIG FULL DUPLEX DPAS CONTROL TERMINAL DCT DATA ID WOU4 TSP CONDITIONING CODE C1 4C STATUS TEMP EXEC CKT TYPE C TRUNK CHN RANGE END STA NEXT STA LINK MUX PORT DACS PORT 44JND6 001 NA SHE SBC CABLE NA 031 44JK97 001 NA SBC BNN M0851 A4 044 D DIGITAL T1 PATCH E TDM MULTIPLEX 2 A 4JK97 OAOT NO SIG 7 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG D BANN GEA4DP1 BLDG DIRECTIONS ADDRESS 9 RM FL R 2 CONTACT SUPERVISOR COMM 06371 86 8645 DSN 480 6881 781 8689 MAIL ADDRESS OL A 86TH COMM SQ SCMT APO AE 091261385 1 A TDM MULTIPLEX B DIGITAL T1 PATCH C DIGITAL PATCH AND ACCESS SYSTEM DPAS DPASMML CMD CONN CRS TO BANNO1 060 001 022 001 TC 0011 0011 TRB DPAS DATA TYP OPER FDX DPAS FRAME ID BANNO1 DPAS NPC FM PORT CHNL 060 001 DPAS NPC TO PORT CHNL 022 001 DPAS TRUNK CONDITIONING NO SIG FULL DUPLEX DPAS CONTROL TERMINAL DCT DATA ID WOU4 TSP CONDITIONING CODE C1 4C STATUS TEMP EXEC CKT TYPE C TRUNK CHN RANGE END STA NEXT STA LINK MUX PORT DACS PORT 44JK97 001 SBC BNN M0851 A4 060 44CK31 001 NA BNN LSL M0712 A6 022 D DIGITAL T1 PATCH E TDM MULTIPLEX 2 44CK31 OAOT NO SIG Z E LANDSTHL GE4DP 1 BLDG DIRECTIONS A
116. AS SOON AS POSSIBLE THEREAFTER HOWEVER DO NOT PROVIDE SERVICE AFTER 24 JUL 98 J RFS NO USAFE15JUN983214 4ASOS01MAY 980009 K ANY ADDRESSEE HAVING ACTION ON THIS TSO WILL NOTIFY THE DISA ACTIVITY CCO CMO AND TSR POINT OF CONTACT IMMEDIATELY OF PROBLEMS WHICH MAY AFFECT THE SPECIFIED ACTION ALL STATIONS WILL REVIEW THE CONFIGURATION EQUIPMENT CONTACT NUMBERS AND ADDRESSES CONTAINED IN THIS TSO ON ANY ERRORS SO THAT SUBSEQUENT TSOs MAY BE UPDATED mo owp 19 May 2005 A 5 STP 11 25814 SM TG L DATA BASE ACTION WILL BE TAKEN BY DISA EUROPE M TSO CONTACT MR CLAYTON PETERS EU8 ML DSN 430 6112 CML 0711 680 6112 EMAIL PETERSC EUR DISA MIL 6 SWITCHED RECORD NETWORK INFO AUTODIN A NA B NA C NA D NA E NA F NA G NATO SECRET H NA I NA J A K NA L NA M NA N ALT NARRATIVE RI ALT DATARI ALT MAG TAPE RI ALT Q R HOST RI O NA P NA Q NA R NA S NA T NO U NA V NA W NA X NA Y NA Z N AA NO BT NNNN A 6 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG APPENDIX B DA FORM 5164 R HANDS ON EVALUATION B 1 Introduction The DA Form 5164 R Hands On Evaluation allows the trainer to keep a record of the performance measures a soldier passes or fails on each task Instructions for using this form follow B 2 Prior to evaluating the soldier a A blank copy of DA Form 5164 R is located at the back of this manual which you may locally reproduce on 8 by 11 inch paper An electro
117. ASA link and channel alarms 5 Perform carrier power adjustments 6 Retrieve analyze new RLM TLS readings 7 8 9 10 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 Analyze DASA link and channel alarms Perform carrier power adjustments Retrieve new RLM TLS readings Analyze DASA link and channel alarms Perform notification procedures 4 Perform DSCS satellite and network analysis a Perform U A evaluation and reporting 1 Perform U A initial assessment 2 Prepare U A quicklook 3 Perform notification and logging procedures 5 Perform network control transfer a Perform notification procedures b Pre handover activities 1 Download to DASA from DIMS the current ODB for the inter range operation number IRON to be handed over 2 Use the DASA in instrument remote control immediately after download to display the measured 500 MHz downlink 3 Configure the RF interface subsystem RFIS for appropriate earth terminal downlink to the appropriate DASA 4 Verify that the correct amplifier attenuator setting with the DASA by matching the lowest point on the measured spectrum with the center horizontal line of the spectrum analyzer Adjust if necessary and approval has been granted by the GNOSC 5 Return the DASA to the monitor mode and allow a few sweeps to be completed to ensure the correctness of the DASA download 6 Using the instrument remote control display each channel of the satellite to visually verif
118. Army including schools training centers and NCO academies for example train soldiers and leaders to take their place in units in the Army by teaching the doctrine and tactics techniques and procedures TTP Units leaders and individuals train to standard on their assigned critical individual tasks The unit trains first as an organic unit and then as an integrated component of a team Before the unit can be trained to function as a team each soldier must be trained to perform their individual supporting tasks to standard Operational deployments and major training opportunities such as major training exercises CTCs and ARTEPs provide rigorous realistic and stressful training and operational experience under actual or simulated combat and operational conditions to enhance unit readiness and produce bold innovative leaders The result of this Army wide team effort is a training and leader development system that is unrivaled in the world Effective training produces the force soldiers leaders and units that can successfully execute any assigned mission 2 The Army Training and Leader Development Model Figure 1 1 centers on developing trained and ready units led by competent and confident leaders The model depicts an important dynamic that creates a lifelong learning process The three core domains that shape the critical learning experiences throughout a soldiers and leaders time span are the operational institutional and self deve
119. B2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0007 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system with software version 3 4 loaded an operation order OPORD and the commander s guidance Default Message Addressing settings have been set Standards As a minimum you must create an overlay or select an overlay change or edit an overlay save the overlay and send an overlay Performance Steps NOTE Operational plans operational concepts units and weapon symbols objectives boundaries routes of march and other control measures can be created in a digital overlay to provide command and control Digital Overlays can be created faster with greater degree of accuracy and can be edited and quickly disseminated to other members in the BDE Some overlays automatically post to the map SA area and generate an audible alert when they are received which is designed to prompt the operator to look at their display for life threatening obstacles The SA display on the FBCB2 system can be tailored to show up to four distinct layers of information Any combination of these layers can appear on the SA display simultaneously The Four electronic layers consist of the currently displayed overlay previously loaded overlay any SA elements that the system has been set to display and the map which forms the base of the display Layer 1 is the Map Display Layer 2 is the SA display Layer 3 is the Loaded Overlays Layer 4 is
120. DDRESS 3377 RM FL R 2 CONTACT SUPERVISOR COMM 06371 86 829 5 7382 DSN 486 8295 7382 MAIL ADDRESS COMMANDER OPMAS E SITE CHIEF DCS SITE LANDSTUHL CMR 402APO AE 09180 1 A TDM MULTIPLEX B DIGITAL T1 PATCH C DIGITAL PATCH AND ACCESS SYSTEM DPAS DPASMML CMD CONN CRS TO LANDSTHLO1 022 001 115 011 TC 0011 0011 TRB DPAS DATA TYP OPER FDX DPAS FRAME ID LANDSTHLO1 DPAS NPC FM PORT CHNL 022 001 DPAS NPC TO PORT CHNL 115 011 DPAS TRUNK CONDITIONING NO SIG FULL DUPLEX DPAS CONTROL TERMINAL DCT DATA ID WOU4 TSP CONDITIONING CODE C1 4C SATUS TEMP EXEC CKT TYPE C TRUNK CHN RANGE END STA NEXT STA LINK MUX PORT DACS PORT 44CK31 001 NA BNN LSL M0712 A6 022 44UNC8 011 NA LSL LDL CABLE NA 115 D DIGITAL T1 PATCH E TDM MULTIPLEX 2 A 44UNC8 OKOT NO SIG Z F LANDSTHL GE4TCG 19 May 2005 A 3 STP 11 25814 SM TG BLDG DIRECTIONS ADDRESS 3377 RM FL 2 CONTACT SUPERVISOR DSN 486 8295 CML 0637 1 86 8295 MAIL ADDRESS ITT DCS STA LANDSTUHL APO AE 09180 1 A AN FCC 98 TDM MULTIPLEXER B TERM 4W C CABLE CROSS CONNECT 44 CABLE 2 A 44 C NO SIG 7 LANDSTHL GE4NM1 BLDG DIRECTIONS ADDRESS 3377 RM FL 2 CONTACT SUPERVISOR DSN 486 8295 CML 0637 1 86 8295 MAIL ADDRESS ITT DCS STA LANDSTUHL APO AE 09180 1 A CABLE CROSS CONNECT ADNX 48 130A 2WFXS SLOT 13A REAR CARD INTERFACE I F INTERFACE PRC FRONT CARD FRONT CARD INTERFACE PRC G INDX T BUSS CROSS CONNECT 2
121. DSCS ECCM Network Operating and Control Procedures AN GSC 49 Terminal Operator Procedures U 1 April 1990 19 May 2005 DISAC 800 E70 7 DISAC 800 E70 8 DISAC 800 E70 9 GNCC USERS MANUAL GSD TR 5644 GSD TR 5645 IDNX MANUAL IETM AN GSC 52A 78C 39C ITOS O amp M MANUAL MTPH VOLUME 1 MTPH VOLUME 2 NCB OSP 1310 PROMINA PROMINA1 PROMINA2 PROMINA3 PROMINA4 5 PROMINA6 PX19671 PX19672 REV PX19674 REV B SAT STATION EURSAT SF FORM 368 STANFORD TELECOM 1 STANFORD TELECOM 2 STI UM 45005 STI UM 65026 TPH VOL 1 TPH VOL 2 UNIT OPLAN UNIT OPORD UNIT SOP 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG S DSCS ECCM Network Operating and Control Procedures U ECCM Network Control Procedures U 1 June 1992 S DSCS ECCM Network Operating and Control Procedures U ECCM Alternate Network Control Procedures U 1 June 1992 S DSCS ECCM Network Operating and Control Procedures U Network Terminal Operator Procedures U 1 June 1992 Ground Mobile Forces GMF Network Control Center User s Manual DOSS User Manual 1 May 1995 DASA User Manual IDNX Contractor Manual Interactive Electronic Technical Manual AN GSC 52A AN FSC 78C AN GSC 39C Intermediate Tactical Orderwire System Operation and Maintenance O amp M Manual MILSTAR Terminal Positional Handbook Volume 1 MILSTAR Terminal Positional Handbook Volume 2 Network Control Book NCB SECRET Software Operator User
122. Data Modem MD 1026 P G Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 2 17 September 1984 Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Digital Data Modem MD 1026 P G Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 9 July 1985 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Multiplexer Sets AN FCC 98 V 1 and AN FCC 98 V 1X Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 2 20 July 1978 Direct and General Support Maintenance Manual for Receiver Transmitter Orderwire RT 1287 TSC 18 December 1981 Time Division Multiplexer Group OB 119 FCC 100 V Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List Time Division Multiplexer Group OB 119 FCC 100 V 7 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0075 1 September 1996 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Communications Subsystem ON 505 V 1 P T ON 505 V 5 P T Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0059 15 December 2000 O Operator s Manual TSEC KG 84A Dedicated Loop Encryption Device 10 December 1984 Operator s Manual for Terminal Communications AN UGC 74A V 3 23 September 1983 No title not listed on DA PAM 25 30 19 May 2005 TM 11 5820 879 24P TM 11 5820 879 34 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 TM 11 5895 1008 13 1 TM 11 5895 1008 13 2 TM 11 5895 1041 34 TM 11 5895 1093 34 TM 11 5895 1127 10 TM 11 5895 1127 20 TM 11 5895 1128 10
123. Delete button The waypoint will be deleted from the list but not from the route on the map c Select the Save button The system will delete the waypoint from the route on the map and return to the Edit Route dialog box d Select the List button The system will display the Edit Way point dialog box e Place the cursor in the Enter Way point text box and left click the mouse f Enter a grid close to the grid of the last waypoint in the list NOTE Ensure that you type the grid just like the waypoints that are in the list with the Grid Zone designator g Select the Insert button The system will add the waypoint to the list but not to the route h Select the Save button The system will add the waypoint to the Route and return to the Edit route dialog box 5 66 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps NOTES 1 If the user wants to delete all the way points the user would highlight one of the way points in the list and select the Delete All button and select the Yes button on the Confirm Deletion dialog box 2 The user can add way points by selecting the pull down arrow on the Edit Way points dialog box and select either Keyboard Kbd Laser Range Finder LRF Map Own Name and Virtual Keyboard Vkb i Select the close button from the Edit Route dialog box The system will display the Navigation dialog box 5 Select the Reverse button several times NOTE Notice how the Start Point on the route become
124. EMPLOY QUICK SEND FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 EMPLOY FILTERS FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 These tasks will be trained for familiarization only Skill Level 2 Subject Area 6 SATCOM Terminal Supervision 113 589 7121 113 589 7122 113 589 7123 Supervise the Maintenance of SATCOM Terminal BNCOC QT 2 4 AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V Supervise the Installation of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC BNCOC QT 2 3 85 V or AN TSC 93 V Supervise the Operation of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC BNCOC QT 2 3 85 V or AN TSC 93 V Skill Level 3 113 583 7095 Supervise the Maintenance of the DCSS BNCOC QT 3 4 113 583 7096 Supervise the Operation of the DCSS BNCOC QT 3 4 113 590 7001 Supervise the Maintenance of SATCOM Terminal BNCOC QT 2 3 AN GSC 39 AN FSC 78 AN GSC 52 or AN TSC 86 113 590 7002 Supervise the Operation of SATCOM Terminal AN GSC BNCOC QT 2 3 39 AN FSC 78 AN GSC 52 or AN TSC 86 113 590 7003 Supervise the Installation of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC UNIT QT 3 4 86 113 610 7001 Supervise the Operation of Satellite Communications Set UNIT QT 3 4 AN USC 28 V 113 610 7002 Supervise the Maintenance of Satellite Communications UNIT QT 3 4 Set AN USC 28 V 113 623 6014 Manage a Maintenance Program BNCOC QT 3 4 113 638 6001 Manage a Publications Library BNCOC QT 3 4 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG 113 616 7036 CRITICAL TASKS Task Number Title Training Location Subject Area 8 ASI 1C 113 616 70
125. Equipment c Personnel 2 Conducted preliminary site selection using maps 3 Determined site suitability Accessibility Relative flatness Natural cover concealment Within equipment range Dependability 4 Staked equipment locations time permitting optional 5 Prepared strip maps to indicate route of travel to site 3 98 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related UNIT OPLAN FM 11 55 UNIT OPORD TM 11 5895 1544 13 amp P UNIT SOP 19 May 2005 3 99 STP 11 25814 SM TG Maintain a Situation Map 113 611 5012 Conditions As a communications systems supervisor you are required to maintain a situation map Given unit operation order operation plan OPORD OPLAN unit SOP a map of the area of operation situation reports from S2 FM 24 16 and FM 101 5 Standards Posted the situation map with current information and met the requirement of your unit OPORD OPLAN NOTE This task is performed on a continuous basis Performance Steps 1 Review the mission SOP 2 Review the data to be posted on situation map a Tactical situation b Location of the headq
126. GSC 52A 113 590 2151 Conditions Given SATCOM terminal AN FSC 78C AN GSC 39C or AN GSC 52A and appropriate integrated electronic technical manual IETM AN GSC 52A 78 39 Standards SATCOM terminal AN FSC 78C AN GSC 39C or AN GSC 52A was operational Performance Steps 1 Determine through necessary means that an unusual condition exists a Extreme weather conditions b Unusual power conditions c Unusual equipment conditions 2 Reference individual unusual conditions in the IETM 3 Operate the system under unusual conditions per IETM instructions Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Determined through necessary means that an unusual condition existed 2 Referenced individual unusual conditions the 3 Operated the system under unusual conditions per IETM instructions Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related IETM AN GSC 52A 78C 39C 3 16 19 May 2005 Maintain SATCOM Terminal AN FSC 78B or AN GSC 39B 113 590 3162 STP 11 25814 SM TG Conditions Given a defective terminal AN FSC 78B V or AN GSC 39B V TMDE listed in appropriate TM TM 11 5895 1532 30 TM 11 5895 1558 13 DA PAM 738 750 and DA Form 2404
127. ING SUPPORT This manual includes the following appendixes and information that provide additional training support information a Appendix A Sample Telecommunications Service Order TSO Glossary The glossary is a single comprehensive list of acronyms abbreviations definitions and letter symbols Appendix B DA Form 5164 R Hands on Evaluation This appendix contains the instructions for using DA Form 5164 R and a sample completed form for NCOs to use during evaluation of soldiers manual tasks c References This section contains two lists of references required and related which support training of all tasks in this SM Required references are listed in the conditions statement and are required for the soldier to do the task Related references are materials that provide more detailed information and a more thorough explanation of task performance Glossary The glossary is a single comprehensive list of acronyms abbreviations definitions and letter symbols d References This section contains two lists of references required and related which support training of all tasks in this SM Required references are listed in the conditions statement and are required for the soldier to do the task Related references are materials that provide more detailed information and more thorough explanation of task performance 1 9 FEEDBACK Recommendations for improvement of this STP are requested Feedback will help to ensure that t
128. KOI 18 fill cable DISA circulars 800 E70 7 for the NCT 800 E70 8 for the ALTNCT 800 E70 9 for the NT and 800 E70 11 for AN GSC 49 terminals TM 11 5895 808 13 1 TM 11 5895 808 13 10 and TM 11 5895 1179 13 KY 883 DA Form 2404 DA Form 2407 and unit SOP Standards Correctly configured all equipment and equipment was operational Performance Steps 1 Verify that operational PMCS activities are accomplished a Verify that daily PMCS are accomplished and spot checked for accuracy b Verify that results are recorded on appropriate forms records NOTE The following performance steps are performed when the operator discovers a failure or degradation in equipment during the performance of PMCS or during normal operation 2 Verify that the operator does an initial assessment of failure identifications and determines if failure affects entire system or is a localized failure 3 Verify that the operator localizes failure to a specific area a Verify that the operator identifies the correct rack that contains the failure b Verify that the operator identifies the correct half rack drawer that contains the failure c Verify that the operator identifies the correct half drawer that contains the failure 4 Ensure the operator restores communications on redundant equipment alternate path prior to commencing detailed fault isolation 5 Ensure the operator localizes failure using the directed alarm fault isolation AFI verify BITE o
129. M 248A Operated the Promina Operated the SMU 11 Operated the AN USC 64 ICC 12 Operated the Timeplex Link 2 System Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related OSP 1310 PROMINA3 PROMINA PROMINA4 PROMINA1 PROMINA5 PROMINA2 PROMINA6 TM 11 5805 795 13 amp P TM 11 5805 802 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1215 10 TM 11 7025 221 10 TM 11 5895 1346 13 TM CQT 6400 IOM 02 TM 11 5895 1630 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1686 13 TM 11 5895 1687 13 19 May 2005 3 7 STP 11 25814 SM TG Maintain Digital Communications Satellite Subsystem DCSS 113 583 3273 Conditions Given associated DCSS equipment IDNX Manual TM 11 5805 795 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1215 20 TM 11 5895 1346 13 TM 11 5895 1630 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1686 13 TM 11 7025 221 20 TM CQT 6400 IOM 02 applicable TSOs Unit SOP and operating requirements Standards The DCSS equipment completed the self test passed all operational tests and was passing communications Performance Steps 1 Perform equipment power up procedures a Configure each piece of equipment according to the TSO cut sheets or local SOP b Patch all equipment and place on line c If no alarms or faults
130. MCS activities are accomplished for curbside equipment IAW appropriate TMs for Before Operation During Operation and After Operation 2 Direct personnel that PMCS activities are accomplished for roadside equipment IAW appropriate TMs for Before Operation During Operation and After Operation 3 Direct personnel that maintenance PMCS activities are completed on curbside equipment IAW applicable TMs Ensure weekly and semiannual are completed 4 Direct personnel that maintenance PMCS activities are completed on roadside equipment IAW applicable TMs Ensure weekly and semiannual are completed 5 Ensure that supervisors keep track of corrected deficiencies a Repairs that are made at unit level are accomplished b All repairs that are above unit level have the appropriate paperwork initiated to have repairs done Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Directed personnel that PMCS activities on curbside equipment were accomplished a Supervisor verified that before during and after operation checks were performed IAW appropriate TMs 2 Directed personnel that PMCS activities on roadside equipment were accomplished a Supervisor verified that before during and after operation checks were performed IAW appropriate TMs 3 Directed personnel that maintenance PMCS was completed on curbside equipment a Supervisor verified that weekly and semiannual maintenance was completed IAW app
131. MSEC insecurity existed 2 Leader identified type of COMSEC insecurity 3 Leader reported the COMSEC insecurity IAW AR 380 5 Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related AR 380 5 TB 380 41 3 78 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Direct the Maintenance of Defense Communications Satellite Subsystem DCSS 113 583 7097 Conditions As a SATCOM system chief in a strategic environment and given associated equipment IDNX Manual TM 11 5805 795 13 TM 11 5895 1215 20 TM 11 5895 1346 13 TM 11 5895 1630 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1686 13 TM 11 7025 221 20 TM CQT 6400 IOM 02 unit SOP and operating requirements Standards Directed the restoral of the DCSS into an operational mode Performance Steps 1 Ensure personnel monitor the DCSS for faulty or degrading conditions NOTE For a more detailed list refer to Task Number 113 583 7095 Supervise the Maintenance of DCSS 2 Ensure supervisors utilize the troubleshooting techniques that are IAW appropriate TMs equipment 3 Once a fault is identified on the equipment with the DCSS direct personnel to isolate the fault 4 Ensure supervisors notify higher headquarters IAW DISA regulations of extended out
132. Modems b IF translator patch panel 85 V modem patch panel 93 V c Upconverters d High power amplifier HPA e High voltage power supply HVPS f Antenna assembly and antenna mounted electronics AME g Downconverters h Modem patch panel i DCSCU j OW unit and patch panel Fault alarm monitor unit FAMU 3 Perform weekly and semiannual maintenance PMCS procedures on curbside equipment listed in performance step 1 IAW applicable TMs for equipment being inspected 4 Perform weekly and semiannual maintenance PMCS procedures on roadside equipment listed in performance step 2 IAW applicable TMs for equipment being inspected 5 Restore equipment after communications failure a Verify alarm at the FAMU 1 Reset minor alarms glitches and hits in the network 2 Isolate major alarms loss of lock equipment failure b Notify the SNC ground mobile forces network controller satellite communications GMFSC network controller GNC of equipment failure 3 28 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps c Isolate localize fault to the LRU d Restore communications with redundant equipment 1 Prepare spare equipment for operation IAW unit mission and TSO 2 Make patch connection at IF and or data patch panels e Verify that communications are restored and all alarm conditions are corrected 6 Perform maintenance to correct deficiencies a Perform operator level troubleshooting procedures IAW app
133. N O A N Ensured the SMU operated IAW applicable operator s manuals Ensured the ICC operated IAW applicable manuals 12 Ensured the Timeplex Link 2 operated IAW applicable operator s manuals Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related IDNX MANUAL PROMINA2 OSP 1310 PROMINA3 PROMINA PROMINA4 PROMINA1 PROMINA5 TM 11 5805 795 13 PROMINA6 TM 11 5895 1215 10 TM 11 5805 802 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1346 13 TM 11 7025 221 10 TM 11 5895 1630 13 amp P TM CQT 6400 IOM 02 19 May 2005 3 53 STP 11 25814 SM TG Supervise the Maintenance of SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 39 AN FSC 78 AN GSC 52 or AN TSC 86 113 590 7001 Conditions As a section chief SATCOM systems supervisor SATCOM maintenance NCO SATCOM operations NCO or SATCOM chief given AN GSC 52 SATCOM terminal AN FSC 78 heavy SATCOM terminal AN GSC 39 medium SATCOM terminal or SATCOM terminal AN TSC 86 in a defective condition DA Form 2404 DA Form 2407 DA PAM 738 750 applicable TMs and unit SOP supervise soldiers to maintain the appropriate terminal and restore communications Standards Successfully supervised the restoral of a defective SATCOM terminal and completed the ap
134. Perform DFCS control equipment shutdown 1 Perform notification procedures 2 Perform control transfer 3 Perform disk dismount 4 Remove power from the CPUs 5 Remove power from the CDL modems 6 Perform notification procedures Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Prepared operational logs 2 Established DFCS networks 3 Maintained DFCS networks 4 Performed DFCS network analysis 5 Performed DFCS control transfer operations 6 Identified control hierarchy 4 6 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 7 Performed TCCC operations 8 Performed DOSS operations 9 Performed DFCS operations Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related DISA CIR 800 70 1 GSD TR 5644 TM 11 5895 1357 13 1 GSD TR 5645 TM 11 5895 1357 13 2 19 May 2005 4 7 STP 11 25814 SM TG Conduct Communications Payload Controller CPC Operations within the Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS 113 616 2023 Conditions Given the TCCC DOSS and Satellite Configuration Control Element SCCE while working as the CPC in a DSCSOC and DIS
135. Personnel Status Report interfaces with the Combat Service Support Control System CSSCS which transmits personnel reports to higher echelons a Select the Apps button from the Function Bar or the F7 button from the keyboard The system will display the Apps dialog box b Select the Personnel Status Report from the list with the mouse pointer The system will highlight the Personnel Status Report c Select the Execute button The system will display the Personnel Status Report dialog box NOTE The Personnel Status Report dialog box has eight common push buttons which consist of Message Addressing which allows the user to set how and who they will send the message to New which brings up a new Add personnel Record Delete which deletes a record Refresh which refreshes the Data Display Area Send which sends the report Modify which allows the user to edit a record Close which closes the Personnel Status Report and Help which gives the user help on Personnel Status Reports There is also a SEARCH BY pull down arrow which allows the user to search for a record by Last name SSN number Status Unit name Role ID Grade MOS Gender Nationality Religion Blood type and Effective DTG There is also a search text box that allows the user to search for a record by typing the information in the text box and selecting the search button d Select the Message Addressing button The system will display the Message Addressing dialog box e Ente
136. R Terminal Positional Handbook MTPH Volume I 11 5820 1105 12 amp P applicable TSOs and operating requirements Standards The MILSTAR Command Post Terminal AN FRC 181 V or AN TRC 194 V passed all operational tests and was passing communications Performance Steps 1 Set up baseband and COMSEC equipment IAW the MTPH Volume 1 Procedures 3 1 1 3 1 2 and 3 1 3 Power up reset the terminal IAW TM 11 5820 1105 12 amp P Terminal Power Up Reset Checkout Procedures 13 sheets Figure 4 27 or the MTPH Volume 1 Procedures 3 2 2 or 3 2 3 and 3 3 1 Perform simplified Terminal Initialization Procedures IAW the MTPH Volume 1 Procedures 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 and 3 4 4 Load terminal COMSEC transmission security TRANSEC keys IAW the MTPH Volume 1 Procedures 3 5 1 3 5 2 3 5 3 3 5 4 and 3 5 5 Perform Terminal Control Procedures IAW the MTPH Volume 1 Procedures 3 6 1 3 6 2 3 6 3 3 6 4 and 3 6 5 Perform message processing procedures IAW the MTPH Volume 1 Procedures 3 7 1 3 7 2 3 7 3 and 3 7 4 Perform extremely high frequency EHF acquisition and logon procedures IAW the MTPH Volume 1 Procedures 3 8 1 3 8 2 3 8 3 3 8 4 3 8 5 3 8 6 3 8 7 and 3 8 8 Perform EHF logoff procedure IAW the MTPH Volume 1 Procedure 3 9 1 Power down the terminal IAW TM 11 5820 1105 12 amp P Terminal Shutdown Procedures 5 sheets Figure 4 39 or the MTPH Volume 1 Procedure 3 2 2 or 3 2 3
137. RSION 3 4 5 35 171 147 0012 PERFORM SHUT DOWN PROCEDURES FOR FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 5 37 171 147 0013 PERFORM DURING OPERATIONS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 5 39 171 147 0014 PERFORM AFTER OPERATIONS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES ON FBCB2 VERSION 4 5 40 171 147 0015 PREPARE SEND A LOGISTICAL STATUS REPORT USING FBCB2 VERSION 34 5 iio dene eh i hc eia d e EUR EDU RAE 5 41 171 147 0017 EMPLOY MAP FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 5 44 171 147 0019 EMPLOY FIPR FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 5 49 171 147 0020 EMPLOY STATUS FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 5 53 171 147 0021 EMPLOY ADMIN FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 5 56 171 147 0022 EMPLOY APPS FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 5 60 171 147 0023 EMPLOY NAV FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 4 5 65 171 147 0024 EMPLOY QUICK SEND FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 5 72 171 147 0025 EMPLOY FILTERS FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 5 74 APPENDIX A SAMPLE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICE ORDER TSO A 1 APPENDIX B DA FORM 5164 R HANDS ON
138. Related FM 101 5 0588 UNIT OPLAN UNIT OPORD UNIT SOP 19 May 2005 3 101 STP 11 25814 SM TG Direct the Establishment of a Signal Site Defense 113 611 5016 Conditions Given a specified area to defend a Signal platoon the unit SOP map protractor OPORD a requirement to defend that area STP 21 1 SMCT and STP 21 24 SMCT Standards Planned and established site defense and prepared site defense overlay Performance Steps 1 Design a tentative site defense plan NOTE A well prepared site defense plan gives advance warning of attackers reduces the number of possible approach routes and assists in denying or delaying penetration by the enemy 2 Position security outposts around the site to provide early warning of an enemy approach NOTE Listening and observation posts should be established and manned as personnel and mission requirements permit a Establish posts outside the security zone in protected locations b Establish posts in locations that provide an unobstructed view of possible avenues of enemy approach 3 Establish entrance exit points and lanes for traffic flow within the site NOTE Protective physical barriers must be established to provide security for the security zone a Determine the size of the area by the complexity of the site and the degree of compartmentalization required b Establish positive barriers to 1 Control vehicular and pedestrian traffic flow 2 Check identification
139. SM TG Manage Site Configuration Plans 113 613 7198 Conditions Given AR 70 1 site configuration plans that require reviewing updating work area ruler and colored pencil markers red blue and yellow Standards Reviewed and evaluated changes Performance Steps 1 Review configuration plans blueprints ensuring drawings are as follows a Complete b Accurate c Correct 2 Match existing actual site equipment layout with the configuration plans and drawings 3 Annotate changes in colored ink a Additions in red ink b Deletions in yellow ink c Notes in blue ink 4 Make distribution of annotated drawings a Forward one copy to the Configuration Management Office for updates b Retain and file one copy for local reference and use Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Reviewed configuration plans blueprints ensuring drawings are as follows a Complete b Accurate Correct 2 Matched existing actual site equipment layout with the configuration plans and drawings 3 Annotated changes in colored ink a Additions in red ink b Deletions in yellow ink c Notes in blue ink 4 Made distribution of annotated drawings Forwarded copy to the Configuration Management Office for updates b Retained and filed one copy for local reference and use Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if
140. STP 11 25814 SM TG HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY Soldier s Manual and Trainer s Guide MOS 255 SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS OPERATOR MAINTAINER SKILL LEVELS 1 2 3 AND 4 MAY 2005 DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION Approved for public release distribution is unlimited This publication is available at Army Knowledge Online www us army mil and General Dennis J Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library at http www train army mil STP 11 25S14 SM TG SOLDIER TRAINING HEADQUARTERS PUBLICATION DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 11 25514 Washington DC 19 2005 SOLDIER S MANUAL AND TRAINER S GUIDE MOS 25S SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS OPERATOR MAINTAINER Skill Levels 1 2 3 and 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE Table of Contents ette teleo cette bcn i PREFA CE v Chapter T Introductions ar a 1 1 Chapter 2 Training Guide TO aiena ana a a AAAA A AAS EAA A EAA ATIAN AAAS 2 1 Chapter 3 MOS Skill Level 00 sensn 3 1 Skill Level 1 Subject Area 1 Digital Communications Satellite Subsystem DCSS 113 583 2625 Operate Digital Communications Satellite Subsystem DCSS 3 1 113 583 3273 Maintain Digital Communications Satellite Subsystem DCSS 3 8 Subje
141. Satellite Network Controller SNC Operations within the Defense Satellite Communications System 05 5 4 10 113 616 2029 Conduct Ground Mobile Forces Satellite Communications GMFSC Network Controller GNC Operations within the Defense Satellite Communications System 5 25 eee enm 4 15 113 616 2030 Conduct Ancilliary Equipment Operations within a Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS Operations Center DSCSOJOC 4 19 113 616 3131 Maintain Defense Satellite Communications Systems DSCS Operations Centers Regu M ask ial 4 21 113 616 7035 Direct Satellite Network Control within the Defense Satellite Communications System 05 5 4 23 113 616 7036 Supervise the Maintenance of Control Equipment in a Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS Operations System DSCSOOC 4 25 Subject Area 9 MILSTAR 113 590 2152 Operate MILSTAR Command Post Terminal AN FRC 181 V or AN TRC p eed E P pe dn verde AR dtes 4 27 113 590 3172 Maintain MILSTAR Command Post Terminal AN FRC 181 V or AN TRC cedar nda tiated ie rea Td neta ies 4 29 113 590 7006 Supervise the Operation of MILSTAR Command Post Terminal AN FRC 181 1940 6
142. Standards are typically described in terms of accuracy completeness and speed e Training and Evaluation The training evaluation section identifies specific actions known as performance steps which the soldier must do to successfully complete the task These actions are in the evaluation guide section of the task summary and are listed in a GO NO GO format for easy evaluation For some tasks the training and evaluation section may also include detailed training information in a training information outline and an evaluation preparation section The evaluation preparation section indicates necessary modifications to task performance in order to train and evaluate a task that cannot be trained to the wartime conditions It may also include special training and evaluation preparation instructions to accommodate these modifications and any instructions that should be given to the soldier before evaluation 19 May 2005 1 5 STP 11 25814 SM TG f References This section identifies references that provide more detailed and thorough explanations of task performance requirements than those given in the task summary description g Warnings Warnings alert users to the possibility of immediate personal injury or damage to equipment h Notes Notes provide a supportive explanation or hint that relates to the performance standards 1 5 TRAINING EXECUTION All good training regardless of the specific collective leader and individual tasks bein
143. T INTERFACE FREDRICKS 1280A MODEM FSK 44 CABLE 22 GA 200 FT 0 0 DB LOSS CABLE CROSS CONNECT TERM 4W UGC 144 TERMINAL CST 9399995 4 NUMBER CONTROL N A N A N A oor 5 OTHER SPECIFIC DIRECTIONS COMMERCIAL GFE DATE 200800Z JUL 98 NETWORK SVC IN DIRECT AUTODIN TSR CONTACT MR HENRY CARTER DISA EUR EU8 DSN 430 6111 CML 0711 680 6111 EMAIL CARTERH EUR DISA MIL WARNER EXEMPTION NA IN EFFECT REPORTS FOR EITHER ACTIVATION OR DEACTIVATION OF TEMPORARY SERVICE ARE NOT REQUIRED WHENEVER THE CIRCUIT IS ACTIVATED OR DEACTIVATED AS DIRECTED IN THE TSO IF TEMPORARY CIRCUIT ACTIVATION DEACTIVATION IS DELAYED OR IF THE CIRCUIT IS ACTIVATED WITH EXCEPTION S THEN A DELAYED SERVICE AND OR AN EXCEPTION REPORT MUST BE SUBMITTED THIS REPORT MUST THEN BE FOLLOWED BY THE APPROPRIATE COMPLETION REPORT SUBMITTED TO ALL ADDRESSEES OF THE TSO F T amp A IS REQUIRED UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED CIRCUIT WILL BE TESTED IAW ESTABLISHED TEST SCHEDULES IN DISAC 310 70 1 TEST RESULTS WILL BE MAINTAINED IN THE CIRCUIT HISTORY FOLDER AT SERVING TECH CONTROLS TEST RESULTS WILL NOT BE SUBMITTED TO HIGHER ACTIVITIES UNLESS SPECIFICALLY REQUESTED THIS TSO IS IN SUPPORT OF EXERCISE PROJECT CAS SCRAMBLE 98 COST THRESHOLD DISN ESTIMATED COST NO FUNDS INVOLVED TSR REMARKS 1 THIS CIRCUIT SUPPORTS THE 4ASOS IN THEIR UNIT LEVEL EXERCISE CAS SCRAMBLE 98 2 IF SERVICE CANNOT BE PROVIDED AS REQUESTED USER WILL ACCEPT SERVICE
144. T DEFAULT TRANS d Select the Execute button The system will display the Combat Messages dialog box e Select the Fill Loc button The Combat Messages dialog box will disappear and the mouse cursor will be replaced with a cross hair f Select a location on the map where the pick up site will be The system displays the location in the Location text box g Or Select the Fill LRF button The system will input the location provided by the laser range finder NOTE This function works if your vehicle is equipped with the Laser Range finder h Select the Amb Patients or button to increase or decrease the number of Ambulatory patients Select the Ltr Patients or button to increase or decrease the number of Litter Patients Select the Marking pull down arrow The system will display the Marking options list Select an option from the list The system displays the selection in the Marking text box k Select the Color pull down arrow The system will display the Color options list Select an option from the list The system displays the selection in the Color text box Select the Pickup Zone Hot check box The system will display a check mark in the Pickup Zone Hot text box NOTE If the area is not Hot then do not check this box Hot meaning that the area has hostiles m Select the MEDAVAC Priority pull down arrow The system will display the MEDAVAC Priority options list Select and option from the list The sys
145. TE The comments field is limited to a maximum of 200 alphanumeric characters that is used to make comments about the overlay To add comments just left click in the text box and type the comment j Select the Save As button The system will display the Save As dialog box k Highlight the folder that the overlay will be saved to or create a folder with the New folder button 5 16 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps the name of the overlay the File text box at the bottom of the Save AS dialog box m Select the OK button The system will display an Information dialog box stating The message was saved with an OK button n Select the OK button The system will return to the Overlay Toolbox 3 Select the Object tab The system will display the Object tab group consisting of Group 2525B and UTO tabs NOTE The Object tab selects an object identifies its attributes friend foe or unknown and adds it to an overlay The Object tab displays all the object information and is used to add graphical objects create or revise edit a graphical objects attributes textual labels or location on the current overlay 4 Select the Group Sub tab Default The system will display the Group sub tab group NOTE The Group Sub tab displays graphic symbol files and sub files and is used to select and add icons to the Map SA area The Graphic symbol files are Areas Equipment Equipment Air Fire Support Line
146. Test or Procedure 4 8 1 Initiate a Loopback Test in MTPH Volume 1 using CPCI 2 User s Manual Volumes 1 and 2 and Chapter 6 in TM 11 5820 1105 12 amp P 2 Restore and verify all communications are correct 3 Complete all applicable maintenance forms IAW DA PAM 738 750 or similar reference Performance Measures GO Refer to TM 11 5820 1105 12 amp P MTPH Volumes 1 and 2 Time Distribution Subsystem Preprocessor TDSPP Positional Handbooks TPH Volumes 1 and 2 and Computer Program Development Specification for Terminal Control Processing Software CPCI 2 User s Manual Volumes 1 and 2 1 Identified failed LRU using on line built in test indications or IAW TM procedures 2 Restored and verified all communications were correct 3 Completed all applicable maintenance forms IAW DA 738 750 or similar reference Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related CPCI 2 UM VOL 1 CPS2L3 CPCI 2 UM VOL 2 CPS2L4 DISAC 310 70 1 CPS2L5 MTPH VOL 1 DA PAM 738 750 MTPH VOL 2 TM 11 5820 1105 12 amp P TPH VOL 1 TPH VOL 2 19 May 2005 4 29 STP 11 25814 SM TG Supervise the Operation of MILSTAR Command Post Terminal AN FRC 181 V or
147. Unit DU and Keyboard Unit KU 4 Set Circuit Breaker CB toggle switch to OFF position Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 5 40 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG PREPARE SEND A LOGISTICAL STATUS REPORT USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0015 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system with software version 3 4 loaded You are in an assembly area or battle position you have received a platoon operation order OPORD or fragmentary order FRAGO for a resupply operation The default Message Addressing settings for this report have been set Standards As a minimum you must Select the LOG Report on FBCB2 and enter your logistical data in the on hand column Save the updated information and send the report to higher Performance Steps 1 Select the Apps button from the Function bar or select the F7 button from the keyboard The system will display the Apps dialog box 2 Select the FBCB2 tab which should be the Defaulted Tab The system will display the FBCB2 tab group 3 Select LOG Report under the FBCB2 Tab The system will highlight the LOG Report NOTE The LOG Report can also be accessed through the Messages button Create tab and Reports radio button The Logistics Status Rep
148. VERSION 3 4 APPLY MESSAGE ADDRESSING FEATURES IN FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0006 PERFORM MESSAGE MANAGEMENT USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0007 171 147 0008 171 147 0009 171 147 0010 171 147 0011 171 147 0012 171 147 0013 PREPARE SEND OVERLAYS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 PREPARE SEND REPORTS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 PREPARE SEND FIRE ALERT MESSAGES USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 PREPARE SEND ORDER REQUEST MESSAGES USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 PERFORM BEFORE OPERATIONS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES ON FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 PERFORM SHUT DOWN PROCEDURES FOR FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 PERFORM DURING OPERATIONS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES ON FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 19 May 2005 Task Number 171 147 0014 171 147 0015 171 147 0017 171 147 0019 171 147 0020 171 147 0021 171 147 0022 171 147 0023 171 147 0024 171 147 0025 STP 11 25814 SM TG CRITICAL TASKS Title Training Sust Sust Location Tng Tng SL Freq PERFORM AFTER OPERATIONS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES ON FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 PREPARE SEND A LOGISTICAL STATUS REPORT USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 EMPLOY MAP FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 EMPLOY FIPR FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 EMPLOY STATUS FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 EMPLOY ADMIN FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 EMPLOY APPS FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 EMPLOY NAV FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4
149. a to support cables 7 Install site power a Connect power cables to transfer box b Install shelter power cable from transfer box to shelter 8 Perform final antenna adjustments a Turn elevation vernier dial clockwise and level to correct elevation as indicated on the SAA NOTE The dual capacity servo control unit DCSCU elevation readout should be within 2 degrees of the vernier dial setting 9 Anchor antenna a Place antenna anchors b Attach and tighten down anchors 10 Install hazard fence a Ensure signs are properly spaced and visible b Secure hazard fence 11 Anchor shelter a Place shelter anchors b Attach and tighten down shelter tie downs 12 Install shelter a Ground shelter b Install and secure shelter ladder c Connect external user cables on curbside interface d Connect external user cables on roadside interface e Open all air vents on shelter 13 Place fire point midway between the generator set and the shelter 3 22 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Evaluation Preparation Setup Have a copy of the performance steps appropriate TMs and local Unit SOP available Brief soldier Not applicable Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Selected site a Located general elevation of satellite b Selected an area that met the topographical standards outlined in the TM c Checked soil conditions for stability anchoring and effective grounding d Ensured that the ter
150. accessories and cables are present secured and properly stowed to avoid damage b Check mounting bolts before extensive equipment use c Check Ram Ball assembly for tightness if equipped NOTE Equipment is degraded if PLGR SINCGARS or EPLRS if so equipped are missing damaged and if Processor Unit PU Display Unit DU Keyboard Unit KU or connecting cables are missing damaged and thereby prevent proper equipment operation 2 Check the Processor Unit PU a Securely fasten the Removable Hard Disk Cartridge RHDDC access door All four or all six captive fasteners must be evenly and securely tightened NOTE Equipment is not fully mission capable if RHDDC access door is not properly closed due to obstructions bad seal and broken missing loose captive fastener s 3 Check the Processor Unit PU Display Unit DU and Keyboard Unit KU a Safeguard with 5200 series lock s cables to secure PU DU and KU as applicable to your platform NOTE Equipment is not fully mission capable if PU Hard Disk Drive Door DU and or KU are not secured and cables and or locks are missing damaged 4 Set Circuit Breaker CB toggle switch to OFF position NOTE Equipment is degraded if CB toggle switch is not set to OFF position or CB switch is broken damaged Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Check the AN UYK 128 V Computer 2 Check the Processor Unit PU 3 Check the Processor Unit PU Display
151. actice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related DISA CIR 800 E70 11 DISA CIR 800 E70 7 DISA CIR 800 E70 8 DISA CIR 800 E70 9 TM 11 5895 808 13 1 TM 11 5895 808 13 10 TM 11 5895 808 13 11 TM 11 5895 808 13 2 TM 11 5895 808 13 3 TM 11 5895 808 13 4 TM 11 5895 808 13 5 TM 11 5895 808 13 6 TM 11 5895 808 13 7 TM 11 5895 808 13 8 TM 11 5895 808 13 9 TM 11 5895 808 23P 19 May 2005 4 35 STP 11 25814 SM TG Maintain Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V 113 610 3085 Conditions Given an AN USC 28 V NCB SECRET keying materials SECRET KAO 184A TSEC KYK 13 KOI 18 fill cable DISAC 800 E70 7 for the DISAC 800 E70 8 for the ALTNCT DISAC 800 E70 9 for the NT and DISAC 800 E70 11 for AN GSC 49 terminals TM 11 5895 808 13 1 through TM 11 5895 808 13 11 TM 11 5895 1179 13 KY 883 and TM 11 5895 808 23P and site SOP Standards All equipment was configured correctly and operational Performance Steps 1 Conduct operational PMCS activities a Perform daily PMCS b Record results on appropriate forms records NOTE The following performance steps are performed when the operator discovers a failure or degradation in equipment during the performance of PMCS or during normal operation 2 Conduct an initial assessment of failure identifications and determine if failure affects entire system or is a localized failure 3 Localize the failure to a specific area a Identify the cor
152. ad associated TMs and commercial manuals that supported its operations and configurations Reference Task Number 113 583 7096 Supervise the Operation of DCSS for specific equipment 4 Ensured that supervisors tracked any problems that may have occurred with equipment setup or operation Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related PROMINA PROMINA1 PROMINA2 PROMINA3 PROMINA4 PROMINA5 PROMINAG TM 11 5805 795 13 TM 11 5805 802 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1215 10 TM 11 5895 1346 13 3 80 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG References Required Related TM 11 5895 1630 13 amp P TM 11 7025 221 10 TM CQT 6400 IOM 02 19 May 2005 3 81 STP 11 25814 SM TG Establish Network Plans for GMF 113 589 6001 Conditions Given the requirement to plan a communications network DISAC 800 70 1 ASC 1 TM 11 5895 1448 10 LRM Configuration Worksheet Terminal Configuration Worksheet and current Key List from local COMSEC custodian Standards Issued the Terminal Deployment Orders successfully passed communications and submitted the After Actions Report Performance Steps 1 10 11 Identify and determine terminal assets and configurations required for mission
153. ages button on the Function Bar or the F4 button on the keyboard The system will display the Message dialog box b Select the Create tab NOTE Default Message Addressing Settings for all the Reports should be set prior to the PCC PCIs Refer to Task 171 147 0005 Apply Message Addressing Features in FBCB2 Version 3 4 c Select the Reports radio button form the Msg Type Field The Reports radio button will highlight NOTE The radio buttons are the diamond shaped boxes under the Msg Type field d Select the Airborne Artillery FCR option from the Message window pane The Airborne Artillery FCR message will highlight e Select the Execute button The system will display the Create Airborne Artillery FCR Template f Select the Outline Tab NOTE All of the fields that are red in color and have an M in front of them are mandatory fields These fields must be completed in order for the message to be sent If the user tries to save or send the message without entering data into the mandatory fields they will get the error message The mandatory field Scan URN is not complete with an OK button All the fields in Black are optional Some Black fields may be mandatory per SOP g Select the M Mission Selection field from the Outline window pane by highlighting the field The Mission Selection in the right window pane will also highlight NOTE The Outline window pane is a quick way of getting to the option that the user wants to enter
154. ages or hazardous conditions HAZCON 5 Ensure supervisors operators return the DCSS to an operational state Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Verified that supervisors ensured that soldiers monitored the DCSS for faulty or degrading conditions 2 Verified that supervisors ensured personnel utilized the appropriate troubleshooting techniques IAW with TMs and equipment 3 Verified that supervisors ensured soldiers isolated the fault 4 Verified that the soldier ensured appropriate headquarters and personnel were notified of extended outages or HAZCON 5 Verified that supervisors ensured that the DCSS was returned to an operational status Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related IDNX MANUAL TM 11 5805 795 13 TM 11 5895 1215 20 TM 11 5895 1346 13 TM 11 5895 1630 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1686 13 TM 11 7025 221 20 TM CQT 6400 IOM 02 19 May 2005 3 79 STP 11 25814 SM TG Direct the Operation of Defense Communications Satellite Subsystem DCSS 113 583 7098 Conditions Given associated DCSS equipment Promina 800 Series Node Configuration Manual Promina 800 Series Operator Interface Promina 800 Series Q
155. ailable in electronic media 30 September 1998 Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management System TAMMS Item only produced in electronic media and included on EM 0001 1 August 1994 Department of Army Visual Information Production and Distribution Program 201 113 0321 B Introduction to Satellite Communications Department of Defense Publications DD FORM 1970 DD FORM 2332 References 12 Motor Equipment Utilization Record Materiel Deficiency Exhibit 19 May 2005 Field Manuals FM 11 43 FM 11 55 FM 21 75 FM 9 43 1 Graphic Training Aids 11 10 14 Other Product Types APPENDIX A 25S APPLICABLE TSO GSD TR 5644 GSD TR 5645 HP MANUAL 02100 90157 HP MANUAL 02109 90015 HP MANUAL 02631 90909 HP MANUAL 02648 90001 HP MANUAL 02648 90002 HP MANUAL 02648 90003 HP MANUAL 07906 90902 HP MANUAL 07906 90903 HP MANUAL 13037 90006 HP MANUAL 13037 90015 IDNX MANUAL PROMINA2 PROMINA3 PROMINA4 5 PROMINA6 SAT REF DATA HANDBOOK Technical Bulletins TB 380 41 Technical Manuals TM 11 5805 795 13 TM 11 5805 802 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1127 10 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG The Signal Leader s Guide 12 June 1995 Mobile Subscriber Equipment MSE Operations This item is included on EM 0205 22 June 1999 Combat Skills of the Soldier Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0205 3 August 1984 Maintenance Operations and Procedures 21 February 1997
156. ainer s guide relates soldier and leader tasks in the MOS and skill level to duty positions and equipment It states where the task is trained how often training should occur to sustain proficiency and who in the unit should be trained As leaders assess and plan training they should rely on the trainer s guide to help identify training needs 1 Leaders conduct and evaluate training based on Army wide training objectives and on the task standards published in the soldier s manual task summaries or in the Reimer Digital Library The task summaries ensure that trainers in every unit and location define task standards the same way and trainers evaluate all soldiers to the same standards 1 4 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG 2 Figure 1 2 shows how battle focused training relates to the trainer s guide and soldier s manual The left column shows the steps involved in training soldiers and the right column shows how the STP supports each of these steps BATTLE FOCUS PROCESS STP SUPPORT PROCESS Select supporting soldier tasks Use TG to relate tasks to METL Conduct training assessment Use TG to define what soldier tasks to assess Determine training objectives Use TG to set objectives Determine strategy plan for training Use TG to relate soldier tasks to strategy Conduct pre execution checks Use SM task summary as source for task performance Execute training conduct after action Use SM task summary as source fo
157. aintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 1 Fixed Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 March 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate DS Maintenance Manual for Medium SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 52 V 1 Fixed Earth Terminal Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 3 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 March 1990 19 May 2005 TM 11 5895 1196 13 8 TM 11 5895 1196 13 9 TM 11 5895 1197 13 1 TM 11 5895 1197 13 10 TM 11 5895 1197 13 11 TM 11 5895 1197 13 3 TM 11 5895 1197 13 4 TM 11 5895 1197 13 5 TM 11 5895 1197 13 6 TM 11 5895 1197 13 7 TM 11 5895 1197 13 8 TM 11 5895 1197 13 9 TM 11 5895 1215 20 TM 11 5895 1223 34 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Operator s Unit and Intermediate DS Maintenance Manual for Medium SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 52 V 1 Fixed Earth Terminal Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 2 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 March 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 1 Fixed Earth Terminal also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 March 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and I
158. al the control cards will already be in place and functioning There will be no need to configure the chassis with control cards The following procedure steps may only be used during operations under unusual conditions 1 Verify that the MIDAS chassis has a Control Processor CP card and Bus Controller card as a minimum 2 If the CP is missing follow replacement instructions outlined in TM 11 5895 1630 13 amp P paragraph 4 19 3 If the Bus Controller card is missing follow replacement instructions outlined in TM 11 5895 1630 13 amp P paragraph 4 22 b Configure the MIDAS chassis with the input output I O cards required to support circuits NOTE The procedure steps below pertain to cards in slots 10 23 and are required to support any addition of circuits 1 Determine type of I O card needed to support user requirements and determine the correct slot for card placement in the chassis The asynchronous transfer mode ATM I O cards can only be placed in slots 20 23 and the ATM Processor cards are limited to slots 16 23 2 Using replacement instructions outlined in TM 11 5895 1630 13 amp P paragraph 4 22 install necessary type and number of I O cards as needed to support user requirements c Configure the MIDAS chassis with function cards required by the applicable TSOs GAA and or cut sheets NOTE The steps below pertain to cards in slots 6 23 and are required to support any additional circuits MIDAS racks with onl
159. al Communications Satellite Subsystem DCSS Subject Area 2 Strategic Satellite Terminal AN GSC 52 V AN GSC 39 V and AN FSC 78 V 113 590 2135 Operate SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 52 V 113 590 2147 Operate SATCOM Terminal AN FSC 78B or AN GSC 39B 113 590 2151 Operate SATCOM Terminal AN FSC 78C AN GSC 39C or AN GSC 52A 113 590 3162 Maintain SATCOM Terminal AN FSC 78B or AN GSC 39B 113 590 3170 Maintain SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 52 V 113 590 3171 Maintain SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 78C AN GSC 39C or AN GSC 52A Subject Area 3 Tactical Satellite Terminals AN TSC 85 V and AN TSC 93 V 113 589 1003 Install SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V 113 589 2008 Operate SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V 113 589 3048 Maintain SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 or AN TSC 93 Subject Area 4 Strategic Satellite Terminal AN TSC 86A 113 590 1005 Install SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 86A 113 590 2047 Operate SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 86A 113 590 3173 Maintain SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 86A Subject Area 5 Strategic Satellite Terminal AN TSC 49 V 113 590 2137 Operate SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 49 V 113 590 3174 Maintain SATCOM terminal AN GSC 49 V Subject Area 8 ASI 1C 113 616 2018 Conduct Electronic Counter Countermeasures ECCM ASI QT 1 4 Network Controller ENC Operations within the Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS 113 616 2022 Conduct Frequency Division Multiple Access FDMA ASI QT 1 4 Network Co
160. al adjustments Performed preoperational checks Performed satellite acquisition Performed satellite tracking Performed uplink carrier alignment Performed uplink carrier level adjustment Performed carrier to noise density ratio check Performed manual switchover Configured terminal equipment for automatic switchover Performed downlink traffic monitoring Perform preoperational checks Follow the appropriate TM procedures for the AN GSC 39B or Perform uplink carrier alignment Follow the appropriate TM procedures for the AN GSC 39B or Perform uplink carrier level adjustment Follow the appropriate TM procedures for the AN GSC 39B 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 11 Performed uplink signal and traffic monitoring 12 Performed terminal equipment selection and status monitoring Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related APPLICABLE TSO TM 11 5895 1531 30 TM 11 5895 1535 12 TM 11 5895 1532 30 TM 11 5895 1533 30 TM 11 5895 1534 30 TM 11 5895 1536 13 TM 11 5895 1537 13 TM 11 5895 1558 13 19 May 2005 3 15 STP 11 25814 SM TG Operate SATCOM Terminal AN FSC 78C AN GSC 39C or AN
161. also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Operator s Manual DSCS III Satellite Configuration Control Element AN FSC 91 V 2 and AN FSC 91X V 2 15 June 1990 Operator s Manual for Multiplexers Demultiplexers TD 1389 P V 1 G and TD 1389 P V 2 G Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 May 1992 Organizational Maintenance Manual for Multiplexers Demultiplexers TD 1389 P V 1 G and TD 1389 P V 2 G Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 May 1992 Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Multiplexers Demultiplexers TD 1389 P V 1 G and TD 1389 P V 2 G 15 May 1992 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Communications Systems AN FSQ 158 V 30 November 1993 Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Communications System AN FSQ 158 V 1 and AN FSQ 158 V 2 Item also produced in electronic media and included
162. ame members d Check side leg assemblies e Check antenna level WARNING The antenna center section is heavy and fragile Special attention must be made to ensure that all portions of the antenna are properly installed secured and mounted on the frame assembly Check the actuators and the protective boots to see if damage occurred during installation 5 Verify siting points a Ensure antenna is on the correct azimuth as shown in the SAA b Ensure antenna is on the correct elevation as shown in the SAA 6 Ensure proper antenna cable installation a Verify that all cables are correctly installed and attached to the antenna and shelter b Verify that the cable messenger strap is installed and supports the weight of cables from the shelter to the antenna 3 62 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps c Verify that the antenna is properly grounded WARNING Care must be taken when checking the waveguide installation Verify that the O ring is present and that the waveguide is properly seated against the interlock sensor Check for cracks and dents in the waveguide Improper installation may inhibit communications cause serious damage to the equipment or result in injury to personnel 7 Verify antenna anchors a Verify that antenna anchors are properly placed b Verify that antenna anchors are properly secured to the antenna 8 Verify proper radiation hazard fence placement a Verify that the hazard fence
163. amic complex situations to execute mission type orders achieving the commander s intent d Training Responsibility Soldier and leader training and development continue in the unit Using the institutional foundation training in organizations and units focuses and hones individual and team skills and knowledge 1 Commander Responsibility a The unit commander is responsible for the wartime readiness of all elements in the formation The commander is therefore the primary trainer of the organization and is responsible for ensuring that all training is conducted in accordance with IAW the STP to the Army standard b Commanders ensure STP standards are met during all training If a soldier fails to meet established standards for identified MOS tasks the soldier must retrain until the tasks are performed to standard Training to standard on MOS tasks is more important than completion of a unit training event such as an ARTEP The objective is to focus on sustaining MOS proficiency this is the critical factor commanders must adhere to when training individual soldiers units 2 NCO Responsibility a A great strength of the US Army is its professional NCO Corps who takes pride in being responsible for the individual training of soldiers crews and small teams The NCO support channel parallels and complements the chain of command It is a channel of communication and supervision from the Command Sergeant Major CSM to the First Se
164. an MTO must be received by the users system from AFATDS to get access to this tab f Select the radio button for the desired option under the Check Fire Cancel Check Fire g h a Select the FIPR button The FIPR dialog box will be displayed b Select the tab that has the message Highlight the MTO Message by selecting it from the list Select the Display button at the bottom of the FIPR dialog box The system will display the Combat Messages dialog box with Fire Mission Tab and Summary Sub Tab selected Select the Check Fire tab The system will display the Check Fire tab group field The radio button will highlight Select the Send button The system will display Message sent at DTG in the message pane Select the Close button The system will return to the FIPR Queue 4 Perform the On Call Fire Cmd function NOTE The On Call Fire Command message is used by friendly units to send Fire commands to the Fire support unit for the Fire mission selected from the Summary tag group An MTO must be received before the On Call Fire Cmd tab can be activated a Select the FIPR button The system will display the FIPR dialog box b Select the Tab that has the mission that you want to call the indirect fires on Select the Mission by highlighting the Originator and DTG of the mission Select the display button The system will display the Combat Messages dialog box with the Fi
165. anual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 19 May 2005 TM 11 5895 1197 13 5 TM 11 5895 1197 13 6 TM 11 5895 1197 13 7 TM 11 5895 1197 13 8 TM 11 5895 1197 13 9 TM 11 5895 1214 10 1 TM 11 5895 1215 10 TM 11 5895 1215 20 TM 11 5895 1215 34 TM 11 5895 1328 13 TM 11 5895 1328 23P TM 11 5895 1338 13 TM 11 5895 1346 13 TM 11 5895 1357 13 1 TM 11 5895 1357 13 2 TM 11 5895 1358 13 1 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item
166. any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related AR 70 1 19 May 2005 3 105 This page intentionally left blank STP 11 25814 SM TG CHAPTER 4 Duty Position Tasks ASI 1C Communications Set AN USC 28 MILSTAR Subject Area 8 ASI 1C Conduct Electronic Counter Countermeasures ECCM Network Controller ENC Operations within the Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS 113 616 2018 Conditions Given the terrestrial critical control circuit TCCC DSCS ECCM Control Subsystem DECS and SATCOM Set AN USC 28 while working as the ENC ina DSCSOC and DISAC 800 70 1 DISAC 800 E70 7 DISAC 800 E70 8 TM 11 5895 1399 13 and TM 11 5895 808 13 1 Standards The ENC demonstrated how to monitor and establish networks performed network analysis and conducted transfer control operations utilizing the TCCC DECS and SATCOM Set AN USC 28 IAW published procedures Performance Steps 1 Prepare operational logs 2 Establish ECCM networks Establish a connection to the AN USC 28 from the central component CC operations terminal Accept the NCB at the CC operations terminal Reconfigure the CSU using the new NCB Enter the mode of entry Verify CSU parameters Verify the COD list Load the KGV 9 cryptographic segments Schedule KGV 9 crypto updates i
167. ar material Shredders are also a supplementary method to speed destruction when necessary Shredded key larger than 1 2mm 0 05 inches wide and 13mm 0 5 inches long or as an alternative 0 73mm 0 03 inches wide and 22 2mm 0 87 inches long are scattered or dispersed over a wide area b Document destroyer kits Use document destroyer kit M4 or other prepared kits for document destruction c Incendiary file destroyer Use incendiary file destroyer ABC M4 Two incendiary file destroyers are required for a four drawer file cabinet d Fuels Use kerosene gasoline and sodium nitrate to expedite burning Use extreme care for personal safety 5 Destruction of COMSEC equipment is the last resort to prevent it from falling into unauthorized hands Destruction is any method that renders the equipment unusable and unrepairable Destruction is accomplished to a degree that logic reconstruction is not possible Do this by removing and destroying the classified assemblies within the equipment including classified printed circuit boards and multilayer boards a Thermite incendiaries provide effective and total destruction not authorized for use within the continental United States except for training purposes b Incinerators are used to destroy printed circuit boards If necessary break up the boards after they are removed from the incinerator c Printed circuit boards may be destroyed by hacking with an ax and scattering the pieces d CRIBs
168. are present go to performance step 14 d If any faults occur go to performance step 2 2 Isolate fault to piece of equipment a Check for alarms on the DCSS equipment If alarms are found go to performance step 3 b Perform loop testing to isolate to individual equipment once isolated go to performance step 3 NOTE Performing loop testing may cause loss of communications Ensure signal flow of each piece of equipment is followed to isolate problems 3 Troubleshoot the DCSS equipment NOTE Not all DCSS locations are equipped with the following DCSS equipment If equipment is not listed reference equipment TM or Manufacturer s Manual If an FCC 100 fault is present go to performance step 4 If a TD 1389 fault is present go to performance step 5 If an SMU fault is present go to performance step 6 If a TD 1337 fault is present go to performance step 7 If a Promina fault is present go to performance step 8 If a MIDAS fault is present go to performance step 9 If an OM 73 fault is present go to performance step 10 If an MD 1352 fault is present go to performance step 11 248 fault is present go to performance step 12 If a Timeplex fault is present go to performance step 13 If an ICC fault is present go to performance step 14 4 Troubleshoot the FCC 100 Refer to TM 11 5805 795 13 Analyze the FCC 100 alarms according to alarm reporting Table 5 2 in TM Perform th
169. at you want the message to go to p Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops Screen 2 Prepare and send a Free Text Message NOTE A Free Text Message is used to send information that is not covered in the other message types in FBCB2 It also is used to send a plain text message a Select the Create tab The Create tab fields will display b Select the Orders Requests radio button The radio button will highlight c Select the Free Text Message from the Message type windowpane The message will be highlighted d Select the Set Default Transmission Settings button The Transmission Settings dialog box will be displayed Select the Settings Tab Enter the Precedence Acknowledgement Retries and Perishability DTG Select the Add Addresses tab Select the Address that you want to send the message to and add it to the right window pane as an action or info address Select the OK button The Apply dialog box will display Select the OK button The system will return back to the Message dialog box with the Free Text Message still highlighted Select the Execute button The system will display the Create Free Text dialog box Type the message that you want to send in the text window pane Select the Save As button The Save As dialog box will be displayed Select the Folder from the Folders window that you want to save the message to or Create a new folder by selecting the Folder text box and
170. ate TM 5 Ensure proper cable patching a Check for proper patching on IF translator patch panel AN TSC 85 V only b Check for proper patching on the modem patch panel Check for proper patching on the OW patch panel AN TSC 85 V only d Check for proper patching on the TSSP patch panel AN TSC 85 V only e Check for proper patching on the data patch panel f Check for proper patching on baseband patch panel g Check for proper patching for the KG 194 6 Verify equipment configuration a Check multiplexer equipment for proper configuration b Check modulators and demodulators for proper configuration c Check upconverters and downconverters for proper configuration d Check the tuning of Klystron tube 7 Verify that the translator system loop test is successful NOTE The translator system loop test should not be performed while tracking the satellite performance step 8 8 Ensure satellite acquisition and tracking a Verify that DCSCU readings for azimuth and elevation are accurate when compared to given azimuth and elevation b Verify that the downconverter that is tuned to the beacon frequency is receiving good signal strength 9 Verify equipment operation a Verify that the group modem if used is operating correctly AN TSC 85 V only b Verify that OW is operational and communications is established with GMF control c Verify that the ring converter and echo suppressor if used are operating correct
171. ation Vkb which is using the Virtual Keyboard Own which is selecting your own location and Name which is selecting from a list of names p Scroll down to the Comments field and select the Edit View button The system will display the Edit View Text dialog box q Type the comments that will transmit with the message The comment will display in the text box r Select the OK button The system will return to the Create LOG Call for Support dialog box s Select the Save As button The system will display the Save As dialog box t Select the Folder that the message will be saved to or create a new folder and then highlight the folder The folder will be highlighted u Select the File text box and type the name that the user wants to call the message v Select the OK button The system will display the Save AS Confirmation dialog box with an OK button w Select the OK button The system will return to the Create LOG Call for Support dialog box NOTE The user can send the message if the Message Addressing settings were completed earlier or the user can select the Message Addressing button and enter the address the same way it was done earlier in the task x Select the Send button The system will display the Message Sent dialog box with an OK button y Select the OK button The system will return to the Create LOG Call for Support dialog box z Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen Performance Meas
172. ault degradation to equipment within the DCSS ensured the operator isolated the faults to the correct piece of equipment Ensured the operator performed the correct troubleshooting procedures on the faulted degraded equipment Ensured the operator correctly troubleshot and restored the FCC 100 IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual Ensured the operator correctly troubleshot and restored the TD 1389 LRM IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual Ensured the operator correctly troubleshot and restored the TD 1337 TSSP IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual Ensured the operator correctly troubleshot and restored the MIDAS IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual Ensured the operator correctly troubleshot and restored the OM 73 IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual Ensured the operator correctly troubleshot and restored the MD 1352 BEM IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual Ensured the operator correctly troubleshot and restored the CQM 248A IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual 11 Ensured the operator correctly troubleshot and restored the Promina IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual 12 Ensured the operator correctly troubleshot and restored the SMU IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual 13 Ensured the operator correctly troubleshot and restored the Timeplex Link2 IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual 14 Ensured the operator correctly troubleshot and restored the ICC IAW a
173. ay 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Maintain SATCOM terminal AN GSC 49 V 113 590 3174 Conditions Given a defective AN GSC 49 V DA PAM 738 750 TM 11 5895 846 14 and DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407 Standards The equipment was operational Performance Steps 1 Identify failed unit using BITE and the FAMU 2 Restore and verify that all communications are correct 3 Troubleshoot the FAMU using BITE and or TMDE CAUTION BeCu tools are required to remove and replace Klystron DANGER HIGH VOLTAGES 4 Troubleshoot the RF HPA using BITE and or TMDE 5 Troubleshoot the HVPS using BITE and or TMDE 6 Troubleshoot the upconverter using BITE and or TMDE 7 Troubleshoot the RF power monitor power density tracker using BITE and or TMDE 8 Troubleshoot the LNA control translator using BITE and or TMDE 9 Troubleshoot the downconverter using BITE and or TMDE 10 Troubleshoot the waveguide and combiner assembly using BITE and or TMDE 11 Troubleshoot the DCSCU using BITE and or TMDE DANGER RF RADIATION HAZARD 12 Troubleshoot the AME using BITE and or TMDE 13 Troubleshoot the line conditioner using BITE and or TMDE DANGER HIGH VOLTAGES 14 Troubleshoot the power distribution using BITE and or TMDE 15 Troubleshoot the frequency standard subgroup using BITE and or TMDE 16 Complete DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407 Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Identified failed unit using BITE and the FAMU 2 Restor
174. ayed on the map 4 Select the Misc tab The system will display the Misc tab group NOTE If the Requester s Call sign and MEDEVAC Voice Net Frequency not entered before attempting to utilize the MEDEVAC Combat message the user will be unable to send a MEDEVAC Combat massage The Data Net Frequency field is a view only field containing the programmed SINCGARS frequency for the Tactical Internet This Frequency will vary from unit to unit The Radio Set ID is a view only field containing the programmed EPLRS radio frequency a Select the Requester s Call Sign text box and type in the Call sign Or select the virtual keyboard and type the call sign in NOTE When typing the call sign it must be at least 17 characters long or it will not accept it If your call sign is only 3 characters then type those 3 characters and hit the space bar 14 more times b Select the MEDEVAC Voice Net Frequency text box and type the frequency Or select the virtual keyboard and type the frequency and select OK NOTE When typing the MEDEVAC Voice Net Frequency it must be at least 8 characters long or it will not accept it If the frequency is only 5 characters long then type the 5 characters and select the space bar 3 more times c Select the apply button NOTE If the entries were entered correctly it would apply them If they were entered incorrectly an error message would appear explaining what the problem is 5 Select the Local Settings tab
175. b files with the diagnostic results for that system The sub files reveal the names of the pertinent devices The devices you should see are Local Area Network LAN used to connect local FBCB2 systems by way of a continuous cable REMOTE DISPLAY which is a remote that can be dismounted Router_1 which is a special purpose computer or software package that transfers data between two or more networks that use the same protocols Routers look at the destination addresses of the information packets and route them to the proper FBCB2 system The FBCB2 uses the INC to perform the duties of the router d Select the sign next to the Router_1 folder or double click the Router_1 folder to open it NOTE Router_1 which is a special purpose computer or software package that transfers data between two or more networks that use the same protocols Routers look at the destination addresses of the information packets and route them to the proper FBCB2 system The FBCB2 uses the INC to perform the duties of the router Router_1_PPP is Point to Point Protocol It allows a computer to use TCP IP Internet protocols A protocol is a definition of how computers will act when talking to each other e Open the R1 SINCGARS folder by selecting the sign or double clicking the folder NOTE R1 SINCGARS1 R1_SINCGARS2 are the radios that are connected to the FBCB2 system The sub components are Interface which is an expansion board within the radio system
176. be sent or saved If you try to send or save the message before the mandatory fields are entered you will get an error message saying The mandatory field Scan URN is not complete with an OK button g Select the first mandatory field Fire Mission Designator by selecting the field name in the Outline windowpane The option will be highlighted as well as the Fire Mission Designator in the right windowpane h Select the Fire Mission Designator pull down arrow The system will display a list of options i Select an option The option will display in the text box NOTE Once the mandatory fields are completed you may send the message You may also select optional fields such as Observer ID or Optional groups such as Target Location and enter the data However if you select an optional group you will have to complete the mandatory fields from within that group j Select the Save As button The system will display the Save As dialog box k Select the Folder text box The cursor will blink in the text box Type the Name you want to call the Folder The name will be displayed in the text box m Select the New Folder button The new folder will be displayed in the Folder s windowpane 5 26 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps n Select the Folder that you created by highlighting it Select the File text box The cursor will be blinking in the text box p Type the name that you want to call the message It will be
177. ce Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Organizational Maintenance Manual for Multiplexers Demultiplexers TD 1389 P V 1 G and TD 1389 P V 2 G Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 May 1992 Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for High Voltage Power Supply PP 7712 V 2 G 15 April 1986 C1 3 References 15 STP 11 25814 SM TG TM 11 5895 1346 13 TM 11 5895 1357 13 1 TM 11 5895 1531 30 TM 11 5895 1532 30 TM 11 5895 1533 30 TM 11 5895 1534 30 TM 11 5895 1535 12 TM 11 5895 1536 13 TM 11 5895 1537 13 TM 11 5895 1544 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1557 30 1 TM 11 5895 1558 13 TM 11 5895 1630 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1686 13 TM 11 5895 808 1 3 1 TM 11 5895 846 14 TM 11 5985 359 13 TM 11 7025 221 10 TM 11 7025 221 20 TM 5 4120 222 14 References 16 Operat
178. check mark in the Pickup Zone Hot text box NOTE If the area is not Hot then do not check this box Hot means that the area has hostiles in the vicinity m Select the MEDAVAC Priority pull down arrow The system will display the MEDAVAC Priority options list n Select and option from the list The system will display the selection in the MEDEVAC Priority text box Select the NBC Contamination pull down arrow if there is any type of contamination in the area The system will display the NBC Contamination option list 19 May 2005 5 5 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps p Make a selection from the option list The selection will display in the NBC Contamination Type text box q Select the Security pull down arrow The system will display the Security option list r Make a selection from the option list The selection will display in the Security text box s Select the Save button if you desire to save the message The system will save the message and display the Message saved to file spot DTG t Select the Send button if you desire to send the message The system will display the Last MEDEVAC message sent with the DTG u Select the Close button when you desire to close the message box The system will close the Combat Messages dialog box 5 Prepare and send a nuclear biological chemical NBC 1 message NOTE NBC 1 is accessed from Combat Msgs button on the Function Bar or the F3 button on the keyboard The Nuclear
179. cludes evaluating individual training conducting an organizational assessment and preparing a training assessment The commander uses his experience feedback from training evaluations and other evaluations and reports to arrive at his assessment Assessment is both the end and the beginning of the training management process Training assessment is more than just training evaluation and encompasses a wide variety of inputs Assessments include such diverse systems as training force integration logistics and personnel and provide the link between the unit s performance and the Army standard Evaluation of training is however a major component of assessment Training evaluations provide the commander with feedback on the demonstrated training proficiency of soldiers leaders battle staffs and units Commanders cannot personally observe all training in their organization and therefore gather feedback from their senior staff officers and NCOs a Evaluation of Training Training evaluations are a critical component of any training assessment Evaluation measures the demonstrated ability of soldiers commanders leaders battle staffs and units against the Army standard Evaluation of training is integral to standards based training 19 May 2005 1 7 STP 11 25814 SM TG and is the cornerstone of leader training and leader development STPs describe standards that must be met for each soldier task 1 All training must be evaluated to meas
180. comes a cross hair d Create the route by clicking a spot on the map where you want the route to start and then continue to click along the route creating waypoints each time the mouse is clicked until you have plotted the route NOTES 1 Notice on the map that the points where you selected when creating the route have checkpoint symbols with the first one highlighted in white You can move to the next waypoint by selecting the right arrow in the Navigation Dialog box 2 If the Navigation dialog box is in front of the route that you created you can move the box by placing the cursor in the dark gray area of the Navigation dialog box and left clicking and holding the button and dragging the box to the side 19 May 2005 5 65 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps e Select the OK button The system will display the Navigation dialog box with the new name in the Route ID text box and all the buttons in the Navigation dialog box are active now 3 Select the Manage button The system will display the Edit Route dialog box NOTE The Manage button allows the user to rename copy or delete a route and modify an existing route The user can rename a route by typing the name in the Name text box and selecting the Rename button The user can delete a route by typing the name of the route that you want to delete in the Name text box and selecting the Delete button The user can copy a route with a new name by typing the new name of the rout
181. cords specific network events to determine if any changes are made that might affect the communications path f Access the Alarm Summary Network Alarm Summary and Node Alarm Summary pages to identify alarms tripped by a network resource failure g Observe the front panel of individual cards for LED indicators of a faulted condition Refer to Table 4 1 in the IDNX Documentation Master Index R13 x3 Theory of Operation and Diagnostics for color descriptions of the LEDs that appear on a front panel h Verify that all inputs are correct and there are no problems with external equipment NOTE At the bottom of each card s front panel is the notation REV meaning Revision This information is important because enhancements to the system software might require the most current cards for complete operational compatibility i Determine the specific card that has failed proceed with loopback procedures as outlined in Chapter 7 of the IDNX Documentation Master Index R13 x3 Theory of Operation and Diagnostics j Enter loop command at the operator interface in cooperation with distant end operator Refer to the Promina 800 Series Operator Interface manual k Replace faulted card Restore communications and monitor Promina network for reliable communications then go to performance step 15 12 Troubleshoot the SMU a Upon any communications failure as indicated by alarm condition and error messages on the operator console begin isolat
182. ct Area 2 Strategic Satellite Terminal AN GSC 52 V AN GSC 39 V and AN FSC 78 V 113 590 2135 Operate SATCOM Terminal 52 3 13 113 590 2147 Operate SATCOM Terminal AN FSC 78B or AN GSC 39B 3 14 113 590 2151 Operate SATCOM Terminal AN FSC 78C AN GSC 39C or AN GSC 52A 3 16 113 590 3162 Maintain SATCOM Terminal AN FSC 78B or AN GSC 39B sess 3 17 113 590 3170 Maintain SATCOM Terminal 52 3 18 113 590 3171 Maintain SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 78C AN GSC 39C or AN GSC 52A 3 20 Subject Area 3 Tactical Satellite Terminals AN TSC 85 V and AN TSC 93 V 113 589 1003 Install SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 V or 93 3 21 113 589 2008 Operate SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 V or 93 3 25 DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION Approved for public release distribution is unlimited This publication supersedes STP 11 31S14 SM TG 01 October 1999 i STP 11 25814 SM TG 113 589 3048 113 590 1005 113 590 2047 113 590 3173 113 590 2137 113 590 3174 113 589 7121 113 589 7122 113 589 7123 113 583 7095 113 583 7096 113 590 7001 113 590 7002 113 590 7003 113 610 7001 113 610 7002 113 623 6014 113 638 6001 113 573 0006 113 573 0013 113 573 2032 113 583 709
183. cted or until all messages are serviced NOTE For card removal and installation procedures refer to Chapter 3 in TM 11 5805 8002 13 amp P h Perform any necessary SMU link loops or testing in cooperation with users and the distant end operator to verify correction of faulted component before placing back into an operational status then go to performance step 15 13 Troubleshoot the Timeplex Refer to the Integrated Connectivity Systems Installation and Maintenance Manual Chapter 8 page 8 1 a Perform a self test of the unit b Record alarm indicator numbers and messages to help isolate the malfunction Refer to troubleshooting procedures in Chapter 8 c Perform loopback procedures Channel and or intermachine link loopbacks to isolate the problem d Implement replacement procedures 1 Check that the supervisory terminal and or supervisor computer are connected and operating All cables are correctly and securely connected 2 Replace the following modules as required according to the Manufacturer s Manual Chapter 9 page 9 1 a Replace modules using IPR cable Replace modules using IPR power cable Replace modules using the IPR switch Replace line termination modules e Replace modules installed on rear of mainframe e Place unit on line then go to performance step 15 14 Troubleshoot the AN USC 64 ICC Refer to TM 11 5895 1686 13 amp P a Analyze alarms and faults on the AN USC 64 ICC IAW Chapter 5 7 Table
184. ctive AN GSC 52 V TMDE and tools as listed in appropriate TMs DA Form 2404 DA Form 2407 DA PAM 738 750 TM 11 5895 1196 13 2 TM 11 5895 1196 13 3 TM 11 5895 1196 13 5 TM 11 5895 1196 13 6 TM 11 5895 1197 13 3 TM 11 5895 1197 13 4 TM 11 5895 1197 13 6 TM 11 5895 1197 13 7 Standards The equipment was operational Performance Steps 1 Oc FB Determine if the subsystems are functioning LNA Transmit Frequency CMA Antenna subsystem OE 37 1 Downconverter Upconverter Keyboard Digital computer CP 1676 G Verify any abnormal symptoms Visually inspect all components and cables Sectionalize localize and or isolate the trouble to the lowest repairable unit LRU Repair by removing replacing or aligning adjusting Test operate the replaced unit Complete DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407 Performance Measures 1 1 o oc A N Determined if the subsystems were functioning Verified the symptom Visually inspected all components and cables Sectionalized localized and or isolated the trouble to the LRU Repaired by removal replacement or alignment adjustment Tested operated the replaced unit Completed DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407 Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong a
185. ctronic media and included on EM 0059 15 December 2000 Operator s Manual for Satellite Communications Terminals AN TSC 93B V 1 and AN TSC 93B V 2 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 NG 15 April 1986 References 13 STP 11 25814 SM TG TM 11 5895 1127 20 TM 11 5895 1127 34 TM 11 5895 1128 10 TM 11 5895 1 128 20 TM 11 5895 1162 10 TM 11 5895 1162 24 1 TM 11 5895 1162 24 2 TM 11 5895 1196 13 2 TM 11 5895 1196 13 3 TM 11 5895 1196 13 4 TM 11 5895 1196 13 5 TM 11 5895 1196 13 6 TM 11 5895 1196 13 7 References 14 Organizational Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminal AN TSC 93A Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 NG 15 April 1986 DS and GS Maintenance Manual for SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 93B V 1 and AN TSC 93B V 2 Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 2 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 NG 1 September 1986 Operator s Manual for SATCOM Terminals AN TSC 85B V 1 and AN TSC 85B V 2 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 NG 15 April 1986 Organizational Maintenance Satellite Communications Terminal AN TSC 85A Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 NG 15 April 1986 Operator s Manual for Satellite Communications Terminals AN GSC 49 V 1 AN GSC 49 V 2 and AN GSC 49 V 3 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 1 September
186. d Echelon fields will display NOTE These functions allow the user to display or hide friendly SA according to their Current Stale or Old settings and Air or Ground units or by Branch or affiliation and by type of Echelon The user can uncheck any field that he or she does not want to see c Select the All button under the Friendly field The all friendly SA will reappear on the map d Select the Select radio button under the Enemy field The Currency Dimension Type and Source of Info fields will appear NOTE The only difference between Friendly and Enemy is Echelon was replaced with Source of Info which allows the user to filter enemy icons based on its source The Three sources are ASAS All Source Analysis System FAAD Forward Area Air Defense and Spot Rprt Spot Report Deselect the check box of the source that the user does not want Users should avoid having both the ASAS and Spot Rprt checked at the same time This can cause a distorted picture because enemy icons may be depicted twice e Select the All radio button under the Enemy field The system will redisplay all the enemy icons f Select the None radio button under the Unknown field Al of the Unidentified icon will disappear off the map g Select the All radio button under the Unknown field The system will display all the unidentified icons h Select the None radio button under the Georef field All of the Geographical references will disappear i Select t
187. d Related DA FORM 2404 DA FORM 2407 DA PAM 738 750 PX19671 REV A PX19672 REV A PX19674 REV B TM 11 5895 1127 20 TM 11 5895 1433 12 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1433 34 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 TM 11 5895 1434 34 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 9 6115 464 12 3 30 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Subject Area 4 Strategic Satellite Terminal AN TSC 86A Install SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 86A 113 590 1005 Conditions Given the requirement to install a transportable satellite terminal at a designated field location and the coordinates of the satellite to be used and TM 11 5895 1162 10 for AN GSC 49 V or TM 11 5895 846 14 for AN TSC 86 V hand tools and materials as required by TM and a team of at least four personnel NOTE Winds must be less than 20 MPH during the antenna assembly phase of the task Standards The transportable satellite terminal established site to site communications with another terminal No damage to equipment or injury to personnel resulted from the performance of this task WARNING To prevent any possible injury to personnel or damage to equipment while performing this task closely follow all warnings and cautions listed in the appropriate TM Performance Steps 1 Select site a Select an area that meets topographical standards as outlined in appropriate TM b Check soil conditions to ensure that it is conducive to proper and effective grounding as well as stability c Ensure that the termi
188. d Tab Select LOG Report under the FBCB2 Tab Select the Execute button Select the Single tab Select the text box under the On Hand Operational Item Count column for the first item Enter the amount that the user has on hand in the text box Select the text box under the Authorized Item Count column Enter the amount that the user is authorized Place the cursor in the text box under the Required Item Count Column for the first item and click the left mouse button 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 11 Select the Save button 12 Select the OK button 13 Select the Rollup Tab 14 Place a checkmark in the checkbox above the user s column next to the word Selected and any column to the right of the user s column 15 Select the Rollup button 16 Select the Rollup Comments button 17 Type a comment that the user wants to send with the keyboard or the virtual keyboard 18 Select the OK button 19 Select the Close button Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 19 May 2005 5 43 STP 11 25814 SM TG EMPLOY MAP FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0017 Conditions Given a vehicle with a
189. d points Cancel to cancel the last action Delete to delete the Start and end point Help to get help on the Line of Sight tool Virtual keyboard to type the coordinates in the Location text box Add which is used to add point if you are using the type mode to enter coordinates Named button which is for selecting pre loaded locations a Select the Apps button from the Function Bar or select the F7 key from the keyboard The system will display the Apps dialog box b Select the Line Of Sight function and select the Execute button The system will display the Select 2 Points function bar on the right side of the map and the cursor as a cross hair c Select a start point on the map by left clicking a spot on the map The system will display a white circle on that point d Select a second point on the map The system will display a blue line connecting both of the points e Select OK The system will remove the function bar and display the Line Of Sight dialog box 5 60 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps NOTE The LOS dialog box displays the range bearing Start location and end location of the line that you selected It also has three push buttons consisting of Close to close the dialog box Profile SHOW that brings up the Profile dialog box and Help f Select the Profile SHOW button The system will display the LOS Profile dialog box on top of the Line Of Sight dialog box NOTE If the LOS dialog box is on t
190. d re entered in standard time NOTE Performance measure 9 in an NCT and ALTNCT function only 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Ensured the operator performed a coordinated ECCM network control transfer IAW the SOP and appropriate TM as required Verified the patching and connectivity of equipment Verified that the operator configured the COMM RT IAW the applicable TM and NCB and that the COMM RT was scheduled Verified that the UTE was configured and operated in the LOW mode Verified that the KG 84 was configured and loaded for LOW network operations Verified that the user communications data was established Verified that the operator made status reports as required by DISA circulars to the NCT as scheduled or requested 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related DISA CIR 800 E70 11 DISA CIR 800 E70 7 DISA CIR 800 E70 8 DISA CIR 800 E70 9 NCB TM 11 5895 1179 13 TM 11 5895 808 13 1 TM 11 5895 808 13 10 UNIT SOP 19 May 2005 3 67 STP 11 25814 SM TG Supervise the Maintenance of Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V 113 610 7002 Conditions Given an AN USC 28 V NCB SECRET keying material SECRET KAO 184A TSEC KYK 13
191. data h Select the Mission Selection pull down arrow in the right window pane The options will be displayed i Select an option from the list The option will be displayed in the text box 5 22 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps Select a Unit Name from the list or type it in the search text box to find the Unit then select it p q Select the mandatory field Scan URN from the Outline tab The option will highlight in the Outline window pane as well as the right window pane Select the pull down arrow The system will display the Unit Name dialog box from the list The Unit name will be displayed in the text box Select the mandatory field Scan Time from the Outline window pane Select the Scan Time DTG button The DTG Keypad dialog box will be displayed Select the or buttons to increase or decrease the Day Hour and Minute or select the NOW button and OK button Select the mandatory field Location from the Outline window pane Select the Location pull down arrow The system will display the Location menu NOTE This function allows the user to enter the location using the Keyboard Kbd Laser Range Finder LRF Map by using the mouse pointer Map Virtual Keyboard Vkb The user s location Own A named location from a list Name r 5 t V Select an option from the list The option is displayed in the text box Select the mandatory field Altitude from
192. dier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related DA PAM 738 750 CPS2L3 DISAC 310 70 1 CPS2L4 TM 11 5805 1105 12 amp P CPS2L5 4 32 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Subject Area 10 Communications Set AN USC 28 V Operate Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V 113 610 2046 Conditions Given an AN USC 28 V TMDE and tools as required by DISA circulars DISAC 800 E70 7 for the NCT DISAC 800 E70 8 for the ALTNCT DISAC 800 E70 9 for the NT and DISAC 800 E70 11 for AN GSC 49 terminals TM 11 5895 808 13 1 through TM 11 5895 808 13 11 and TM 11 5895 808 23P and JS test set recommended for the characterization test SECURITY NOTE The E70 series DISA circulars and test results are classified SECRET NOTE The site configuration determines which DISA circular is required Standards The equipment was operational and the data was recorded and forwarded to the appropriate authorities Performance Steps 1 Power on the AN USC 28 V IAW procedures outlined in the applicable TM 2 Load the program disc IAW procedures outlined in the applicable TM 3 Perform the initialization procedures IAW the applicable TM NOTE Performance steps 4 through 10 pertain to configuration and operation of the CSU 4 Configure the CSU as a NCT or NT as applicable 5 Configure the UTE
193. dress that needs to be added Select the Add Addresses pull down arrow under the Addresses tab name The system will display Action Addresses and Info Addresses NOTE Action addresses are addresses that need to respond in some way Info Addresses are addresses that are getting the message as information and do not include an acknowledgement The default is Action Addresses p Select either Action or Info addresses The option will highlight and appear in the Add Addresses text box NOTE An address cannot exist in Action Addresses and Information Addresses simultaneously q Select the Apply button The system will apply the entries and keep the dialog box open r Select the close button The system will return to the Messages dialog box 2 Create Address Groups NOTE Each platform has several predefined user address groups The platform s role determines which groups exist and the addresses in each group The address groups consist of groups that the platform belongs to by doctrine groups that the platform s echelon owns and groups that that the platform s parent organization owns This does not prevent the operator from generating additional groups to fit specific needs The operator has the ability to add or delete an address or delete an entire group a Select the Create tab b Select the Edit Address Groups button The Edit Address Groups dialog box displays NOTE The following functions are New Group Adds a new
194. dulators and demodulators Configured upconverters and downconverters Tuned Klystron 7 Operated crypto equipment a Obtained signed for COMSEC key from COMSEC vault or appropriate facility b Loaded fill devices KOI 18 KYK 15 or KYK 13 with new key c Loaded new COMSEC key into secure sets KY 57 and KG 194 d Maintained positive COMSEC control and records 8 Performed translator system loop test 3 26 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures G NO GO 9 Acquired the satellite a Compared DCSCU readings for azimuth and elevation to given azimuth and elevation b Selected and tuned the tracking downconverter to the beacon frequency c Used the DCSCU to slew antenna until maximum receive signal was achieved d Placed the DCSCU into Auto Track mode Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related 19671 REV 19672 REV PX19674 REV B TM 11 5895 1433 12 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1433 34 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 TM 11 5895 1434 34 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 9 6115 464 12 UNIT SOP 19 May 2005 3 27 STP 11 25814 SM TG Maintain SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 or AN TSC 9
195. e Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related TM 11 5895 1196 13 2 TM 11 5895 1196 13 3 TM 11 5895 1196 13 4 TM 11 5895 1196 13 5 TM 11 5895 1196 13 6 TM 11 5895 1196 13 7 TM 11 5895 1196 13 8 TM 11 5895 1196 13 9 TM 11 5895 1197 13 1 TM 11 5895 1197 13 10 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG References Required Related TM 11 5895 1197 13 11 TM 11 5895 1197 13 3 TM 11 5895 1197 13 4 TM 11 5895 1197 13 5 TM 11 5895 1197 13 6 TM 11 5895 1197 13 7 TM 11 5895 1197 13 8 TM 11 5895 1197 13 9 TM 11 5895 1531 30 TM 11 5895 1532 30 TM 11 5895 1533 30 TM 11 5895 1534 30 TM 11 5895 1535 12 TM 11 5895 1536 13 TM 11 5895 846 14 UNIT SOP 19 May 2005 3 61 STP 11 25814 SM TG Supervise the Installation of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 86 113 590 7003 Conditions Given a tactical SATCOM terminal AN TSC 86 V antenna group AS 3036 TSC generator set PU 405A predetermined site location predetermined azimuth and elevation TB 43 0129 TM 9 6115 464 12 and TM 11 5895 846 14 Standards Supervised the installation of the AN TSC 86 V within 1 hour and 30 minutes IAW appropriate manuals and SOP and observed and implemented all safety requirements listed in TB 43 0129 Performance Steps 1 Verify site selectio
196. e The message will not send unless these fields are completed Unit SOPs may require more fields to be completed There is a short cut the user can use to quickly get to the field to enter data By selecting the field in the Outline tab it will highlight the text box for the field that was selected The user can now enter the data for that field f Select the Request Type pull down arrow The system will display the available options 19 May 2005 5 33 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps g Select the desired option The option will display in the text box h Select the Action pull down arrow The system will display the available options i Select the desired option The option will be displayed in the text box j Select the Supporting Unit pull down arrow The system displays the Unit Name dialog box k Select the Name of the Unit that needs the support The Unit Name will display in the text box l Select the Point of Contact pull down arrow The Unit Name dialog box will display m Select the Name of the Unit that was selected in the Supporting Unit text box The Unit name will display in the text box n Select the Mission Location pull down arrow The available options will display o Select the desired option The option will display in the text box NOTE If available options are Map which is selecting a location on the map LRF which is using a Laser Range Finder Kbd which is using the Keyboard to enter the loc
197. e and echelon Additionally it loads unloads and displays overlays This function also provides the user with the capability to monitor Geo references and to filter overlays The Unit Standard Operating Procedures SOP determines filter use Before this task can be completed one or more of the following types of messages must be sent to the user s system first Spot Report Obstacle Report Bridge Report Position Report and NBC1 Report An Obstacle Overlay and one of any other type of Overlay should also be sent to the user s system These reports generate the graphical images necessary to use all the Filter functions Once the Messages and Overlays have been received they must be saved to the user s system Once the messages have been saved the overlays can be displayed by opening the overlays and check the Keep Overlay displayed check box 1 Select the Filters button on the Function bar or the F2 button on the keyboard The system will display the Filters dialog box NOTE The Filters function permit the user to view or filter out friendly and enemy platforms or units according to currency dimension unit type and echelon Additionally it loads unloads and displays overlays This function also provides the user with the capability to monitor Geo references and to filter overlays The Unit Standard Operating Procedures SOP determines filter use The Filters dialog box contains four tabs SA Situational Awareness Collapse Expand
198. e Addressing settings have been set Standards As a minimum you must prepare and send one each of the following reports Airborne Artillery Personnel Status Report and a Free text message All mandatory fields must be completed Performance Steps NOTE The Airborne Artillery FCR Bridge Report Chemical Downwind Report Contact Report Effective Downwind Message Engagement Report Initial Airborne Artillery FCR Land Minefield Laying Report Medical SITREP Mortuary Affairs NBC3 NBC4 Obstacle Report Position Report and Supply Point Status Report are all done the same as the Airborne Artillery FCR For LOG Report refer to task 171 147 0004 Prepare Send a Platoon Logistical Status Reports Using FBCB2 Version 3 4 and task 171 147 0015 Prepare Send a Vehicle Logistical Status Reports Using FBCB2 Version 3 4 The Land Route is done the same as task 171 147 0023 Employ NAV Functions Using FBCB2 Version 3 4 NBC1 is done the same as task 171 147 0001step 5 Prepare Send Combat Messages Using FBCB2 Version 3 4 The Personnel Status Report is done the same as task 171 147 0022 sub step f Employ Apps Functions Using FBCB2 Version 3 4 The Situation Report is done the same as task 171 147 0001 step 7 Prepare Send Combat Messages Using FBCB2 Version 3 4 The Spot Report is done the same as task 171 147 0001 step 2 Prepare Send Combat Messages Using FBCB2 Version 3 4 1 Prepare and send an Airborne Artillery FCR Report a Select the Mess
199. e Center assigned switch classmarks Additional Skill Identifier alarm status indicator Advanced System Improvement Plan or Program Glossary 1 STP 11 25814 SM TG ATM ATTN attn BA BCIS Bde BITE BNCOC BRIL BW C KT C2 C3 CADRG CB ccc cco CFF CIC CIK CMA CMD COD COML COMM COMM RIT COMSEC CONUS CP Glossary 2 Asynchronous Transfer Mode Adobe Type Manager attention biannually frequency code Battlefield Combat Identification System Brigade built in test equipment Basic Noncommissioned Officer Course basic required items list Biweekly frequency code carrier to noise density ratio command and control command control and communications Compressed Arc Digital Raster Graphic circuit breaker chemical biological common battery citizens band common base transistor color bars critical control circuit circuit control officer call for fire console in control crypto cryptographic ignition key control monitor and alarm command color monitor device code of the day commercial communications communications receiver transmitter communications security Continental United States control processor Command Post 19 May 2005 CPU CSM 55 5 CSU CT CTC CTIL DA DA Form DA PAM DASA DCSCU DCSS DD Form DECS DIBTS DISA DISAC DMD DMS DMT DNPS DOR DOSS DSCS DSCSOC DTED DTG 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG central processing unit Command Sergea
200. e Command and End of Mission tabs are grayed out These tabs only become active when a Fire Mission is approved by the Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System AFATDS c Select the CFF tab to access the Call For Fire message template d Select the Type of Mission pull down arrow Select an option from the list The system will display the Type of Mission in the Type of Mission text box e Select the equipment pull down arrow The system will display the equipment options list Select an option from the list The system displays the selection in the Equipment text box g Enter the quantity by selecting the or button for the amount of equipment that the user observes or select the text box and enter the amount with the keyboard The system will display the amount in the text box h Select the Map button The Combat Messages dialog box will disappear and the mouse cursor will be replaced with the cross hair Select the location on the map where the target is observed The Combat Messages dialog box reappears and displays the location in the Target Location text box j Select the Fill LRF button The system will input the location provided by the laser range finder LRF NOTE The LRF button only works with vehicles equipped with a Laser Range Finder Select the Protection Level pull down arrow The system will display the Protection Level options list Select an option from the list The system displays the select
201. e FCC 100 off line built in test equipment BITE test Chapter 5 9 5 2 in TM Follow the FCC 100 troubleshooting flowchart Chapter 5 9 5 3 and Chapter 6 6 in TM Replace failed FCC 100 circuit card module Chapter 5 13 in TM Return the FCC 100 to a proper operating condition reo b 5 Troubleshoot the TD 1389 LRM Refer to TM 11 5895 1215 20 unless otherwise indicated a Analyze the TD 1389 BITE diagnostic messages shown on the display Chapter 2 17 in TM 1 Line 1 alarm classification 2 Line 2 fault localization b Follow the TD 1389 Operator s Troubleshooting Flowchart Refer to TM 11 5895 1215 10 Chapter 3 3 and TM 11 5895 1215 20 page 2 15 c Replace the TD 1389 user card Refer to TM 11 5895 1215 20 Chapter 2 21 d Return the TD 1389 equipment to a proper operating condition 3 8 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 6 Troubleshoot the TD 1337 TSSP a Use the TD 1337 alarm recall display to further isolate malfunctioning components Refer to TM 11 7025 221 10 Chapter 2 21 and TM 11 7025 221 20 Chapter 2 14 b Follow the TD 1337 troubleshooting flowchart Refer to TM 11 7025 221 10 paragraph 3 2 c Perform TD 1337 plug in card replacement instructions Refer to TM 11 7025 221 20 Chapter 2 18 d Return the TD 1337 equipment to a proper operating condition 7 Troubleshoot the MIDAS Refer to TM 11 58995 1630 138P a Select MIDAS Ex
202. e OFF 0 button for two seconds PLGR displays Unit Turning OFF in seconds to cancel OFF quick off 3 Perform SINCGARS ASIP shutdown a Place the function switch to STBY or OFF SOP SINCGARS display goes blank i e dark 19 May 2005 5 37 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 4 Perform INC shutdown a At the VAA set the CB1 POWER toggle switch to OFF i e down position The DS1 green POWER light goes off 5 Perform EPLRS shutdown a Turn POWER switch to the OFF position Green POWER indicator LED goes off Performance Measures 1 Perform AN UYK 128 V computer shutdown 2 Perform PLGR shutdown 3 Perform SINCGARS ASIP shutdown 4 Perform INC shutdown 5 Perform EPLRS shutdown GO NOGO Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG PERFORM DURING OPERATIONS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES ON FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0013 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system with software version 3 4 loaded and TM 11 7010 326 10 The Before checks have been completed Standards As a minimum you must Perform the During Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services on the FBCB2 system in sequence with the TM The Before checks hav
203. e Steps NOTE Messages of each precedence must be received in the FIPR Queue before this task can be accomplished 1 Select the FIPR flash immediate priority routine button on the Function bar The system will display the FIPR dialog box NOTES 1 The FIPR button allows the user to check messages that the system receives An audible alarm of short duration alerts the user to incoming messages The number at the end of the FIPR button represents the total number of messages in the queue The system ranks messages by precedence as set by VMF variable message format A black exclamation mark highlighted in yellow on the FIPR button informs the user that one or more warning messages are on the queue A black plus mark highlighted in yellow informs the user that an operator response is requested 2 There are six buttons on the FIPR Queue no matter what tab the user is in The Display button which allows the user to display the message the Delete button which allows the user to delete the message that is highlighted the Delete All in Tab which allows the user to delete all messages in the tab that is selected the Refresh button which allows the user to refresh the FIPR queue if a message arrived while viewing other messages which is indicated by a black flag highlighted in yellow the Close button which closes the FIPR Queue and the Help button which allows the user to get help on the FIPR function 19 May 2005 5 49
204. e been completed Performance Steps 1 Verify that the green LEDs are illuminated for PWR Power DISP Display and CPU Processor Unit on the DU Controls and Indicators Panel NOTE Equipment is not fully mission capable if any red LED remains continuously lit when operating Shutdown the AN UYK 128 V immediately Perform Troubleshooting procedures The red and or amber LEDs may Illuminate briefly during initial power application 2 Verify that the Local Comm status is G green which is the first gumball from the left on the Classification Status Bar on the FBCB2 Ops Main screen NOTE The equipment is degraded if Local Comm status gumball is A Amber Status is Unknown if gumball is W White 3 Verify that the Global Positioning System GPS status is G green on the FBCB2 Ops Main screen which is the second gumball from the left on the Classification Status Bar NOTE The equipment is degraded if GPS status gumball is R red or A amber Status is Unknown if gumball is W white 4 If so equipped verify that the Battlefield Combat Identification System BCIS status is green on the FBCB2 Ops Main screen NOTE The Equipment is degraded if BCIS status gumball is R red or A amber which is the third gumball from the left on the Classification Status Bar Status is Unknown if gumball is white Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Verify that the green LEDs are illuminated for PWR
205. e in the Name text box and selecting the Copy button a Select the Map button The system will display the Edit Route function bar with the route highlighted in blue with a white circle on waypoint one NOTE If the user wanted to modify a different route then the one they are currently on then they would have to go back to the Navigation dialog box and select the route from the pull down arrow then select the Manage button b Place the cursor on a spot on the map after the last way point and left click the mouse The system will add a waypoint to the existing route c Select the Delete button The system will delete the last waypoint NOTE Every time the user clicks on the map a new waypoint is added If the user makes a mistake they can select the delete button and delete the last waypoint d Select the OK button when finished with the modification The system will display the Edit Route dialog box 4 Select the List button The system will display the Edit waypoints dialog box with all the way points in the Way point List text box that you created earlier NOTE The List button allows the user to delete a single waypoint delete all waypoints from the list or add additional waypoints to the list Notice that some of the buttons are not active until a waypoint is selected for deletion or a waypoint is entered in the Enter Way point text box a Select the last waypoint in the list The waypoint will be highlighted b Select the
206. e leaders as a result of the bottom up feed from internal training meetings identify and select the individual tasks necessary to support the identified training objectives Commanders develop the tentative plan to include requirements for preparatory training concurrent training and training resources At a minimum the training plan should include confirmation of training areas and locations training ammunition allocations training simulations and simulators availability transportation requirements soldier support items a risk management analysis assignment of responsibility for the training designation of trainers responsible for approved training and final coordination The time and other necessary resources for retraining must also be an integral part of the original training plan 2 Leaders trainers and evaluators are identified trained to standard and rehearsed prior to the conduct of the training Leaders and trainers are coached on how to train given time to prepare and rehearsed so that training will be challenging and doctrinally correct Commanders ensure that trainers and evaluators are not only tactically and technically competent on their training tasks but also understand how the training relates to the organization s METL Properly prepared trainers evaluators and leaders project confidence and enthusiasm to those being trained Trainer and leader training is a critical event in the preparation phase of training These i
207. e tab NOTE Complete steps 6 through 12 for each item in the CTIL 13 Select the Roll up Tab The system will display the Roll up tab group with the quantities entered in the Single tab 14 Place a checkmark in the checkbox above the user s column next to the word Selected and any column to the right of the user s column NOTE Before selecting the Roll up button ensure that the Selected Checkbox above the Roll up column are check marked and all the columns to the right of the user s column to include the user s column are check marked 15 16 17 18 Select the Roll up button The system will roll up all the quantities for all the columns into the Roll up column Select the Roll up Comments button The system will display the Comments dialog box Type a comment that the user wants to send with the keyboard or the virtual keyboard Select the OK button The system will return to the Roll up tab with a checkmark on the Roll up Comments button NOTE If the LOG Report needs to be sent higher then the user would check the Redisplay button if there was a Black flag highlighted in yellow to update the Log Report Roll up the new data and send it to higher 19 Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen Performance Measures 1 O a A N N Select the Apps button from the Function bar or select the F7 button from the keyboard Select the FBCB2 tab which should be the Defaulte
208. ecord dialog box Or Select OK which will complete the record and return to the Personnel Status Report dialog box NOTE Continue to do this until you have a record for all the personnel v Modify a Personnel Status Report w Select a record from the list on the Personnel Status Report dialog box The record will highlight x Select the Modify button The system will display the Modify Personnel Record s dialog box Select the field that you want to edit or modify and make the changes Select the OK button The system will make the changes and display the Personnel Status Report dialog box aa Select the Send button to send the Report to the address that you entered in the Message addressing settings The system will display a Personnel Report Sent dialog box stating that THE Personnel Report was Sent ab Select the OK button The system will return to the Personnel Status Report dialog box ac Select the Close button The system will display the Ops screen N lt 19 May 2005 5 63 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 5 Perform the Radio Net Join function NOTE DO NOT select a new Network unless you intend to switch Networks because this function will reboot the computer and assume the new Network The Radio Net Join function allows the user to re configure the communication subsystems on their own platform Radio Net Join will automatically re configure the FBCB2 database INC router SINCGARS ASIP and EPLRS Thi
209. ed and verified that all communications were correct 3 Troubleshot the FAMU using BITE and or TMDE CAUTION BeCu tools are required to remove and replace Klystron DANGER HIGH VOLTAGES 4 Troubleshot the RF HPA using BITE and or TMDE 19 2005 3 39 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures 5 Troubleshot the HVPS using BITE and or TMDE 6 Troubleshot the upconverter using BITE and or TMDE 7 Troubleshot the RF power monitor power density tracker using BITE and or TMDE 8 Troubleshot the LNA control translator using BITE and or TMDE 9 Troubleshot the downconverter using BITE and or TMDE 10 Troubleshot the waveguide and combiner assembly using BITE and or TMDE 11 Troubleshot the DCSCU using BITE and or TMDE DANGER RF RADIATION HAZARD 12 Troubleshot the AME using BITE and or TMDE 13 Troubleshot the line conditioner using BITE and or TMDE DANGER HIGH VOLTAGES 14 Troubleshot the power distribution using BITE and or TMDE 15 Troubleshot the frequency standard subgroup using BITE and or TMDE 16 Complete DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407 Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related DA FORM 2404 TM 11 5895 1162 10 DA
210. elect the SSN text box and enter the Social Security Number NOTE You do not have to enter the dashes in the Social Security Number The numbers will automatically move to the proper digit Select the Nationality pull down arrow and select the Nationality of the person that the user is entering the information for The Nationality will display in the text box m Select the Religion pull down arrow and select the Religion of the person n Select the proper radio button either Male or Female for the person you entering information on The radio button will highlight o Select the Blood Type pull down arrow and select the Blood type for the person you entering information about NOTE You must select the Whole Blood type not the Platelet type p Select the Unit Name pull down arrow and select the Unit that the person is in by highlighting the unit or by typing in the unit in the text box and selecting the search button NOTE You must enter the Unit name exactly as it is displayed on the computer or it will not find the unit in the list q Select the Role ID pull down arrow and select the Role ID from the list r Select the Grade pull down arrow and select the grade of the person s Select the MOS pull down arrow and select the MOS of the person t Select the Status pull down arrow and select what the persons status is from the list u Select the Apply button to apply the new record The system will display a new Add Personnel R
211. elected in sub step a then the LOG Report dialog box will display c Select the Close button for the message that was displayed The system will return to the FIPR Queue on the same tab that the user was on 3 Select the Immediate tab when you want to read an immediate second highest precedence message NOTE The system displays the exact same dialog box except that you are in the Immediate tab now All functions are the same for each of the tabs except for the Warnings Tab a Select the message from the list by left clicking it with the mouse pointer The message will highlight b Select the Display button The dialog box for the type of message that was selected will display c Select the Close button for the message that was displayed The system will return to the FIPR Queue on the same tab that the user was on 4 Select Priority tab when you want to read a priority third highest precedence message a Select the message from the list by left clicking it with the mouse pointer The message will highlight b Select the Display button The dialog box for the type of message that was selected will display c Select the Close button for the message that was displayed The system will return to the FIPR Queue on the same tab that the user was on 5 Select the Routine tab when you want to read a routine lowest precedence message a Select the message from the list by left clicking it with the mouse pointer The message will
212. eminders function 4 Perform Personnel Status Report 5 Perform the Radio Net Join function Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 5 64 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG EMPLOY NAV FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0023 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system with software version 3 4 loaded precision lightweight global positioning system receiver PLGR enhanced position location radio system EPLRS if equipped and single channel ground air radio system SINCGARS with Internet controller INC Standards As a minimum you must Employ screen operations functions to manage and exchange information to include Creating a route reversing the way points setting Route Attributes and Analyze Route settings Editing a route Center on a route Apply the Roll over Mode turn on the Driver s display and Select a Single point to navigate to Performance Steps 1 Select the NAV button The system will display the Navigation dialog box NOTE The Navigation function allows the user to create a new Route of March ROM select and edit a previously created ROM reverse the direction of march on a selected route set route attributes analyze a route center
213. enance Manual for Echo Suppressor MX 9635 TSC and MX 9635A TSC Reprinted w Basic Incl C 1 3 30 August 1979 Operator s Organization Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminal AN TSC 86 13 May 1983 Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual Satellite Communication Terminal AN FSC 78 V Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 2 25 September 1978 Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Antenna and Microwave Equipment Including Feed Assembly AS 2941 FSC Dehumidifier Desiccant Electric HD 988 G for Satellite Communication Terminals Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 2 8 September 1978 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Antenna AS 3199 TSC Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 3 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 2 June 1981 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Quick Reaction Satellite Antenna Group Single Carrier Feed OE 361 V 1 G and Multiple Carrier Feed OE 361 V 2 G Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 2 15 October 1988 Antenna Groups OE 170E V 1 FSC OE 170E V 2 FSC OE 170E V 3 FSC OE 170E V 4 FSC and OE 215A FSC Operator s Manual for Multiplexer Digital TD 1337 V 1 G TD 1337 V 2 G TD 1337 V 3 G and TD 1337 V 4 G Item also produced in electronic media 20 August 1982 Organizational Maintenance Manual for Multiplexers Digital TD 1337 V 1 G Through TD 1337 V 4 G Item also
214. enarios 7 Annotate changes in the database log e Perform an SCCE inter site data transfer 1 Retrieve scenario from the control account 2 Perform DNPS processing 3 Review scenario 4 Retrieve required reports 5 Prepare select configuration data 9 Perform DASA operations 10 Perform DIMS operations a Download disseminate ODB to the DASA with the DIMS 1 Verify ODB is ready for downloading Retrieve the ODB from the control account Perform DNPS processing Review scenario for supportability Logon to the DIMS from a VXT terminal Create a future ODB FODB FODB verification and ODB comparison FODB to ODB transition in preparation for dissemination Configure the RFIS Enable the DOSS DASA link ODB to DASA dissemination Performance Measures GO 1 Prepared operational logs Established networks Maintained networks Performed DSCS satellite and network analysis Controlled transfer operations Identified control hierarchy Performed SMCT II operations Performed DOSS operations Performed DASA operations N O A N Performed DIMS operations Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the
215. ences 11 STP 11 25814 SM TG SUBCOURSE AG 0404 SUBCOURSE AG 0409 Army Regulations AR 380 15 AR 380 5 AR 385 10 AR 385 40 AR 750 1 Department of Army Forms DA FORM 2402 DA FORM 2405 DA FORM 2406 DA FORM 2407 DA FORM 2407 1 DA FORM 5164 R Department of Army Pamphlets DA PAM 25 40 DA PAM 351 20 DA PAM 710 2 2 DA PAM 738 750 The Army Functional Files System Freedom of Information and Privacy Acts Safeguarding Classified NATO Information U 1 March 1984 Department of the Army Information Security Program Item only produced in electronic media and included 0001 29 September 2000 The Army Safety Program 23 May 1988 Accident Reporting and Records 1 November 1994 Army Materiel Maintenance Policy and Retail Maintenance Operations Only available in electronic media on EM 0001 1 August 1994 Exchange Tag Only available in electronic media Maintenance Request Register Only available in electronic media Materiel Condition Status Report Available through normal publishing channels and included on 0001 Maintenance Request Maintenance Request Continuation Sheet Hands On Evaluation LRA This item is included on EM 0001 Administrative Publications Action Officers Guide Item only produced in electronic media and included on EM 0001 30 April 2002 Army Correspondence Course Program Catalog 1 October 1999 Supply Support Activity Supply System Manual Procedures Only av
216. ency 4 Remove the NT jamming the receive OW 5 Restore receive OW frequency Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Prepared operational logs 2 Established GMFSC networks 3 Maintained GMFSC networks Performed GMFSC network analysis Performed GMFSC control transfer operations Identified control hierarchy 4 5 6 7 Performed TCCC operations 8 Performed DOSS operations 9 Performed DASA operations 0 Performed GNCC operations 11 Performed FMOW operations 12 Performed ITOS operations 19 May 2005 4 17 STP 11 25814 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related ASC 1 DISA CIR 800 70 1 GNCC USERS MANUAL ITOS O amp M MANUAL TM 11 5895 1188 12 4 18 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Conduct Ancillary Equipment Operations within a Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS Operations Center DSCSOC 113 616 2030 Conditions Given RFIS Frequency Conversion Subsystem FCS and Patch and Test Facility PTF in a DSCSOC and TM 11 5895 1328 13 TM 11 5895 1328 23P TM 11 5895 1338 13 and TM 11 5
217. ensure that the card is installed and recognized by the IDNX software 4 Modify the card via the operator interface and configure according to parameters outlined in the TSO d Configure Promina trunk cards if required e Enable Promina ports port cards trunk cards and voice compression if required Refer to the Promina 800 Series Operator Interface Manual Chapter 4 Operator Interface Commands 1 Activate ports 2 Enable the port via the operator interface 3 Activate the port via the operator interface 4 Activate port card 5 Enable the card via the operator interface to verify configuration and external equipment 6 After verifying external equipment and card configuration activate the card via the operator interface f Verify establishment of the Promina link Refer to the Promina 800 Series Operator Interface Manual Chapter 4 Operator Interface Commands 1 Query trunk cards and the link 2 Query the trunk card via the operator interface NOTE For the trunk module to activate the operator must verify that the following parameters are configured compatibly on both sides of the link Neighbor node Trunk attributes and Encryption Fiber Satellite Terrestrial set identically 3 Query the link NOTE The configuration of the destination port is available only when the link is up and a destination port is defined g Perform Promina loopback testing across the configured circuits Refer t
218. epair and return to an operational condition d Complete DA Form 5988 E and DA Form 2407 3 Maintain the FCS AN FSQ 158 V a Troubleshoot the FCS to the LRU b Remove and replace the LRU c Verify repair and return to an operational condition d Complete DA Form 5988 E and DA Form 2407 4 Maintain the PTF AN FSC 160 V a Identify faulty unit and reconfigure the PTF to restore communications to an operational condition Troubleshoot failed unit to the LRU Remove and replace the LRU Verify repair and return to an operational condition Complete DA Form 5988 E and DA Form 2407 5 Maintain the SATCOM Set AN USC 28 a Troubleshoot the AN USM 28 to the LRU b Remove and replace the LRU c Verify repair and return to an operational condition d Complete DA Form 5988 E and DA Form 2407 6 Maintain the RT Group OW OZ 52 G a Troubleshoot the OZ 52 G to the LRU b Remove and replace the LRU c Verify repair and return to an operational condition d Complete DA Form 5988 E and DA Form 2407 7 Maintain the ITOS a Troubleshoot the ITOS to the LRU b Remove and replace the LRU c Verify repair and return to an operational condition d Complete DA Form 5988 E and DA Form 2407 19 2005 4 21 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures 1 1 A Maintained the Satellite Monitoring System DFCS NCT AN FSC 96 Maintained the RFIS AN FSQ 150 Maintained the FCS AN FSQ
219. eptember 1990 The Army Records Information Management System ARIMS Item only produced in electronic media and included on EM 0001 18 March 2003 The Department of the Army Freedom of Information Act Program Only available in electronic media 14 April 1997 Authorized Abbreviations and Brevity Codes 15 November 1985 Policy for Safeguarding and Controlling Communications Security COMSEC Material U 30 June 2000 Department of the Army Information Security Program Item only produced in electronic media and included 0001 29 September 2000 Fire and Emergency Services 10 September 1997 Army Acquisition Policy Item only produced in electronic media and included on EM 0001 15 December 1997 Requisition and issue of supplies and equipment Requisition Receipt and Issue System 15 November 1995 Request for Establishment of a Publications Account LRA Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0001 Requisition for Publications and Blank Forms This form is for local use only Do not use for requisitions to US Army Publications Item only produced in electronic media and included on EM 0001 Requisition for Publications and Blank Forms continuation sheet This form is for local use only Do not use for requisitions to US Army AG Publications Centers Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0001 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms Item only produced in electro
220. er headquarters c Coordinate with applicable section for technical assistance when needed d Prepare DD Form 314 Specify duties and responsibilities for personnel performing PM Establish SOP a Establish SOP for ordering repair parts b Establish SOP for ordering supplies c Establish SOP for use of tools and TMDE d Establish SOP for performance of PM Observe assist train personnel in performing PM a Ensure correct procedures are followed b Ensure correct level of PM is performed c Assist personnel during PMCS d Train personnel in conducting PM Evaluate PM performed a Check maintenance forms Refer to DA PAM 738 750 b Check prescribed load list PLL usage Refer to DA PAM 710 2 1 c Check equipment logbook for accuracy d Check readiness report Initiate evaluate corrective actions PM update Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Scheduled PM NES mk a amp o N Determined maintenance requirements Specified duties and responsibilities for personnel performing PM Established SOP Observed assisted trained personnel in performing PM 3 70 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 6 Evaluated PM performed 7 Initiated evaluated corrective actions PM update Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if a
221. erformed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the AMG 5 Verify that the operator determines the faulted portion in the AMG 6 Ensure the operator inspects all components and cables for defects and proper connections 7 Verify that the operator isolates fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment 8 Verify that the operator correctly repairs the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM 9 Ensure the operator verifies the successful repair of the AMG by testing operating NOTE The following performance steps are performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the SGG 10 Verify that the operator determines the faulted portion of the SGG 11 Ensure the operator inspects all components and cables for defects and proper connections 12 Verify that the operator isolates the fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment 3 54 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 13 14 Verify that the operator correctly repairs the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM Ensure the operator verifies the successful repair of the SGG by testing operating NOTE The following performance steps are performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the FCG 15 16 17 18 19 Verify that the operator determines the faulted portion of the
222. erforms satellite tracking and ensures that the appropriate satellite is acquired by contacting the DSCSOC Ensure the supervisor verifies that the operator performs uplink carrier alignment in conjunction with the DSCSOC and IAW appropriate governing regulations TMs SOPs Ensure the supervisor verifies that the operator performs uplink carrier level adjustments in conjunction with the DSCSOC and IAW appropriate governing regulations TMs SOPs Ensure the supervisor verifies that the operator performs carrier to noise density ration check Ensure the supervisor verifies that the operator configures equipment for automatic switchover as applicable Ensure the supervisor verifies that the operator performs uplink and downlink signal traffic monitoring Ensure the supervisor verifies that the operator performs terminal equipment selection and status monitoring NOTE The following performance steps are for the AN TSC 86 terminal 10 11 12 13 Ensure the supervisor verifies that the operator correctly configures equipment according to the cut sheet provided and IAW governing regulations TMs SOPs Ensure the supervisor verifies that the operator acquires and tracks the appropriate satellite and that the HPA is in standby Ensure the supervisor verifies that the operator accesses the satellite IAW with governing regulations in conjunction with the GMF controller at the DSCSOC Ensure the superviso
223. erial destroyed or relocated and the method and degree of destruction and will indicate the circumstances that caused the execution of emergency plans 19 May 2005 3 75 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures 1 Developed emergency evacuation measures 2 Developed secure storage measures 3 Developed precautionary action measures 4 Developed emergency destruction measures 5 Developed reporting measures Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required AR 380 40 AR 380 5 TB 380 41 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Manage a Facility Physical Security Program 113 573 0013 Conditions You will need a facility AR 190 13 and FM 3 19 30 Standards Completed all performance measures Performance Steps Refer to AR 190 13 and FM 3 19 30 for all performance steps 1 Ensure appropriate checklist is completed and current for type of facility IAW regulations and SOPs 2 Ensure physical security inspections are performed IAW proper regulations and SOPs 3 Report all discrepancies to appropriate authority and ensure discrepancies are recorded and corrected 4 Ensure follow up inspections are conducted to make sure discrepancies are corrected 5 Ensure the site has a
224. ermit 3 Our forces today use a train alert deploy sequence We cannot count on the time or opportunity to correct or make up training deficiencies after deployment Maintaining forces that are ready now places increased emphasis on training and the priority of training This concept is a key link between operational and training doctrine 4 Units train to be ready for war based on the requirements of a precise and specific mission in the process they develop a foundation of combat skills that can be refined based on the requirements of the assigned mission Upon alert commanders assess and refine from this foundation of skills In the train alert deploy process commanders use whatever time the alert cycle provides to continue refinement of mission focused training Training continues during time available between alert notification and deployment between deployment and employment and even during employment as units adapt to the specific battlefield environment and assimilate combat replacements 19 May 2005 1 1 STP 11 25814 SM TG b How the Army Trains the Army 1 Training is a team effort and the entire Army Department of the Army major commands MACOMs the institutional training base units the combat training centers CTCs each individual soldier and the civilian workforce has a role that contributes to force readiness Department of the Army and MACOMSs are responsible for resourcing the Army to train The Institutional
225. es connectors Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 5 36 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG PERFORM SHUT DOWN PROCEDURES FOR 2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0012 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system loaded with software version 3 4 TM 11 7010 326 10 precision lightweight Global Positioning System receiver PLGR enhanced position location reporting system EPLRS if equipped Single channel Ground and Airborne Radio System SINCGARS with internet controller INC Standards As a minimum you must Shut down the FBCB2 computer PLGR SINCGARS and EPLRS Perform all steps in sequence Follow the warnings and cautions in the TM to prevent injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Performance Steps NOTE This task describes shutdown procedures for the AN UYK 128 V computer The AN UYK 128 V computer must be shutdown first before the PLGR EPLRS if equipped and SINCGARS ASIP if equipped CAUTION Do not shutdown power to the computer without first following software shutdown procedures Failure to comply may cause the loss of program data CAUTION Leaving the Processor Unit PU circuit breaker switch set to ON will enable the battery pack to continuously charge as long as
226. face card by using the TSO and the Trunk Modules Chart in Chapter 5 of the Promina 800 Series Quick Reference Guide 2 Determine the type of port card needed along with the interface card by using the TSO and the Voice Modules Chart located in Chapter 6 and the Data Modules Chart in Chapter 7 of the Promina 800 Series Quick Reference Guide 3 Determine the slot on the Integrated Digital Network Exchange IDNX that is used to install the trunk and port cards 4 Use the Query Card command to verify that the slot is not configured for another card type 5 Install trunk and port cards according to the card installation procedures outlined in the Promina Card Installation Guide Release 13 x3 b Configure Promina external equipment to allow the Promina to access the network 1 Ensure the rear interface cards are connected to external equipment via the appropriate type cable 2 Ensure the Promina data path is complete by configuring any external data processing equipment and verifying they are connected via data cables powered on and operational c Configure Promina ports port cards voice compression cards and if required trunk cards Refer to the Promina 800 Series Operator Interface Manual Chapter 4 Operator Interface Commands 1 Configure card according to the TSO 2 Install the card via the operator interface 3 4 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 3 Query the card via the operator interface to
227. ficulty 3 If the Segment Details dialog box has grids and percentages displayed in it then the user can highlight the grid and a white dot will appear on the route to show the user where the difficult area 5 68 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps h Select the first grid on the Segment Detail dialog box The system will display a white circle on the route where the difficult area is Each grid that the user highlights it will display the white circle on that grid NOTE If the first segment is passable then select the right arrow on the Analyze Route dialog box under the Show Segment Details until the Segment Details dialog box displays grids and percentages of the difficult areas i Select the Show All button on the Segment Details dialog box The system will display the white circles on all the grids for that particular segment of the route that are difficult j Select the close button The system will close the Segment Details dialog box and return to the Analyze Route dialog box as long as the user didn t close it earlier k Select the right arrow under the Show Segment Profile to move to the next waypoint NOTE The number should have changed in between the arrows It should show a number with and another number representing how many way points that are in the whole route Each time the user select the right arrow The number on the left of the should change to the number of the next waypoint Selec
228. form GMFSC control transfer operations a Perform notification procedures b Perform pre handover activities 1 Verify the GNCC database 2 Configure the RFIS for appropriate earth terminal downlink to the GNCC 3 Monitor the GNCC to ensure the correctness of the GNCC database 4 Display each channel of the satellite using the GNCC to visually verify the correct database and to observe any obvious network problems in respect to 5 Exchange any ongoing network information from the relinquishing GNC to the assuming GNC 6 Perform FMOW checks with the GMFSC terminals 7 Advise the GNOSC the appropriate RNOSC and the relinquishing GNC that they are ready to assume network control c Perform handover d Perform post handover activities e Perform notification procedures 6 Identify control hierarchy 7 Perform TCCC operations a Perform reporting and notification procedures 1 Prepare GMFSC 8 hour status report 2 Prepare AAR 3 Prepare DOR 4 Prepare SER 5 Prepare quicklook report 6 Prepare HAZCON report 7 Prepare site status report b Perform operational reporting to the SNC and SDC c Perform operational reporting to the RSSC 8 Perform DOSS operations 9 Perform DASA operations 10 Perform GNCC operations a Modify GNCC configuration data 1 Receive the ODM report from the SNC 2 Enter the configuration data 3 Validate the plan 4 Save the plan 5 Upload the plan 6
229. form switchover c Enable polling and auto power control d Assign console in control CIC e Perform notification procedures 6 Identify control hierarchy 19 May 2005 4 5 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 7 Perform TCCC operations a Perform reporting and notification procedures 1 Perform FNC reporting procedures a Prepare detailed outage reports DOR b Prepare SER c Prepare quicklook report d Prepare site status report 2 Perform operational reporting to the SNC and SDC 8 Perform DOSS operations 9 Perform DFCS operations a Initialize DFCS control equipment 1 Apply power on control data link CDL modems 2 Apply power on the inter NCT CDL modem 3 Apply power on disk drives 4 Apply power on central processing units CPUs 5 Perform NCT initialization 6 Change to on line NCT 7 Perform notification procedures b Perform archival disk operations 1 Perform disk mounting 2 Enable archiving 3 Dismount disk c Assign the DFCS CIC function 1 Release CIC 2 Assign CIC to an alternate display terminal at the NCT 3 Assign CIC to a standby NCT display terminal d Perform a DFCS system reboot 1 Perform a reboot on the network control processor NCP 2 Perform a reboot on the display processor unit DPU 3 Select the on line or standby mode 4 Configure the DFCS as an NCT 5 Configure the DFCS as a standby NCT 6 Restore archival activities e
230. g executed must comply with certain common requirements These include adequate preparation effective presentation and practice and thorough evaluation The execution of training includes preparation for training conduct of training and recovery from training a Preparation for Training Formal near term planning for training culminates with the publication of the unit training schedule Informal planning detailed coordination and preparation for executing the training continue until the training is performed Commanders and other trainers use training meetings to assign responsibility for preparation of all scheduled training Preparation for training includes selecting tasks to be trained planning the conduct of the training training the trainers reconnaissance of the site issuing the training execution plan and conducting rehearsals and pre execution checks Pre execution checks are preliminary actions commanders and trainers use to identify responsibility for these and other training support tasks They are used to monitor preparation activities and to follow up to ensure planned training is conducted to standard Pre execution checks are a critical portion of any training meeting During preparation for training battalion and company commanders identify and eliminate potential training distracters that develop within their own organizations They also stress personnel accountability to ensure maximum attendance at training 1 Subordinat
231. ge milliampere major Army command Glossary 5 STP 11 25814 SM TG MBA MCT MEDEVAC METL MGRS MICAD MIDAS MILSATCOM MILSTAR MO MOOTW MOPP MOS MPH MSG MSO MTO MTOE MTP MUX NATO NAV NBC NCB NCO NNM NT Glossary 6 multibeam antenna Main Battle Area movement control team Medical Evacuation mission essential task list Military Grid Reference System multipurpose integrated chemical agent detector Multiplexer Integration and DCSS Automation System military satellite communications military strategic and tactical relay system Monthly frequency code military operations other than war mission oriented protection posture Military Occupational Specialty miles per hour message MILSATCOM Systems Office message to observe Modified Table of Organization and Equipment Mission Training Plan MOS Training Plan multiplex North Atlantic Treaty Organization navigation nuclear biological chemical Network Configuration Control Book noncommissioned officer network node nodal manager network terminal New Technology Microsoft Windows Operating System 19 May 2005 OA ODB OPLAN OPORD OPS Ops OR OTP OTT OW PCC PCI PLGR PLL PM PMCS PPP PTF PU PWR QT RC RF RFIS RHDDC RSSC SA SAA GAA 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG operator acknowledge operational detachment Bravo operation plan operation order operations Ocean Region operator response one time pad
232. ghlighted b Select the Delete button The Delete File dialog box will be displayed saying You are about to delete message name of File or Folder and its associations continue with this action with a OK and Cancel button c Select the OK button The file or Folder that the user selected will be deleted 19 May 2005 5 13 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 6 Move a file from one folder to another folder a b Select a file from one folder The file will be highlighted Select the Move button The Choose Destination Folder dialog box will display with all the folders that have been saved Select the OK button The file will be displayed in the new folder Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen Performance Measures 1 Select the Messages button from the Function Bar or the F4 button on the keyboard 2 Select the Manage Tab The system will display the Manage fields and push buttons Rename a file Delete a file or folder 3 4 Rename a folder 5 6 Move a file from one folder to another folder c Select the folder that the user wants to move the file to The Folder will be highlighted d Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG PREPARE SEND OVERLAYS USING FBC
233. group to the right hand window Rename Group Renames the selected group in the right hand window to the new name Delete Group Deletes the selected group from the right hand window Add Address Adds the address from the left hand window to the selected group in the right hand window Delete Address Deletes the selected address from the right hand window Search Executes a search for entered text Data can be entered using either the virtual keyboard or the computer keyboard Name Text Box Allows the user to manually type text The left window displays a listing of all addresses The right window displays the folder list If there are no user address groups there are no folders listed c Select the Name text box by placing the cursor in the text box and left clicking and typing the name that the user wants to call the folder or Select the Virtual Keyboard and type the name using the mouse pointer and select OK The name will appear in the text box and the New Group button will become active d Select the New Group button The folder will be created in the window on the right side e Select the Folder that was just created by highlighting it The Delete Group button will become active Select the Search text box and type the name of the unit that the user wants to add to the new group or select the Virtual Keyboard and type the name and select the OK button The Name will highlight on the left window and the Add Addresses
234. he Secretary of the Army 0511807 DISTRIBUTION Active Army Army National Guard and U S Army Reserve To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number 114141 requirements for STP 11 25S14 SM TG PIN 082466 000
235. he standard enforced not the one discussed c Recovery from Training The recovery process is an extension of training and once completed it signifies the end of the training event At a minimum recovery includes conduct of maintenance training turn in of training support items and the conduct of AARs that review the overall effectiveness of the training just completed 1 Maintenance training is the conduct of post operations preventive maintenance checks and services accountability of organizational and individual equipment and final inspections Class IV Class V TADSS and other support items are maintained accounted for and turned in and training sites and facilities are closed out 2 AARs conducted during recovery focus on collective leader and individual task performance and on the planning preparation and conduct of the training just completed Unit AARs focus on individual and collective task performance and identify shortcomings and the training required to correct deficiencies AARs with leaders focus on tactical judgment These AARs contribute to leader learning and provide opportunities for leader development AARs with trainers and evaluators provide additional opportunities for leader development 1 6 TRAINING ASSESSMENT Assessment is the commander s responsibility It is the commander s judgment of the organization s ability to accomplish its wartime operational mission Assessment is a continuous process that in
236. he All radio button under the Georef field The system will redisplay the Geographical Geo references 3 Select the Collapse Expand tab The system will display the Collapse Expand tab group NOTE This function allows the user to collapse and expand the elements of a combat unit on the local display to a single Center of Mass CM This function collapses multiple unit icons under a single unit icon Units collapse IAW the current UTO a Select the Search text box by placing the cursor in the text box and left clicking The text box will become active NOTE The Search text box is used as an expedient way of finding a unit to expand or collapse b Type the name of the unit that needs expanding or collapsing NOTE The name must be spelled and spaced exactly the way it is in the UTO in order for the search function to find the unit If the name was spelled and spaced right the name will be highlighted when the search button is pushed c Select the or sign next to the unit NOTE Selecting the sign expands the unit selected into specific level Selecting the sign collapses the unit into one icon 4 Select the Overlays tab The system will display the Overlays tab group NOTE This function allows the user to display or hide labels on the Overlay and Load and unloads Overlays a Select the None radio button under the Labels field All the Labels that are on the overlays will disappear b Select the All radio button
237. he DASA or another control subsystem 2 Ensure the U A signature is captured and recorded in the DASA spectrum library This information will be used by the DSCS GSSC Support Element GSSC GNOSC and RNOSC to assist the DSCSOC in resolving and identifying the source of the U A 3 Record and document U A characteristics in SDC CPL 4 Coordinate with DISA elements to assess the impact of the U A 5 Direct the SNC to initiate a quicklook IAW step 5 of the Operating Instructions 6 Inform DISA elements of all actions taken to resolve U A d Direct network and payload control handovers 1 Evaluate channel spectrum 2 Initiate immediate action to resolve discrepancies 3 Immediately notify the DSCS GSSC Support Element GNOSC and RNOSC of noticeable degradations unauthorized users intermodulation and carrier problems 4 Analyze channel spectrum plots 19 May 2005 4 23 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps e Evaluate histograms of Beacon 1 and Beacon 2 1 Ensure Beacon 1 and 2 histograms are printed and evaluated every 24 hours IAW DISAC 800 70 1 Chapter 10 2 Review and evaluate histograms for anomalies 3 Initiate immediate action to resolve discrepancies 4 Immediately notify the DSCS GSSC Support Element GSSC GNOSC and RNOSC of noticeable degradations to Beacon 1 or Beacon 2 f Perform trend analysis using the DIMS 1 Ensure the DIMS is collecting and monitoring control subsystems for the des
238. he Quick Send Button Setup dialog box will display NOTE The Quick Send button allows the user to send a pertinent message in an expedient manner The operator creates and saves the message then associates it with the Quick Send button The Quick Send button has three dashes on it and is located to the right of the NAV button 2 Click the sign to the left of the folder that contains the message that the user wants to associate to the Quick Send button The will open and display all the messages in the folder 3 Left click on the message that will be associated to the Quick send button The message will highlight 4 Select the Button label text box and type a three letter abbreviation that you want to apply to the button Or select the virtual keyboard and type the abbreviation NOTE The abbreviation is what you will see on the Quick Send button on the Function Bar 5 Select the Balloon Label text box and type a short description of what the message is about or select the virtual keyboard and type the description NOTE The Balloon label is what the user will see when the cursor is placed over the Quick Send button it will display what you typed in the Balloon Label text box 6 Select the Apply button The three letter abbreviation will appear on the Quick Send button NOTE Notice that the three letters that you typed in the Button Label text box appears on the Quick send Button on the function bar If the user did not
239. he overlay type Operations Order or Operations Plan reference storage data version message size statistics and additional comments are set for the overlay There are eight push buttons at the bottom of the Overlay tab Save button which saves the overlay Delete which deletes the overlay Message Addressing which is used to set the address where the overlay will be sent Save As which is used to save the overlay initially Print unavailable Send which is used to send the overlay Keep overlay displayed which is used to keep the overlay displayed on the map when you close the Overlay toolbox Close which is used to close the Toolbox and Help for help on the overlay toolbox a Select the Overlay Type pull down arrow to display the different overlay types The system will display the Overlay type list NOTE The user may have to scroll up to view the Overlay Type pull down arrow The Overlay type that was selected in step 4 should be displayed in the Overlay Type text box If not then select it now b Use the Scroll bar on the right side of the Overlay Toolbox and scroll down to the Operation field c Select the Operation Set radio button The system will display the DTG text box DTG button and Identification text box NOTE The Operation option button is used to enter change the Operation DTG and Identification number d Place the cursor in the DTG text box and type the date time group in with the keyboard or select the DTG b
240. he plus or buttons to increase or decrease the Day Hour and Minute Select the Save button if you desire to save the message m Select the Send button if you desire to send the message The system will transmit the message n Select the Close button The system will close the Combat Messages dialog box 6 Prepare and send a Check Fire message a Select the Combat Msgs button on the Function Bar or the F3 button on the keyboard b Select the Check Fire All tab The system will display the Check Fire All template NOTES 1 The Check Fire All tab allows the user to send an immediate Check Fire command for all active fire missions in the Summary tab group 2 To cancel a Check Fire All just select the Cancel Check Fire All radio button 3 The Cancel Check Fire All radio button will be grayed out until the Check Fire All radio button is selected 5 6 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps c Select the Check Fire All radio button The system will Highlight the Check Fire All radio button d Select the Send button if you desire to send the message The system will transmit the message e Select the Close button The system will close the Combat Messages dialog box 7 Prepare and send a SITREP Message NOTE SITREP is a dual purpose message that generates a situation report message and displays the status of subordinate units The SITREP displays a table format for ease of entry anda correlated view of rece
241. he reference break point for the IF channels 7 Determine the AN USC 28 transmitter IF output power variation 8 Correction of transmit attenuator settings 9 Perform notification procedures Performance Measures GO 1 Performed notification procedures Established ECCM networks Maintained networks EGEE Performed ECCM network analysis Performed ECCM control transfer operations Identified the control hierarchy Performed TCCC operations Performed DECS operations Performed AN USC 28 operations o ON Oo A Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related DISA CIR 800 70 1 DISA CIR 800 E70 7 DISA CIR 800 E70 8 TM 11 5895 1399 13 TM 11 5895 808 13 1 4 4 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Conduct Frequency Division Multiple Access FDMA Network Control FNC within the Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS 113 616 2022 Conditions Given the TCCC DSCS FDMA control subsystem DFCS NCT and DSCS operational support system DOSS while working as the FNC DSCSOC and DISAC 800 70 1 TM 11 5895 1357 13 1 and TM 11 5895 1357 13 2 Standards The FNC demonstrated how to monitor and e
242. he settings back to the original settings Close which closes the dialog box List which brings up a list of all reminders that have been set and Help which gives the user help on the tab that is displayed b Select the Periodic Reminders by highlighting the name c Select the Execute button The system will display the Periodic Reminders dialog box NOTE The Periodic Reminders dialog box contains the following tabs which is based on the frequency of the reminder Once which is used to create a one time reminder Daily which is used to create a reminder for each day Weekly which is used to create a reminder for once a week Monthly which is used to create a reminder for once a month and Floating which is used to create a reminder for a particular time day and week among a range of months d Select the Once tab The system will display the Once tab fields e Select the Reminder month radio button for the month that you want the reminder NOTE The system defaults to the current month f Select the Reminder Time Hour slide button and hold the left mouse button and drag left to decrease the hour and right to increase the hour g Select the Reminder Time Minute slide button and hold the left mouse button and drag left to decrease the minute and right to increase the minute h Select the Reminder Day slide button and hold the left mouse button and drag left to decrease the day and right to increase the day Select the Reminder Audi
243. heckmark in the box and activate two additional pull down arrows Grid line Spacing and Grid line color NOTE Grid line Spacing provides the user options based on the Coordinate type selected The Grid line Color gives the user the option of changing the color of the grid lines f Select the Grid line spacing pull down arrow The system will show the different selections for spacing g Select 1km which is the standard distance that the Military uses between grid squares h Select the Grid line color pull down arrow The system will show the different colors for the grid lines Select black which is the standard color the Military uses for a Map Select Apply The system will display the grid lines in the color and distance that the user chose k Deselect the Show grid lines Select Apply 4 Select the Center tab The system will display the Center tab group NOTE The Center Tab will display three additional tabs the Unit Platform tab Location tab and the Scroll tab The Center tab gives the user the ability to move quickly around the map The Center function allows the user to move the map around to a specific unit or a general location 19 May 2005 5 45 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 5 Select the Unit Platform tab if it is not already selected The system will display the Unit Platform tab group NOTE The Unit Platform Tab allows the user to center the map on any units platforms or ge
244. highlight b Select the Display button The dialog box for the type of message that was selected will display c Select the Close button for the message that was displayed The system will return to the FIPR Queue on the same tab that the user was on 5 50 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 6 Select the Warning tab The system will display the Danger Zones and Marquee tabs NOTE The Warnings Tab contains a window that displays the warnings received by the system Under the Warnings Tab on the FIPR dialog box is a Danger Zones Tab The FBCB2 system creates these zones when the operator receives certain messages As the operator s vehicle approaches these danger zones the FBCB2 system warns the operator with an audible tone and displays the alert on the Warnings Alerts marquee The Danger Zones tab has five columns 1 Type which contains the type of Danger Zone 2 Dist which contains the distance to the Danger zone from the Platforms location 3 Dir which contains the direction to the Danger zone 4 Location which contains the grid location of the Danger zone 5 Originator which contains the name of the message originator a Select the Danger Zones tab if it is not selected The system will display the Danger Zones tab group NOTES 1 A Warning Alert must first be sent to the users system that is close to it s platform s location before the next step can be performed such as a MOPP alert Once the user
245. highlight a message to apply to the button a selection error message would appear stating No message has been associated with this message 7 Select the Display button The system will display the message NOTE From here the user can change the message address forward the message and save the message 8 Select the Close button The system will return to the Quick Send Button Setup dialog box 9 Select OK The system will return to the Ops screen 5 72 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps NOTES 1 Place the cursor over the Quick Send Button for a couple of seconds and the short message that the user typed in the Balloon Label text box will appear 2 The message can now be sent by selecting the button Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Select the Quick Send button 2 Click the sign to the left of the folder that contains the message that the user wants to associate to the Quick Send button 3 Left click on the message that will be associated to the Quick send button 4 Select the Button label text box and type a three letter abbreviation that you want to apply to the button 5 Select the Balloon Label text box and type a short description of what the message is about or select the virtual keyboard and type the description 6 Select the Apply button 7 Select the Display button 8 Selec
246. his STP answers the training needs of units in the field 19 May 2005 1 9 This page intentionally left blank STP 11 25814 SM TG CHAPTER 2 Training Guide TG 2 1 GENERAL The MOS Training Plan MTP identifies the essential components of a unit training plan for individual training Units have different training needs and requirements based on differences in environment location equipment dispersion and similar factors Therefore the MTP should be used as a guide for conducting unit training and not a rigid standard The MTP shows the relationship of an MOS skill level between duty position and critical tasks These critical tasks are grouped by task commonality into subject areas The MTP s Subject Area Codes list subject area numbers and titles used throughout the MTP These subject areas are used to define the training requirements for each duty position within an MOS The Duty Position Training Requirements table identifies the total training requirement for each duty position within an MOS and provides a recommendation for cross training and train up merger training e Duty Position column This column lists the duty positions of the MOS by skill level which have different training requirements Subject Area column This column lists by numerical key see Section the subject areas a soldier must be proficient in to perform in that duty position e Cross Train column This column lists the recommended duty posit
247. ialog box NOTE If the Default Message Addressing settings for the CTIL Action message were completed prior to preparing this message then the Message addressing can be skipped h Select the Message Settings tab The Message Settings tab group will display i Select the desired Precedence The selected radio button will highlight j Select the desired Acknowledge option A checkmark will be displayed in the selected box NOTE Some Acknowledge options will be grayed out depending on the selected message k Select the proper Security Level NOTE The Security level can only be changed by authorized personnel only The Security Level may be grayed out Select the DTG button under the Perishability DTG field The DTG Keypad dialog box will display m Enter the proper DTG by selecting the or buttons to increase or decrease the number The numbers will display in the text boxes n Select the OK button The system will return to the Message Addressing dialog box Select the Addresses tab The system will display the Addresses tab group p Select the Selected From pulldown arrow The system will display the three types of users groups q Select the desired user s group The selected user group will display in the Selected From text box with a list of the units in the user s group r Select the unit by either highlighting it in the Selected From windowpane or selecting the Search text box and typing the name of the unit a
248. ical Offset m text boxes If the user needs to know what the limits are that can be entered the user can select the virtual keypad and look at the bottom of the keypad to see the limit c Select the Execute button The system will display the Circular line of Sight on the first waypoint NOTE If the user chose Points along route the user would be able to just select the right arrow on the Circular line of Sight dialog box and the system would display the circular line of sight on the next way point If the user chose Select points from map the user can choose any point on the map or route d Select the Close button The system will display the Analyze Route dialog box 19 May 2005 5 69 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 9 Select the Travel Time button The system will display the Travel time dialog box NOTES 1 The Travel Time button allows the user to compute the time of each segment and the entire route based on the average speed factor 2 The Travel Time dialog box shows the Route length and the first segment length and the Estimated time under each that is blank until the user enters Average speed in Kilometers per hour and selects the Execute button a Select the Virtual keypad Enter the speed between 1 and 200 by using the mouse pointer and selecting the OK button or enter the speed by placing the cursor in the Avg Speed Kph text box and type it in with the keyboard b Select the Execute button The system
249. ications is restored as quickly as possible either via replacing faulty equipment or establishing an alternate route IAW appropriate regulations and TMs Ensured correct paperwork is initiated for repair of faulty equipment and equipment is sent through appropriate channels for repair Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Soldier ensured PMCS were accomplished IAW appropriate TMs 2 Soldier ensured supervisor s applied proper fault isolation techniques upon recognition of equipment and or system failure Soldier ensured communications were restored as quickly as possible either via replacing faulty equipment or establishing an alternate route IAW appropriate regulations and TMs Soldier ensured correct paperwork was initiated for repair of faulty equipment equipment is sent through appropriate channels for repair Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related DISA CIR 800 E70 11 DA FORM 2407 DISA CIR 800 E70 7 DA PAM 738 750 DISA CIR 800 E70 8 DISA CIR 800 E70 9 TM 11 5895 808 13 1 TM 11 5895 808 13 10 TM 11 5895 808 13 2 19 May 2005 3 97 STP 11 25814 SM TG Perform Site Reconnaissance 113 611 1013 Co
250. ier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks 19 May 2005 4 19 STP 11 25814 SM TG References Required Related TM 11 5895 1328 13 TM 11 5895 1328 23P TM 11 5895 1338 13 TM 11 5895 1368 13 4 20 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Maintain Defense Satellite Communications Systems DSCS Operations Center 113 616 3131 Conditions Given DECS DFCS RFIS FCS PTF SATCOM Set AN USC 28 FMOW and TMDE while working ina DSCSOC and DA Form 2407 DA Form 5988 E DA PAM 738 750 TM 11 5895 1188 12 TM 11 5895 1188 34 TM 11 5895 1328 13 TM 11 5895 1328 23P TM 11 5895 1338 13 TM 11 5895 1357 13 1 TM 11 5895 1357 13 2 TM 11 5895 1368 13 TM 11 5895 1399 13 TM 11 5895 808 13 1 through TM 11 5895 808 11 TM 11 5895 808 13 9 and TM 11 5895 808 23P Standards Correctly performed PMCS procedures identified and annotated deficiencies on the correct maintenance forms and performed proper corrective action IAW published procedures Performance Steps 1 Maintain the Satellite Monitoring System DFCS NCT AN FSC 96 a Troubleshoot the DFCS NCT to the LRU b Remove and replace the LRU c Verify repair and return to an operational condition d Complete DA Form 5988 E and DA Form 2407 2 Maintain the RFIS AN FSQ 150 a Troubleshoot the RFIS to the LRU b Remove and replace the LRU c Verify r
251. ign clearance guide frequency conversion system frequency division multiple access field manual frequency modulation file maintenance fragmentary order fault and system status panel foot feet Gateway Access Authorization grease automotive and artillery ground mobile force Greenwich Mean Time GMFSC network controller GMF network controller Global Positioning System Global Satellite Communications Support Center hazardous condition high power amplifier high voltage power supply that is 19 May 2005 IAW ICC IDNX IET INC IRON JS Kbd km KU LAN LAT LONG LCN LED LNA LOS LOW LRBSDS LRF LRM LRU LTRI Itr MA ma MACOM 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG input output in accordance with information coordination center intelligence coordination center USCG Interstate Commerce Commission identification Integrated Digital Network Exchange Initial Entry Training intermediate frequency Internet Controller part of the SINCGARS SIP program The INC is mounted in the SINCGARS SIP vehicle amplifier adapter VAA inter range operation number joint staff keyboard kilometer keyboard unit local area network latitude longitude logical channel number light emitting diode low noise amplifier line of sight link orderwire Long Range Biological Standoff Detection System laser range finder low rate multiplexer lowest repairable unit letter litter machine acknowled
252. ignated satellite 2 Operate the DIMS to consolidate and correlate network data from DSCSOC control subsystems DASA DECS DFCS SCCE and ODBs Review and evaluate the quality and performance of networks controlled and monitored 3 Immediately direct network and payload controllers to troubleshoot and resolve problems identified during trend analysis evaluations 4 Notify the DSCS GSSC Support Element GSSC GNOSC RNOSC ARSPOC and st SATCON Battalion of anomalies that cannot be resolved at the DSCSOC level g Evaluate the implementation of a new ODB h Analyze non DFCS earth terminal for tracking problems 8 Maintain COMSEC operations Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Prepared master station log 2 Performed SNC operations 3 Performed CPC operations Performed ENC operations Performed GNC operations Performed FNC operations Performed DSCSOC operations Maintained COMSEC operations oN O A Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related DIMS MANUAL DISA CIR 800 70 1 4 24 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Supervise the Maintenance of C
253. ilable file copies of publications requests DA Forms 4569 17 series and 12 series previously submitted by your unit Brief soldier Tell the soldier the ability to establish a publications library will be evaluated according to the performance measures 3 72 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Determined publications required by shop or section 2 Ensured technical publications on hand or on order were current Ensured doctrinal training and organizational publications on hand or on order were current Ensured administrative publications on hand or on order were current Ensured local and higher headquarters publications were current Prepared the required transmittal form O A Prepared DA Form 17 and DA Form 17 1 to request local and higher headquarters publications 8 Ensured published changes were posted to appropriate publications 9 Removed obsolete rescinded superseded publications from the library 10 Arranged publications in proper order and in a suitable location 11 Labeled binders used for storing library publications 12 Notified personnel to return loaned publications to the library a timely manner 13 Updated USAPA local and higher headquarters publications accounts as
254. ill display the World Coverage dialog box NOTE The World Coverage allows the user to choose and load a SA map anywhere in the world provided the map area is loaded in the software Currently all maps are not loaded There are two tabs in the World Coverage dialog box Background and Scroll There are several common push buttons that appear in each of the two tabs They do the same thing in both tabs They consist of Zoom Out which zooms the map back out once you have zoomed in on a portion of the map Previous View which lets the user go back one view at a time Set Center which allows the user to quickly set center anywhere in the world World View which quickly displays the world map Close which closes the World Coverage dialog box and Help which give the user help on the World Coverage dialog box k Select the Background tab which has two groups Types and Scales Select the type of map that you want to see CADRG DTED IMAGERY by checking the box next to the name NOTE If the User wants to see the World map in the Imagery mode the user must go to the Background tab in the Map Control dialog box and uncheck the map type that it is in and then check the Imagery type and select OK and then go back to the Center tab Location tab and select the World Coverage button m Select the scale by checking the box next to the scale that you want The system will display a checkmark in the box and a yellow blotch on the map where that scale ap
255. in electronic media and included on EM 0169 NG 15 April 1986 Organizational Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminal AN TSC 93A Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 NG 15 April 1986 Operator s Manual for SATCOM Terminals AN TSC 85B V 1 and AN TSC 85B V 2 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 NG 15 April 1986 Operator s Manual for Satellite Communications Terminals AN GSC 49 V 1 AN GSC 49 V 2 and AN GSC 49 V 3 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 1 September 1987 Organizational Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminals AN GSC 49 V 1 AN GSC 49 V 2 and AN GSC 49 V 3 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 1 September 1987 Organizational Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminals AN GSC 49 V 1 AN GSC 49 V 2 Volume 2 of 2 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 September 1987 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Encoder Decoder KY 883 GSC Item also produced in electronic media 20 October 1983 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Receiver Transmitter Group Orderwire OZ 52 G 30 April 1984 Direct and General Support Maintenance Manual for Receiver Transmitter Group Orderwire OZ 52 G 28 May 1984 References 5
256. ing media 6 Directed the supervisors to keep manager informed on any system failures or HAZCON that may affect the operation of the system Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks 3 86 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG References Required Related PX19671 REVA 11 10 14 PX19672 REVA 201 113 0321 B PX19674 REV B TM 11 5895 1433 12 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1433 34 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 TM 11 5895 1434 34 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 9 6115 464 12 19 May 2005 3 87 STP 11 25814 SM TG Direct the Maintenance of SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 39 AN FSC 78 AN GSC 52 or AN TSC 86 113 590 7004 Conditions As a section chief given an AN GSC 52A V3 SATCOM terminal AN FSC 78C V2 heavy SATCOM terminal AN GSC 39C medium SATCOM terminal or AN TSC 86 SATCOM terminal in a defective condition TM 11 5895 1196 13 2 through TM 11 5895 1196 13 9 TM 11 5895 1197 13 1 through TM 11 5895 1197 13 11 TM 11 5895 1531 30 TM 11 5895 1532 30 TM 11 5895 1533 30 TM 11 5895 1535 12 TM 11 5895 1536 13 TM 11 5895 846 14 and TM 11 5985 398 13 direct the maintenance of the appropriate terminals and restore communications Standards Successfully directed the restoral of the defective SATCOM
257. ings tab The system will display the Warnings tab group g Select the Marquee tab The system will display the Marquee tab group NOTE The Marquee tab allows the user to view all the warnings and alerts together on one page h Select the Close button The system will return to the ops screen Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Select the FIPR flash immediate priority routine button on the Function bar 2 Select the FLASH tab if it is not selected already 3 Select the Immediate tab when you want to read an immediate second highest precedence message 19 May 2005 5 51 STP 11 25514 5 Performance Measures 4 6 Select Priority tab when you want to read a priority third highest precedence message Select the Routine tab when you want to read a routine lowest precedence message Select the Warning tab Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG EMPLOY STATUS FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0020 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system with software version 3 4 loaded precision lightweight global positioning system receiver PLGR enhanced position location radio system EPLRS if equipped
258. ion amp Surveillance Select the desired option from the list The option will be displayed in the text box NOTE The Surveillance Info field will be grayed out unless the user selects the End of Mission amp Surveillance option from the EOM Type field h i j k m Select the Effect Achieved pull down arrow The system will display the options list Select the desired option from the list The option will be displayed in the text box Select the button to increase or the button to decrease the number of Enemy Casualties Select the send button The message Last EOM message sent at DTG Select the Close button The system will return to the FIPR dialog box Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Prepare and send Airborne Fire Mission 2 Perform a Subsequent Adjust 3 Perform the Check Fire Function 4 Perform the On Call Fire Cmd function 5 Perform the End of Mission EOM function Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 19 May 2005 5 29 STP 11 25814 SM TG PREPARE SEND ORDER REQUEST MESSAGES USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0010 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force XXI Battle Command B
259. ion for which soldiers should be cross trained Train up Merger column This column lists the corresponding duty position for the next higher skill level or MOSC the soldier will merge into on promotion The Critical Task List table lists by general subject areas the critical tasks to be trained in an MOS and the type of training required resident integration or sustainment e Subject Area column This column lists the subject area number and title in the same order as Section Part One of the MTP Task Number column This column lists the task numbers for all tasks included in the subject area e Title column This column lists the task title for each task in the subject area e Training Location column This column identifies the training location where the task is first trained to soldier training publications standards If the task is first trained to standard in the unit the word Unit will be in this column If the task is first trained to standard in the training base it will identify by brevity code ANCOC BNCOC etc the resident course where the task was taught Figure 2 1 contains a list of training locations and their corresponding brevity codes Trained in the Unit Advanced NCO Course Advanced Individual Training Basic NCO Course Additional Skill Identifier Army Functional Course Figure 2 1 Training Locations 19 May 2005 2 1 STP 11 25814 SM TG e Sustainment Training Frequency Column Th
260. ion in the Protection Level text box 5 4 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps NOTE The Protection Level combo box is grayed out and only becomes active when Dismounted Personnel is selected in the Equipment combo box Select the Method of Control pull down arrow The system will display the Method of Control options list Select an option from the list The system displays the selection in the Method of Control text box NOTE The Timed Time On Target Zulu field only becomes active if the Timed Time on Target is selected in the Method Of Control field m Select the Save button if you desire to save the message The system will save the message n Select the Send button if you desire to send the message The system will transmit the message Select the Summary tab to display the Summary tab group NOTE The Summary tab displays a list of all fire missions received along with their current status You can access additional fire support messages from the Summary tab group after a Call For Fire message has been sent and a Message to Observer read only message has been received p Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen 4 Prepare and send a medical evacuation MEDEVAC request NOTE Use the MEDEVAC request message to request ground or aircraft support to evacuate friendly and or enemy casualties The MEDAVAC tab group is accessed from Combat Msgs button on the Function Bar or
261. ion of Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V Direct the Maintenance of Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V Perform Site Reconnaissance Maintain a Situation Map Direct the Establishment of a Signal Site Defense Manage Site Configuration Plans 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG CHAPTER 3 MOS Skill Level Tasks Skill Level 1 Subject Area 1 Digital Communications Satellite Subsystem DCSS Operate Digital Communications Satellite Subsystem DCSS 113 583 2625 Conditions Given associated DCSS equipment OSP 1310 Manual Promina 800 Series Node Configuration Manual Promina 800 Series Operator Interface Promina 800 Series Quick Reference Guide 11 5805 795 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1215 10 TM 11 5895 1346 13 TM 11 5895 1630 13 amp P 11 5895 1686 13 TM 11 5895 1687 13 applicable Telecommunications Service Orders TSOs Unit standing operating procedures SOP and operating requirements Standards The DCSS equipment completed the self test passed all operational tests and was passing communications Performance Steps 1 Configure equipment as specified in the TSO a Patch equipment as specified in the TSO b Perform in facility continuity checks c Perform circuit alignment test d Notify Circuit Control Office CCO or Intermediate Control Office ICO that tests are completed e Support user to user testing as directed by the CCO 2 the FCC 100 IAW TM 11 5805 795 13 Ensure the FCC
262. ion of probable cause of the fault condition NOTE Ensure that the faulted condition of the SMU is not a result of a faulted user or data equipment that provides any input into the SMU If the SMU fault is a result of a faulted user or data input equipment utilize the applicable manual for that piece of equipment to correct deficiency b Begin fault isolation of the SMU if all user or data input equipment is functioning correctly 3 10 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps c Analyze the SMU error messages on the operator console and fault indicators in conjunction with the SMU system fault isolation chart located in Chapter 3 of TM 11 5805 802 138 amp P NOTE It is important to determine the software program that is being utilized for interface with the SMU CSOLOP or SWOLOP to correctly determine which fault message table to use when attempting to isolate a fault d Determine the SMU fault isolation path using system fault isolation flowchart e Look up all fault messages and or equipment fault indications paying attention to their priority f Perform SMU corrective measures based on the highest priority fault NOTE Certain system status messages may occur during normal switch operation These messages and required operator responses are listed in Tables 3 5 and 3 6 of TM 11 5805 802 13 amp P g Perform SMU corrective measures outlined in the fault isolation chart and error message tables until the fault is corre
263. ions about tasks or which tasks in this manual they must perform they are responsible for asking their first line supervisor for clarification assistance and guidance First line supervisors know how to perform each task or can direct soldiers to appropriate training materials including current field manuals technical manuals and Army regulations Soldiers are responsible for using these materials to maintain performance They are also responsible for maintaining standard performance levels of all Soldier s Manual of Common Tasks at their current skill level and below Periodically soldiers should ask their supervisor or another soldier to check their performance to ensure that they can perform the tasks 1 3 BATTLE FOCUSED TRAINING Battle focus is a concept used to derive peacetime training requirements from assigned and anticipated missions The priority of training in units is to train to standard on the wartime mission Battle focus guides the planning preparation execution and assessment of each organization s training program to ensure its members train as they are going to fight Battle focus is critical throughout the entire training process and is used by commanders to allocate resources for training based on wartime and operational mission requirements Battle focus enables commanders and staffs at all echelons to structure a training program that copes with non mission related requirements while focusing on mission essential training ac
264. ired the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM 24 Ensured the operator verified the successful repair of the Transmitter Group by testing operating NOTE The following performance measures are performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the Antenna Group 25 Verified that the operator determined the faulted portion of the Antenna Group 26 Ensured the operator inspected all components and cables for defects and proper connections 27 Verified that the operator isolated fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment 28 Verified that the operator correctly repaired the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM 29 Ensured the operator verified the successful repair of the Antenna Group by testing operating NOTE The following performance measures are for the AN TSC 86 only 30 Verified that the operator isolated failure to correct faulted equipment 31 Verified that the operator transferred to standby equipment if available If standby equipment was not available ensured that the soldier prioritized circuits to receive restored service 32 Ensured the operator isolated fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment 33 Verified that the operator correc
265. is column indicates the recommended frequency at which the tasks should be trained to ensure soldiers maintain task proficiency Figure 2 2 identifies the frequency codes used in this column Biannually Annually Semiannually Quarterly Monthly Biweekly Weekly Figure 2 2 Sustainment Training Frequency Codes e Sustainment Training Skill Level Column This column lists the skill levels of the MOS for which soldiers must receive sustainment training to ensure they maintain proficiency to soldier s manual standards 2 2 SUBJECT AREA CODES Skill Level 1 1 Digital Communications Satellite Subsystem DCSS Strategic Satellite Terminal AN GSC 52 V AN GSC 39 V and AN FSC 78 V Tactical Satellite Terminals AN TSC 85 V and AN TSC 93 V Strategic Satellite Terminal AN TSC 86A Strategic Satellite Terminal AN TSC 49 V ASI 1C MILSTAR 0 Communications Set AN USC 28 V 1 Digital Common Core a BF Skill Level 2 6 SATCOM Terminal Supervision Skill Level 3 6 SATCOM Terminal Supervision 8 ASI 1C 9 MILSTAR Skill Level 4 7 SATCOM Terminal Direction 2 2 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG 2 3 CRITICAL TASKS LIST MOS TRAINING PLAN 25514 CRITICAL TASKS Task Number Title Training Sust Sust Location Tng Tng SL Freq Skill Level 1 Subject Area 1 Digital Communications Satellite Subsystem DCSS 113 583 2625 Operate Digital Communications Satellite Subsystem DCSS 113 583 3273 Maintain Digit
266. ith many unique applications and tools 2 The Apps dialog box has Two sub tabs the FBCB2 tab and the Misc tab which is not available b Select the FBCB2 tab if it is not already selected The system will display the FBCB2 Applications list c Select Driver s Display and select the execute button The system will display the Driver s Display Compass dialog box NOTE The Driver s Display gives the user the ability to turn the compass on for the driver to follow The dialog box has two push buttons The Navigation button which allows the user to switch to the Navigation Dialog Box and the Close button which closes the dialog box The Nav button does the same thing as the Navigation function learned earlier in the task d Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen e Select the Apps button on the Function bar or select the F7 button on the keyboard The system will display the Apps dialog box f Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen 2 Perform the Line of Sight Function NOTE The Line of Sight function allows the user to draw a line on the SA display map from the Start S point to the End E point and view a graphic representation of the topography between the two points The Function bar has several push buttons consisting of Coordinate button which is a toggle button that shows the different types of coordinates OK button which is used once you have selected your start and en
267. itoring NOTE The following performance measures were for the AN TSC 86 terminal 10 11 12 13 Ensured the supervisor verified that the operator correctly configured equipment according to the cut sheet provided and IAW governing regulations TMs SOPs Ensured the supervisor verified that the operator acquired and tracked the appropriate satellite and that the HPA was in standby Ensured the supervisor verified that the operator accessed the satellite IAW with governing regulations in conjunction with the GMF controller at the DSCSOC Ensured the supervisor verified that the operator monitored communications status of equipment and passed the appropriate reports at the designated time IAW governing regulations SOPs TMs Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related TM 11 5895 1196 13 2 TM 11 5895 1196 13 3 TM 11 5895 1196 13 4 TM 11 5895 1196 13 5 TM 11 5895 1196 13 6 TM 11 5895 1196 13 7 TM 11 5895 1196 13 8 TM 11 5895 1196 13 9 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG References Required Related TM 11 5895 1197 13 1 TM 11 5895 1197 13 10 TM 11 5895 1197 13 11 TM 11 5895 1197 13 3 TM 11 5895 1197 13 4 TM 11 5895 1197 13 5 TM 11 5895 1197 13 6 TM 11 5895 1197 1
268. ived reports The SITREP table graphically depicts the status of five critical categories that the commander uses to determine the units status The SITREP message displays subordinate unit status or provides a detail view of individual platform status two levels down a Select the Combat Msgs button on the Function Bar or the F3 button on the keyboard b Select the SITREP tab The system will display the SITREP template NOTE The combat messages SITREP template displays a color coded graphical representation of your own situation and the situation of those units platforms subordinate to you The color key is as follows black not mission capable red marginally mission capable with major deficiencies amber mission capable with only minor deficiencies green full strength and White no report received The SELF tab displays a color coded graphical representation of your own situation The Unit tab displays a color coded graphical representation of your subordinate platforms situation c Select the Self tab if not already selected to EDIT your status The system will display seven headings and what they represent under each Self which is your platform name Fuel which is the status of your fuel Mun which is the status of you ammunition Pers which is status of your personnel Eqmt which is status of your Equipment Unit which is status of your unit and DTG which is the date time group d Select your Unit role name which is the name
269. k 4 Select the General Tab The system will display the status of the Disk Utilization NOTE The General tab displays a pie chart of the system s disk utilization in percentages and total disk capacity Percentages of disk space used and free indications appear to the right of the pie chart a Select the refresh button to refresh the Information b Select the Close button to close the dialog box 5 54 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Select the Status button from the Function Bar or the F5 button on the Keyboard 2 Select the Systems tab 3 Select the SA Tab 4 Select the General Tab Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 19 May 2005 5 55 STP 11 25814 SM TG EMPLOY ADMIN FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0021 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system with software version 3 4 loaded precision lightweight global positioning system receiver PLGR enhanced position location radio system EPLRS if equipped and single channel ground air radio system SINCGARS with Internet controller INC Standards As a minimum you must Employ screen operations functions to manage and exchange information to include setting the
270. k carrier level adjustments in conjunction with the DSCSOC and IAW appropriate governing regulations TMs SOPs 6 Verify that the operator performs carrier to noise density ration check 7 Verify that the operator configures equipment for automatic switchover as applicable 8 Verify that the operator performs uplink and downlink signal traffic monitoring 9 Verify that the operator performs terminal equipment selection and status monitoring NOTE The following performance steps are for the AN TSC 86 terminal 10 Verify that the operator correctly configures equipment according to the cut sheet provided and IAW governing regulations TMs SOPs 11 Verify that the operator acquires and tracks appropriate satellite and that the HPA is in standby 12 Verify that the operator accesses satellite IAW with governing regulations in conjunction with the GMF controller at the DSCSOC 13 Verify that the operator monitors communications status of equipment and passes appropriate reports at the designated time IAW governing regulations SOPs TMs 19 May 2005 3 59 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures NOTE The following performance measures are for strategic terminals AN FSC 78 AN GSC 39 AN GSC 52 1 Verified that the operator performed preoperational adjustments and setup IAW appropriate TM and applicable TSO Verified that the operator performed satellite acquisition IAW with appropriate and governing SOP
271. l Fire Cmd and EOM tabs are now active e Select the Subsequent Adjust Tab The system will display the Subsequent Adjust Template NOTE If the Subsequent Adjust template does not have all the desired options the user can select the Long Form Message button at the bottom of the Combat Messages dialog box This will bring up the Long Form template which has more options The Long Form is completed the same as all the Combat Messages f Select the Left or Right Radio button for the direction that the round needs to move The radio button will highlight g Select the button to increase or the button to decrease the direction The number will display in the text box h Select the Add or Drop Radio button for the distance the round needs to move The Radio button will highlight i Select the button to increase the distance or the button to decrease the distance j Select the Up or Down radio button for the altitude The Radio button will highlight k Select the button to increase the height or the button to decrease the height Select the Method of Control pull down arrow The system will display the options m Select the desired option The option will appear in the Text box NOTE The Time On Target Zulu field will be Grayed out unless Timed Time on Target is selected in the Method of Control n Select the save button The message stating Message saved to file Subseq_DTG will be displayed in the Text window towards the b
272. l procedures IAW the MTPH Verified that the operator correctly performed the simplified terminal initialization procedures IAW the MTPH Verified that the operator correctly loaded the terminal COMSEC TRANSEC keys IAW the procedures in the MTPH Verified that the operator performed the terminal control procedures IAW the MTPH Verified that the operator conducted the message processing procedures IAW the MTPH Verified that the operator performed the EHF acquisition and logon procedures IAW the Verified that the operator adhered to the EHF logoff procedures IAW the MTPH Verified that the operator powered down the terminal IAW the Terminal Shutdown Procedures in the MTPH 4 30 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related DISAC 310 70 1 CPS2L3 MTPH VOL 1 CPS2L4 MTPH VOL 2 CPS2L5 DA PAM 738 750 19 May 2005 4 31 STP 11 25814 SM TG Supervise the Maintenance of MILSTAR Command Post Terminal AN FRC 181 V or AN TRC 194 V 113 590 7007 Conditions Given a faulted AN FRC 181 V or AN TRC 1
273. lays tab Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG APPENDIX A SAMPLE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICE ORDER TSO ROUTINE R 140717Z JUL 98 FM DISA EUR TSR TSO CRP TRAFFIC VAIHINGEN GE EU8 TO 886CS RAMSTEIN AB SEMBACH ANNEX GE SCST SCSD CDR OPMAS E DCS STA LANDSTUHL GE AFSE F ITT LDL DCS STA LANDSTUHL GE AFSE XB HSC 86CS RAMSTEIN AB GE SCMTU SCMTI CDROPMAS E DCS STA DONNERSBERG GE AFSE F ITT DON INFO USAFE CSS CMO RAMSTEIN AB GE SCBM 4ASOS MANNHEIM GE LGSS DISA EUR VAIHINGEN GE EU31CONT DISA TCO RFS TSR TRAFFIC VAIHINGEN GE EU8 THIS IS SECTIONED MSG COLLATED BY MDS UNCLAS TSO E81929 W0U4 01 REF DISA EUR TCO MSG DTG 291103Z JUN 98 START TSR BF17JUN988097 1 PURPOSE A THIS TSO IS ISSUED IAW REFERENCE A TO START A TEMPORARY 1 2KB IN DIRECT AUTODIN CIRCUIT BETWEEN POINTS DEPICTED 2 GENERAL CIRCUIT TRUNK INFORMATION JEXDWOUA B NA C TEMPORARY D 200800Z JUL 98 THRU 242359Z JUL 98 E 1 SEMBACH BCO GE 4 CONTACT SUPERVISOR DSN 496 7176 CML 06302 47 7176 2 UNDTMNDL ZV 0 CONTACT HOME BASE SUPVR DSN 385 2115 2195 CML 06217 302115 2195 F C14C G FULL DUPLEX CCO SEMBACH GE TCF DSN 496 6620 CML 06302 67 6620 1 2KB J SECURED K TEMP EXEC L NO
274. ldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related IETM AN GSC 52A 78C 39C 3 20 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Subject Area 3 Tactical Satellite Terminals AN TSC 85 V and AN TSC 93 V Install SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V 113 589 1003 Conditions Given a SATCOM terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V antenna group AS 3036 TSC generator set PU 405A or PU 753 M predetermined site location azimuth and elevation TB 43 0129 TM 9 6115 464 12 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 11 5895 1433 12 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 and local Unit SOP Standards Installed the AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V IAW TM 11 5895 1433 12 1 and TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 and met all safety requirements listed in TB 43 0129 Performance Steps 1 Site selection a Locate general elevation of satellite b Select an area that meets topographical standards outlined in the TM c Check soil conditions for stability anchoring and effective grounding d Ensure the terminal antenna and equipment are not hampered by electrical interference WARNING The following performance steps are to be performed during the actual installation by qualified soldiers All safety considerations should be observed implemented
275. lect the Misc tab Select the Local Settings tab Select the Audio tab Select the SA Settings Tab Select the Own tab Select the Friendly Tab 2 o N O A N Select the Observed Tab Select the Air tab gt fos Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 19 May 2005 5 59 STP 11 25814 SM TG EMPLOY APPS FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0022 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system with software version 3 4 loaded precision lightweight global positioning system receiver PLGR enhanced position location radio system EPLRS if equipped and single channel ground air radio system SINCGARS with Internet controller INC Standards As a minimum you must Employ screen operations functions to manage and exchange information to include Driver s Display Line of Sight Periodic Reminders Personnel Status Report and Radio Net Join Performance Steps 1 Perform Driver s Display Function a Select the Apps button from the Function Bar or select the F7 button from the keyboard The system will display the Apps dialog box NOTES 1 The Apps function provides the user w
276. lect the edit button to the right of the VPF The system will display a VPF dialog box NOTE From here you can turn off one or more of the attributes by deselecting whatever one the user don t want displayed e Deselect the names and select apply NOTE Notice how the Names that were displayed on the map are no longer displayed If the user wants it back on the map then all the user needs to do is select the box next to the attribute and select apply f Select close The system will redisplay the Map Control dialog box g Deselect the VPF and select DTED h Select the apply button The system will display a Dark green Light green and Brown map 5 44 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps NOTE There are no edit functions for the CADRG DTED or Imagery i Deselect the DTED and select the Imagery and select apply The system will display an aerial photograph of the earth surface as seen from above j Deselect the Imagery and select the CADRG and select apply The system will display the standard map k Select the Scale pull down button The system will display the different scales that can be selected between 1 meter and 10 kilometers Select 250K and select apply The system will display a tannish colored map in a scale of 250K NOTE Notice that it is hard to read You can use the zoom button to enlarge the image m Select the Zoom pull down button The system will display the different zoom magnifications
277. licable TM for equipment being inspected a Verify that weekly PMCS is accomplished b Verify that semiannual PMCS is accomplished 4 Verify that maintenance PMCS activities are accomplished on roadside equipment IAW applicable TM for equipment being inspected a Verify that weekly PMCS is accomplished b Verify that semiannual PMCS is accomplished 5 Verify that maintenance to correct deficiencies is performed a Verify that only repairs that can be performed by operator crew are performed b Verify that all repairs above operator crew level are initiated 6 Verify that proper documentation procedures are followed a Verify that DA Form 2404 is correctly filled out b Verify that the tracking system is implemented and updated to maintain accountability of repair services being performed on deficient equipment c Verify that the tracking system is implemented and maintained for accountability of services conducted on assigned equipment 19 May 2005 3 41 STP 11 25814 SM TG Evaluation Preparation Setup Have a copy of the performance steps appropriate TMs and local Unit SOP available Brief soldier Not applicable Performance Measures 1 O oa A Performed PMCS for curbside equipment Performed PMCS for roadside equipment Corrected deficiencies Documented procedures Performed maintenance PMCS for curbside equipment Performed maintenance PMCS for roadside equipment Evaluation
278. link 1 Direct earth terminals to conduct the modem performance test once completed fax or e mail the results to the DSCSOC for review 2 Review modem performance test data 3 Direct transmit and receive terminals to conduct in house IF to IF characterizations once completed fax or e mail the results to the DSCSOC for review 4 Review in house IF to IF characterization data 5 Direct transmit and receive terminals to conduct in house RF to RF characterizations once completed fax or e mail the results to the WSOC for review 6 Review in house RF to RF characterization data 7 Direct the terminal to commence with the RF translator loopback 24 hour stability test 8 Monitor in house 24 hour stability test 9 Direct the receive terminal to prepare the downlink equipment for carrier access 10 Direct the transmit terminal to prepare the uplink equipment for carrier access 4 10 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 11 Create and implement an ODB change for a primary satellite 2 Determine authorized C N N 3 Direct the transmit terminal to access the carrier 4 Analyze the transmit carrier 5 Verify end to end connectivity with the terminals 6 Perform over the satellite characterization 7 Perform notification procedures b Perform power balancing on a DSCS SATCOM network 1 Determine the need to power balance 2 Perform notification procedures 3 Retrieve RLM TLS readings 4 Analyze D
279. lite Communications Set AN USC 28 V Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 3 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 14 October 1983 References 9 STP 11 25814 SM TG TM 11 5895 808 13 7 TM 11 5895 808 13 8 TM 11 5895 808 13 9 TM 11 5895 808 23P TM 11 5895 843 14 TM 11 5895 846 14 TM 11 5895 898 12 1 TM 11 5895 900 34 TM 11 5985 359 13 TM 11 5985 372 13 1 TM 11 5985 398 13 TM 11 7025 221 10 TM 11 7025 221 20 TM 11 7025 221 34 TM 38 L32 11 References 10 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 3 also produced in electronic media and included EM 0169 14 October 1983 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 4 also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 4 October 1983 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 6 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 9 November 1983 Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 1 May 1994 Operator Organizational Direct Support and General Support Maint
280. ll regulations that support the physical security program Performance Measures GO NOGO Refer to AR 190 13 and FM 3 19 30 for all PMs 1 Ensured appropriate checklist was completed and current for type of facility IAW regulations and SOPs 2 Ensured physical security inspections were performed IAW proper regulations and SOPs 3 Reported all discrepancies to appropriate authority and ensured discrepancies were recorded and corrected 4 Ensured follow up inspections were conducted to make sure discrepancies were corrected 5 Ensured the site had all regulations that support the physical security program Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related AR 190 13 AR 380 5 FM 3 19 30 TB 380 41 19 May 2005 3 77 STP 11 25814 SM TG Evaluate Communications Security COMSEC for Insecurities 113 573 2032 Conditions Given AR 380 5 and TB 380 41 Standards Evaluated facility COMSEC and noted discrepancies Performance Steps 1 Determine if COMSEC insecurity exists 2 Identify type of COMSEC insecurity 3 Report the COMSEC insecurity IAW AR 380 5 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Leader determined if CO
281. ll return to the Ops screen Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Prepare and send an Airborne Artillery Report 2 Prepare and send a Personnel Status Report 3 Prepare and send a Freetext message Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 19 May 2005 5 25 STP 11 25814 SM TG PREPARE SEND FIRE ALERT MESSAGES USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0009 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system loaded with software version 3 4 you have received an operation order OPORD or fragmentary order FRAGO to conduct a tactical operation Default Message Addressing settings have been set Standards You must create and send a fire alert message with significant and immediate information both horizontally and vertically on the battlefield As a minimum you must create and send an Airborne Fire Mission Subsequent Adjust Check Fire On Call Fire Cmd and an End of Mission Performance Steps NOTE The Fire Support Coord Measures MAYDAY Message MOPP Alert Observer Readiness Report RECON Report Threat Warning and Strike Warning are done exactly the same way as the Airborne Fire Mission The Call For Fire CFF is done exactly like task 171 147 0001 Step 3 sub step c Subsequent Adjus
282. llite a Compare DCSCU readings for azimuth and elevation to given azimuth and elevation b Select and tune the tracking downconverter to the beacon frequency c Using the DCSCU slew antenna until maximum receive signal is achieved d Place the DCSCU into Auto Track mode Evaluation Preparation Setup Have a copy of the performance steps appropriate TMs and local Unit SOP available Brief soldier Not applicable Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Performed operating procedures on generator set a Set generator frequency and voltage b Applied power to the transfer box 2 Operated synchronizing box a Set generator on line switch to correct generator If it was necessary to swap generators followed procedures according to appropriate TM 3 Set the antenna elevation safety switch control knob AN TSC 93 V only 4 Powered up shelter according to appropriate TM 5 Patched equipment IAW cut sheets Patched IF translator patch panel AN TSC 85 V only Patched the modem patch panel Patched the OW patch panel AN TSC 85 V only Patched baseband patch panel Selected proper Second Level Multiplexer at the TSSP select panel AN TSC 85 V only f Patched baseband patch panel 6 Configured equipment IAW cut sheets Configured signal conditioning equipment Configured multiplexer equipment Configured mo
283. lly will not be dual hatted as a participant in the training being executed c Role of Commanders and Leaders Commanders ensure that evaluations take place at each echelon in the organization Commanders use this feedback to teach coach and mentor their subordinates They ensure that every training event is evaluated as part of training execution and that every trainer conducts evaluations Commanders use evaluations to focus command attention by requiring evaluation of specific mission essential and battle tasks They also take advantage of evaluation information to develop appropriate lessons learned for distribution throughout their commands d After Action Review The AAR whether formal or informal provides feedback for all training It is a structured review process that allows participating soldiers leaders and units to discover for themselves what happened during the training why it happened and how it can be done better The AAR is a professional discussion that requires the active participation of those being trained FM 7 0 provides detailed instructions for conducting an AAR and detailed guidance on coaching and critiquing during training 1 7 NCO SELF DEVELOPMENT AND THE SOLDIER S MANUAL a Self development is one of the key components of the leader development program It is planned progressive and sequential program followed by leaders to enhance and sustain their military competencies It consists of individual study re
284. lopment domains Together these domains interact using feedback and assessment from various sources and methods to maximize warfighting readiness Each domain has specific measurable actions that must occur to develop our leaders Figure 1 1 Army Training and Leader Development Model 3 The operational domain includes home station training CTC rotations and joint training exercises and deployments that satisfy national objectives Each of these actions provides foundational 1 2 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG experiences for soldier leader and unit development The institutional domain focuses on educating and training soldiers and leaders on the key knowledge skills and attributes required to operate in any environment It includes individual unit and joint schools and advanced education The self development domain both structured and informal focuses on taking those actions necessary to reduce or eliminate the gap between operational and institutional experiences 4 Throughout this lifelong learning and experience process there is formal and informal assessment and feedback of performance to prepare leaders and soldiers for their next level of responsibility Assessment is the method used to determine the proficiency and potential of leaders against a known standard Feedback must be clear formative guidance directly related to the outcome of training events measured against standards c Leader Training and Leader Devel
285. ly d Verify that multiplexing equipment is operating correctly 3 46 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps e Verify that the upconverter and downconverter are operating correctly f Verify that the transmitter is operating correctly and within the power restraints as set forth in the SAA NOTE The following procedures outline the steps that must be supervised for the shutdown of the terminal performance steps 10 and 11 10 Verify termination of communications a Verify that all users are notified of termination of communications b Verify that permission to deaccess is obtained from the GMF control before termination of communications 11 Ensure equipment shutdown a Verify that the HVPS operation switch is set to STANDBY and HVPS and Klystron are allowed to cool for five minutes before being turned off b Verify that the shutdown procedures are followed IAW appropriate TM for the shelter c Verify that the shutdown procedures are followed IAW appropriate TM for generators Evaluation Preparation Setup Have a copy of the performance steps appropriate TMs and local Unit SOP available Brief soldier Not applicable Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Verified that the generator was set for operation Verified that the transfer box was operational Verified that the antenna elevation safety switch was correctly set Ensured power up procedures for the shelter we
286. mance Steps 1 Verify site selection a Select an area that meets topographical standards as outlined in appropriate TM b Check soil conditions to ensure that it is conducive to proper and effective grounding as well as stability c Ensure that the terminal antenna and equipment are not hampered by electrical interference NOTE Qualified soldiers perform the following performance steps during the actual installation All safety considerations should be observed implemented and adhered to Ensure that proper lifting techniques are used for equipment especially the center reflector of the antenna Verify that soldiers are using the hoist assembly if applicable 2 Verify generator positioning a Ensure generators are correctly located IAW appropriate TM and unit SOP b Ensure generators are correctly grounded c Ensure the transfer box is properly positioned and grounded 3 Verify shelter installation a Ensure the shelter is properly anchored b Ensure the shelter ladder is installed and properly secured c Ensure the external cables are properly connected on curbside interface d Ensure the external cables are properly connected on roadside interface e Ensure the shelter is properly grounded f Ensure all air vents on the shelter are opened 4 Verify the assembly of the antenna support structure a Ensure proper antenna ground pad positioning b Check the installation of front and rear leg assemblies c Check base
287. mation and guidance in conducting individual training in the unit and aid the soldier officer noncommissioned officer NCO and commander in training critical tasks They consist of Soldier s Manuals Trainer s Guides Military Qualification Standards Manuals and Officer Foundation Standards System manuals Soldier s manual SM List critical task summaries for a specific MOS and skill level SL provide conditions standards and performance measures for each critical task and are the base documents for all MOS specific individual task training and evaluation 19 May 2005 Glossary 9 This page intentionally left blank STP 11 25814 SM TG REFERENCES Required Publications Required publications are sources that users must read in order to understand or to comply with this publication Army Regulations AR 190 13 AR 190 51 AR 25 11 AR 25 400 2 AR 25 55 AR 310 50 AR 380 40 AR 380 5 AR 420 90 AR 70 1 AR 725 50 Department of Army Forms DA FORM 12 R DA FORM 17 DA FORM 17 1 DA FORM 2028 DA FORM 2404 DA FORM 2407 DA FORM 5988 E DD FORM 314 19 May 2005 The Army Physical Security Program Item only produced in electronic media and included on EM 0001 30 September 1993 Security of Unclassified Army Property Sensitive and Nonsensitive 30 September 1993 Record Communications and the Privacy Communications System Item only produced in electronic media and included 0001 4 S
288. media and included on EM 0169 15 March 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate DS Maintenance Manual for Medium SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 52 V 1 Fixed Earth Terminal Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 3 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 March 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate DS Maintenance Manual for Medium SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 52 V 1 Fixed Earth Terminal Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 2 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 March 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 1 Fixed Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 March 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance M
289. ments Assist in contingency planning exercises as necessary Provide the RSSC after action reports for each mission Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Identified and determined terminal assets and configurations required for mission support Refer to TM 11 5895 1448 10 paragraph numbers are identified at the end of each subtask a Determined data rate requirement for the exercise paragraph 6 2 b Determined method of communication to be utilized paragraph 6 4 c Prepared the LRM Configuration Worksheet paragraph 6 10 d Prepared the Terminal Configuration Worksheet paragraph 6 9 e Prepared the Terminal Deployment Authorization paragraph 6 12 3 82 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 2 Submitted communications requirements to DISA MSO for approval and assignment of a URDB number 3 Coordinated DSCS GMF gateway assignment with the appropriate DISA element prior to formally submitting the SAR 4 Prepared the SAR IAW ASC 1 5 Generated and submitted the SAR to the appropriate RSSC 6 Coordinated between the RSSC and the mission area commander to modify mission plans when DSCS satellite resources were not available for the desired mission support 7 Developed modified SARs as necessary to respond to user request for changes in SATCOM services during a mission 8 Coordinated with the
290. minal antenna and equipment were not hampered by electrical interference 2 Determined antenna siting points for correct azimuth a First siting point b Second siting point 3 Positioned generator set a Placed generators in proper location b Grounded generators c Positioned and grounded transfer box 4 Assembled antenna a Positioned antenna ground pad b Connected front and rear leg assemblies c Connected Center Base Frame Member d Checked azimuth on antenna and moved structure to correct azimuth alignment e Connected right and left Front Base Frame Members f Connected right and left Base Frame Members damage will occur if stood on Connected right and left side leg assemblies Checked and leveled antenna Placed center section on antenna support structure Mounted disk drive and left trailing arm Checked and leveled antenna Installed elevation and cross elevation actuators to disk drive Attached antenna pedals and latched locked in place Attached lightning rod Installed feed tube Set antenna on the correct elevation as shown in the SAA 5 Positioned shelter vehicle 6 Installed antenna cables a Grounded antenna b Attached all cables to both the antenna and shelter c Installed messenger strap cable between shelter and antenna to support cables 7 Installed site power
291. n a Ensure soldiers select an area that meets topographical standards as outlined in the appropriate TM b Check soil conditions to ensure that it is conducive to proper and effective grounding as well as stability c Ensure the terminal antenna and equipment are not hampered by electrical interference NOTE The following performance steps are to be performed during the actual installation by qualified soldiers All safety considerations should be observed implemented and adhered to Ensure that proper lifting techniques are used for equipment especially the center reflector of the antenna Verify that soldiers are using the hoist assembly if applicable 2 Verify generator positioning a Ensure generators are correctly located IAW the appropriate TM and SOP b Ensure generators are correctly grounded c Ensure that the transfer box is properly positioned and grounded 3 Verify shelter installation Ensure the shelter is properly anchored b Ensure the shelter ladder is installed and properly secured c Ensure external user cables are properly connected on curbside interface d Ensure external user cables are properly connected on roadside interface e Ensure the shelter is properly grounded f Ensure all air vents on the shelter are opened ie 4 Verify proper antenna support structure assembly a Ensure proper antenna ground pad positioning b Check installation of front and rear leg assemblies c Check base fr
292. n The Unit Platform name will appear in the Address window pane on the right side of the dialog box NOTE If the user cannot find the Unit Platform name use the search button by selecting the search text box typing the name and selecting the Search button If the name was spelled exactly the way it is in the UTO then the name would highlight in the Select From window pane The user can then select the Add button which would place the Unit Platform name in the Addresses window pane Do the same for all the unit platform names that the message will go to n Select the OK button The system will return to the Messages dialog box Select the Execute button The system will display the Personnel Status Report dialog box p Select the New button The system will display the Add Personnel Record dialog box q Select the Last Name text box or the virtual keyboard and type the last name of the individual that the user is entering data for NOTE Do the same for the First Name Middle Name Suffix and SSN r Select the Nationality pull down arrow The system will display the available options s Select the Nationality of the individual The system will display the Nationality in the text box NOTE Do the same for Religion Blood type Unit Name Role ID Grade MOS and Status t Select the Male or Female radio button for the individual you are entering data for u Select the Apply button The system will apply the data and presen
293. n as shown in the SAA 6 Install antenna cable a Attach all cables to both the antenna and shelter b Install cable messenger strap to support cables from shelter to antenna c Ground antenna WARNING Care must be taken when installing the waveguide Verify that the O ring is present and that the waveguide is properly seated against interlock sensor Check for cracks and dents in waveguide Improper installation may inhibit communications cause serious damage to equipment or result in injury to personnel 7 Anchor antenna a Place antenna anchors b Secure antenna anchors to antenna 8 Install ground and power cables 9 Install external user cables 10 Install sun shade if appropriate 11 Install radiation hazard fence a Install hazard fence ensure signs are properly spaced and visible b Secure hazard fence 12 Site power a Connect power cables to transfer box b Install shelter power cable from transfer box to shelter 13 Position fire point a Place fire point at midpoint between the generator set and the shelter b Ensure that the fire point has all necessary items as per SOP Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Performed site selection procedures Positioned generator Installed shelter Assembled antenna Verified antenna siting points Installed antenna cables Installed antenna anchors In
294. n operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system with software version 3 4 loaded precision lightweight global positioning system receiver PLGR enhanced position location radio system EPLRS and single channel ground air radio system SINCGARS with internet controller INC Standards As a minimum you must Employ Map functions to manage and exchange information to include Background type Map scale Zoom Brightness Contrast Grid Coordinate type MGRS accuracy Grid line spacing Grid line color Center on a Unit Platform Center on a location Edit a location View a location in the World map and scroll with the scroll function Performance Steps 1 Select the Map button from the Function Bar or press the F1 key on the keyboard The system will display the Map Control dialog box NOTE The Map Button allows the user to change the background which gives the user more of less detail of the battlefield add grid lines with different color and spacing and center on a known point platform or georeference The Background Tab group is used to choose the Type Scale Zoom magnification and appearance brightness Contrast of the Map display The Four background types are 1 CADRG Compressed Arc Digital Raster Graphics which is the Joint services standard map background product 2 VPF Vector Product Format which is the map that displays major man made and natural features on the SA screen such as cities rail
295. n text box c Select apply The map will center on the location that you picked NOTE Move the Map Control dialog box to the side if it is in the way to see that it centered on the location that the user picked d Select the Edit Locations button The system will display the Edit Map Locations dialog box NOTE The Edit Locations button allows the user to make a map data group for ease of movement on any loaded map e Select the Group Name text box and type a name that the user wants to call the folder or select the virtual keyboard and type the name using the mouse and select OK 5 46 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps NOTE The group name is limited to 20 characters f Select the Location Label text box and type the name that the user wants to call the location or select the virtual keyboard and use the mouse to type the name and select the OK button NOTE The Location Label is limited to 20 characters g Select the Fill Loc button and select a location on the map The Edit Map Locations dialog box will reappear with the location in the Location text box h Select the Apply button The Edit Map Location dialog box will display the new group folder in the window with the Location name under the folder NOTE Now all the user has to do is select the group from the Location tab and center on it i Select close The system will display the Location Tab group j Select the World Coverage button The system w
296. nal antenna and equipment will not be hampered by electrical interference NOTE The following performance steps are to be performed during the actual installation by qualified soldiers All safety considerations should be observed implemented and adhered to Ensure that proper lifting techniques are used for equipment especially the center reflector of the antenna by use of the hoist assembly 2 Position generator a Place generators in correct location IAW appropriate TM and SOP b Ground generators c Position and ground transfer box 3 Install shelter a Anchor shelter b Install and secure shelter ladder c Connect external user cables d Ground shelter e Open all air vents on shelter 4 Assemble antenna a Position antenna ground pad b Connect front and rear leg assemblies c Connect base frame members d Connect side leg assemblies e Check antenna level f Place center reflector on antenna support structure g Attach antenna pedals WARNING The antenna center section is heavy and fragile Special attention must be made to ensure that all portions of the antenna are properly installed secured and mounted on the frame assembly Check the actuators and the protective boots to see if damage occurred during installation 19 May 2005 3 31 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 5 Verify siting points a Set antenna on the correct azimuth as shown in the SAA b Set antenna on the correct elevatio
297. nces Required Related TB 43 0129 TM 11 5895 846 14 TM 9 6115 464 12 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Supervise the Operation of Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V 113 610 7001 Conditions Given an AN USC 28 V Network Control Book NCB SECRET keying materials SECRET KAO 184A TSEC KYK 13 KOI 18 fill cable DISA circulars 800 E70 7 for the network control terminal NCT 800 E70 8 for the alternate network control terminal ALTNCT 800 E70 9 for the network terminal NT and 800 E70 11 for AN GSC 49 terminals TM 11 5895 808 13 1 TM 11 5895 808 13 10 and TM 11 5895 1179 13 KY 883 and unit SOP Standards Correctly configured all equipment and equipment was operational Performance Steps 1 Verify that the AN USC 28 V is powered on IAW the procedures outlined in the applicable TM 2 Verify that the program tape loading procedures are accomplished IAW the procedures outlined in the applicable TM 3 Verify that the initialization procedures are performed IAW the applicable TM NOTE Performance steps 4 through 10 pertain to configuration and operation of the control synchronization unit CSU 4 Verify that the CSU is configured as the NCT or NT as applicable 5 Verify that the unit test equipment UTE is configured and operating for critical control circuit CCC terrestrial critical control TCC unit operation 6 Verify that the TSEC KG 84 CCC TCC is configured and loaded for network operations
298. nd SOI information from ANCD to ANCD loaded SINCGARS radio with COMSEC variables using ANCD and obtained SOI information from ANCD corrected all errors within 15 minutes Performance Steps 1 Transfer COMSEC keys SOI information from ANCD to ANCD a Turn on both ANCDs b Make main menu selection ANCD c Make source ANCD menu selections d Make target ANCD menu selections e Transfer data from ANCD to ANCD f Turn OFF disconnect ANCDs 2 Load radio from ANCD using Mode 2 fill Turn radio and ANCD power ON Make main menu selection on ANCD Make application menu selection on ANCD Set controls of radio and connect to ANCD with fill cable Transfer Mode 2 fill from ANCD to radio f Disconnect ANCD from radio and turn ANCD power OFF 3 Obtain SOI information from ANCD a Turn ANCD power ON b Make main menu selection c Make SOI menu selection d Turn ANCD power OFF 4 Perform PMCS on ANCD a Make a visual inspection of the ANCD b Check the battery c Check the fill port CIK port d Record entries on DA form 2404 Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Transferred COMSEC data and information from ANCD to ANCD 2 Loaded radio from ANCD using Mode 2 fill 3 Obtained SOI information from the ANCD 4 Performed PMCS on ANCD 19 2005 5 1 STP 11 25814 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all s
299. nd how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG References Required Related DA FORM 2404 DA FORM 2407 DA PAM 738 750 TM 11 5895 1196 13 2 TM 11 5895 1196 13 3 TM 11 5895 1196 13 5 TM 11 5895 1196 13 6 TM 11 5895 1197 13 3 TM 11 5895 1197 13 4 TM 11 5895 1197 13 6 TM 11 5895 1197 13 7 19 May 2005 3 19 STP 11 25814 SM TG Maintain SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 78C AN GSC 39C or AN GSC 52A 113 590 3171 Conditions Given a SATCOM terminal AN GSC 78C AN GSC 39C or AN GSC 52A and appropriate IETM to conduct the proper procedures to restore the terminal to an operational condition Standards SATCOM terminal AN GSC 78C AN GSC 39C or AN GSC 52A was restored to an operational condition Performance Steps 1 Determine through necessary means that an unusual condition exists a Normal weather conditions b Unusual power conditions c Unusual equipment conditions 2 Reference individual unusual condition in the IETM 3 Perform require steps to operate the system under unusual conditions per IETM instructions Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Determined through necessary means that an unusual condition exists 2 Referenced individual unusual conditions on the IETM 3 Performed required steps to operate the system under unusual conditions as per the IETM instructions Evaluation Guidance Score the so
300. nd replacement of defective equipment located in the AMG Ensure the supervisor verifies the following performance steps 5 Verify that the operator determines the faulted portion in the AMG 6 Ensure the operator inspects all components and cables for defects and proper connections 7 Verify that the operator isolates fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment 8 Verify that the operator correctly repairs the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM 9 Ensure the operator verifies the successful repair of the AMG by testing operating NOTE The following performance steps are performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the SGG Ensure the supervisor verifies the following performance steps 10 Verify that the operator determines the faulted portion of the SGG 11 Ensure the operator inspects all components and cables for defects and proper connections 12 Verify that the operator isolates fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment 3 88 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 13 14 Verify that the operator correctly repairs the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM Ensure the operator verifies the successful repair of the SGG by testing operating NOTE The following performance steps are performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in
301. nd selecting the search button The unit will highlight in the Selected From windowpane s Select the Add button The unit will display in the right window pane under the Addresses tab NOTE Do the same for all the Unit Platforms that the user wants the message to go to t Select the OK button The system will return to the Using Default CTILS dialog box u Select the Send CTILs button The system will display a CTILs Sent dialog box v Select the OK button The system will return to the Using Default CTILS dialog box w Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen 5 Create and send a LOG Call for Support NOTE The LOG Call for Support is threaded messages that the operator can send to request logistic support Typically a call for support is sent through the chain of command to the supporting unit using the LOG Call for Support message Orders Requests Select the Messages button on the Function Bar or the F4 button on the keyboard Select the Create tab The system will display the Create tab group Select the Orders Requests radio button The radio button will highlight Select the LOG Call for Support message The message will highlight e Select the Execute button The Create LOG Call for Support dialog box will display NOTE The fields with red fonts with front of them under the Outline tab the mandatory fields that must be entered in order to send the messag
302. nditions Given unit standing operating procedure SOP unit OPORD OPLAN and appropriate map s with areas marked to indicate equipment location Standards Selected Signal site which met requirements specified in the unit OPORD OPLAN placed stakes to indicate equipment location and prepared the site layout and strip maps Performance Steps 1 Determine specific site requirements a Logistics b Equipment c Personnel 2 Conduct preliminary site selection using map 3 Determine site suitability a Accessibility i e Can the site be reached regardless of the weather or time of year What must travel the roads paths What is the condition of those roads paths b Terrain i e Is it relatively flat and well drained c Camouflage concealment i e Does the potential site provide overhead camouflage and concealment d Technical suitability i e Is the site location within the range capabilities and limitations of equipment to be deployed e Dependability 4 Stake equipment locations time permitting 5 Prepare strip maps to indicate route of travel to site Evaluation Preparation Setup The unit OPORD OPLAN appropriate maps and transportation will be provided Brief Soldier You will select a site drive and mark stakes to indicate equipment locations at the site and prepare strip maps Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Determined specific site requirements a Logistics b
303. ndividuals must demonstrate proficiency on the selected tasks prior to the conduct of training 3 Commanders with their subordinate leaders and trainers conduct site reconnaissance identify additional training support requirements and refine and issue the training execution plan The training plan should identify all those elements necessary to ensure the conduct of training to standard Rehearsals are essential to the execution of good training Realistic standards based performance oriented training requires rehearsals for trainers support personnel and evaluators Preparing for training in Reserve Component RC organizations can require complex pre execution checks RC trainers must often conduct detailed coordination to obtain equipment training support system products and ammunition from distant locations In addition RC pre execution checks may be required to coordinate Active Component assistance from the numbered CONUSA training support divisions and directed training affiliations 1 6 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG b Conduct of Training Ideally training is executed using the crawl walk run approach This allows and promotes an objective standards based approach to training Training starts at the basic level Crawl events are relatively simple to conduct and require minimum support from the unit After the crawl stage training becomes incrementally more difficult requiring more resources from the unit and home station
304. nduct operations 3 Ensured the CSU was configured and operated properly 4 Ensured coordinated ECCM was conducted IAW SOP and appropriate TM s 5 Ensured the COMM RT was configured and operated properly Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related DISA CIR 800 E70 11 DISA CIR 800 E70 7 DISA CIR 800 E70 8 DISA CIR 800 E70 9 NCB TM 11 5895 1179 13 TM 11 5895 808 13 1 TM 11 5895 808 13 10 UNIT SOP 3 96 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Direct the Maintenance of Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V 113 610 7004 Conditions Given an AN USC 28 V NCB SECRET keying materials SECRET KAO 184A TSEC KYK 13 KOI 18 fill cable DISAC 800 E70 7 for the DISAC 800 E70 8 for the ALTNCT DISAC 800 E70 9 for the NT and DISAC 800 E70 11 for AN GSC 49 terminals TM 11 5895 808 13 1 TM 11 5895 808 13 10 and TM 11 5895 1179 13 KY 883 and site SOP Standards Correctly completed all performances measures Performance Steps 1 2 Ensured PMCS are accomplished IAW appropriate TMs Ensured supervisor s apply proper fault isolation techniques upon recognition of equipment and or system failure Ensured commun
305. nfiguration 19 May 2005 3 65 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps Verify that the operator configures the COMM RT IAW applicable TM and NCB and that the COMM 11 12 13 14 15 RT is scheduled Verify that the UTE is configured and operating in the link orderwire LOW mode Verify that the KG 84 is configured and loaded for LOW network operations Verify that the user communications data is established a Ensure the operator loads and initializes the KGV 9 b Verify the performance of the user data links Verify that the operator sends the proper status reports as required by DISA circulars to the NCT as scheduled or requested Performance Measures 1 3 Verified that the AN USC 28 V was powered on IAW procedures outlined in the applicable TM Verified that the program tape loading procedures were accomplished IAW procedures outlined in the applicable TM Verified that initialization procedures were performed IAW the applicable TM NOTE Performance measures 4 through 10 pertain to the configuration and operation of the CSU 4 5 6 7 8 Verified that the CSU was configured as NCT or NT as applicable Verified that the UTE was configured and operated for CCC TCC unit operation Verified that the TSEC KG 84 CCC TCC was configured and loaded for network operations Ensured the operator entered the ECCM network in TDI or TIME APPROX Ensured the operator exited the ECCM network an
306. ng performance steps 25 26 27 28 29 Verify that the operator determines the faulted portion of the Antenna Group Ensure the operator inspects all components and cables for defects and proper connections Verify that operator isolates fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment Verify that the operator correctly repairs the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in appropriate TM Ensure the operator verifies the successful repair of the Antenna Group by testing operating NOTE The following performance steps are for the AN TSC 86 only Ensure the supervisor verifies the following performance steps 30 31 32 33 Verify that that operator isolates failure to correct faulted equipment Verify that the operator transfers to standby equipment if available If standby equipment is not available ensure the soldier prioritizes circuits to receive restored service Verify that the operator isolates fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment Verify that the operator correctly repairs the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in appropriate TM 19 May 2005 3 89 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 34 Ensure the operator verifies the successful repair of the system by testing operating NOTE The following performance step is completed after communications has been completely restored 35 Review both DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407
307. ng Route of March to determine the Flank Line of Sight areas that exceed the vehicles maximum uphill and downhill degree of grade degree of side slope for each segment of the route the 360 degree Line of Sight at any point along the route the travel time of each leg of the route and show a graphical profile of each segment of the route 2 The Route Data on the right side of the Analyze Route dialog box shows the name of the route how many waypoints are on the route and the length of the route in Km The Segment Data shows the grid of the Start point and End point and the Segment length To find out what the length of the other segments just click on the right arrow underneath the Show Segment Profile Each time the arrow is selected it will show the next segment a Select the Virtual Keypad under the Flank Line of Sight Data for the Range The system will display the Virtual Keypad on the screen b Enter the appropriate range in meters between 1 and 100000 by selecting the numbers with the mouse and selecting the OK button The system will display the numbers in the text box NOTE Do the same for the Distance Above Ground m Maximum Uphill Grade Maximum Downhill Grade Max Slope and Rte Width m c Select the Color pull down arrow and select a color from the list The color will be displayed in the Color text box NOTE The color is the color that the shading will be on the screen when the line of sight is displayed
308. nic copy is available at http www apd army mil b Enterthe task title and 10 digit task number from the soldier s manual task summary in Chapter 3 c In column a enter the number of each performance measure listed under the Performance Measures section in the task summary d column b enter the performance measure corresponding to the performance measure number in column a You may abbreviate this information if necessary e Enter the Evaluation Guidance statement from the soldier s manual task summary just below the last performance measure f Locally reproduce the partially completed form if you are evaluating more than one soldier on the task or the same soldier on more than one task B 3 During the evaluation a Enter the date just before evaluating the soldier s task performance b Enterthe evaluator s name and the soldier s name and unit c For each performance measure column b enter a check in column c PASS or column d FAIL as appropriate d Compare the number of performance measures the soldier passes and if applicable which ones against the task standard shown in the Evaluation Guidance statement If the standard is met or exceeded check the GO block under STATUS otherwise check the NO GO block Figure B 1 is a sample of a completed DA Form 5164 R 19 May 2005 B 1 STP 11 25814 SM TG HANDS ON EVALUATION DATE For use of this form see AR 350 57 The proponent agency is ODCSOPS 2 FEB 2004
309. nic media and included on 0001 Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet Item only available in electronic media Maintenance Request Equipment Inspection Maintenance worksheet EGA Only available in electronic media Preventive Maintenance Schedule and Record Available through normal publishing channels and included on EM 0001 References 1 STP 11 25814 SM TG Department of Army Pamphlets DA PAM 25 30 DA PAM 25 33 DA PAM 25 40 DA PAM 710 2 1 DA PAM 738 750 Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms Issued Quarterly No Printed Copies Exist Formerly DA PAM 310 1 Item only produced in electronic media 1 July 2003 User s Guide for Army Publications and Forms Item only produced in electronic media and included on EM 0001 15 September 1996 Administrative Publications Action Officers Guide Item only produced in electronic media and included 0001 30 April 2002 Using Unit Supply System Manual Procedures Standalone Pub Item only produced in electronic media and included on 0001 31 December 1997 Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management System TAMMS Item only produced in electronic media and included on EM 0001 1 August 1994 Department of Defense Publications DD FORM 314 Field Manuals FM 101 5 FM 24 1 FM 24 16 FM 3 19 30 FM 3 90 1 FM 7 0 Other Product Types AMDF APPLICABLE TSO ASC 1 CPCI 2 VOL 1 CPCI 2
310. nning repair and replacement procedures on defective equipment restored communications NOTE The following performance measures were performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the AMG Did the soldier ensure that the supervisor verified the following performance measures 5 Verified that the operator determined the faulted portion in the AMG 6 Ensured that the operator inspected all components and cables for defects and proper connections 7 Verified that the operator isolated fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment 8 Verified that the operator correctly repaired the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM 9 Ensured that the operator verified the successful repair of the AMG by testing operating NOTE The following performance measures were performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the SGG Did the soldier ensure that the supervisor verified the following performance measures 10 Verified that the operator determined the faulted portion of the SGG 3 90 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 11 Ensured that the operator inspected all components and cables for defects and proper connections 12 Verified that the operator isolated fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment
311. nt Major Combat Service Support Control System control synchronization unit control terminal control transmitter Combat Training Centers commander s traced items list Department of the Army distribution amplifier Department of the Army Form Department of the Army Pamphlet DSCS auto automatic spectrum analyzer dual capacity servo control unit Digital Communications Satellite Subsystem Department of Defense Form DSCS ECCM control subsystem digital in band trunk signaling Defense Information Systems Agency Defense Information Systems Agency Circular digital message device Defense Message System degrees minutes seconds disaster management team UN DSCS network planning software detailed outage report domain of responsibility DSCS operational support system Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS operations center digital terrain elevation data date time group digital transmission group Glossary 3 STP 11 25814 SM TG DU e g ECCM ECU EOM EPLRS ER ET etc FAMU FBCB2 FCG FCS FDMA FM FRAGO FSSP FT ft GAA GMF GMT GNC GPS GSSC HAZCON HPA HVPS Glossary 4 display unit for example electronic counter counter measures environmental control unit end of message end of mission Enhanced Position Location Reporting System emergency receiver evaluation report earth terminal et cetera and so forth fault alarm monitor unit Force XXI Battle Command Brigade and Below fore
312. ntation of any two or all three measures may be necessary For example if it appears a civil uprising will be of short duration and the cryptofacility will be abandoned for only a short period of time destroy superseded key evacuate future and current key and store all equipment b Evacuation is the removal of COMSEC material to a safe location During evacuation make every effort to prevent loss or unauthorized access from the time of evacuation to the subsequent return of the material to its original location or relocation to a new secure area c Several factors which influence the decision to store or evacuate COMSEC material are the time available the future requirements for the COMSEC material and the bulk and weight of the material d Secure storage during a emergency 1 Secure storage during an emergency is achieved by using authorized vaults safes or a secure room If a secure room is used all classified boards must be removed from nonsecured COMSEC equipment and stored in approved security containers along with classified components and other classified COMSEC material 2 If possible a guard should remain in or near the storage area The presence of a guard does not satisfy the emergency storage requirement it is desirable as a secondary barrier 3 Secure storage is not an effective emergency measure while under the threat of enemy attack 3 Destruction priorities for emergency destruction of COMSEC material are a
313. ntermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Medium Satellite Communications Terminal AN GSC 52 V 2 Vanized Earth Terminal Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 February 1990 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenan
314. ntrol FNC within the Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS 19 May 2005 2 3 STP 11 25814 SM TG CRITICAL TASKS Task Number Title Training Location 113 616 2023 113 616 2028 113 616 2029 113 616 2030 113 616 3131 Conduct Communications Payload Controller CPC Operations within the Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS Conduct Satellite Network Controller SNC Operations within the Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS Conduct Ground Mobile Forces Satellite Communications GMFSC Network Controller GNC Operations within the Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS Conduct Ancillary Equipment Operations within a Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS Operations Center DSCSOC Maintain Defense Satellite Communications Systems DSCS Operations Center Subject Area 9 MILSTAR 113 590 2152 113 590 3172 Operate MILSTAR Command Post Terminal AN FRC 181 V or AN TRC 194 V Maintain MILSTAR Command Post Terminal AN FRC 181 V or AN TRC 194 V Subject Area 10 Communications Set AN USC 28 V 113 610 2046 113 610 3085 Operate Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V AFC Maintain Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V UNIT QT 1 4 QT 1 4 Subject Area 11 Digital Common Core 113 609 2053 171 147 0001 171 147 0005 Operate Automated Net Control Device ANCD AN CYZ 10 PREPARE SEND COMBAT MESSAGES USING FBCB2
315. nts to grab and left click the mouse i Move the pointer to the bottom right of the object and left click the mouse A box will appear over the object and the Overlay Toolbox will reappear NOTE The user can select more than one object by dragging the box over several objects j Select the Edit button The system will display the Overlay Edit dialog box with three sub tabs containing Attributes Labels and Location NOTE This function is used to modify a graphical object s characteristics including affiliation status color mobility size and designation Some of these areas will be grayed out depending on the selected object There is a preview window to view the selected object The two arrows pointing to the left and right are the scroll arrows to move through the selected objects that were grabbed earlier The number on the left of the is the object that is selected for edit and the number on the right of the is the amount of objects that were grabbed 19 May 2005 5 17 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 5 Select the Attributes tab The system will display the Attributes sub tab group NOTE Some functions may be grayed out depending on the object that is selected for edit a Select the Status pull down arrow The system will display the Status menu NOTE This refers to whether an object currently exists at the location Present or in the future could reside at the location Planned b Select the status from the
316. nu The Type name will display in the Type text box e Select the Subtype pull down arrow The Subtype menu will display NOTE The Subtype menu may or may not be available depending on the Dimension or type that was selected in steps 2 and 4 f Select a Subtype from the list The name will appear in the Subtype menu g Select the Attributes button The Symbol Attributes dialog box will display NOTE The Attributes button is done exactly like the Attributes Tab in step a sub step 11 through 20 h Select the OK button after completing the Attributes The Overlay Toolbox will reappear NOTE Do the same for all the symbol that are placed on the overlay 9 Select the UTO sub tab The UTO sub tab group will display NOTE The UTO sub tab allows the user to select unit symbols from various Unit Task Organizations UTO for inclusion in the overlay a Select the Search button The system will display the UTO Search dialog box b Type the Name of the unit in the search text box with the keyboard or the virtual keyboard The name will display in the search text box c Select the Search button The unit will be highlighted d Select an Organization in the Unit column The Organization will be highlighted and the unit symbol appears in the Preview pane in the bottom left hand corner 19 May 2005 5 19 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps e Select the OK button The system will return to the UTO sub tab with the unit name under
317. ny step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related DA PAM 25 30 DA PAM 710 2 1 DA PAM 738 750 DD FORM 314 19 May 2005 3 71 STP 11 25814 SM TG Manage a Publications Library 113 638 6001 Conditions Given AR 25 11 AR 25 400 2 DISA Notice 210 0 1 DA PAM 25 30 DA PAM 25 33 DA PAM 25 40 local and higher headquarters publications indexes and publications procedures DA Form 12 R Request for Establishment of a Publications Account LRA DA Form 17 Requisition for Publications and Blank Forms and DA Form 17 1 Requisition for Publications and Blank Forms Continuation Sheet Standards Established a publications library in the maintenance area with required publications on hand or on order Performance Steps Refer to DA PAM 25 30 for performance steps 1 through 4 refer to DA PAM 25 33 for performance steps 6 through 8 refer to DA PAM 25 40 for performance steps 9 through 11 unless otherwise indicated 1 Determine publications required by shop or section 2 Ensure technical publications on hand or on order are current 3 Ensure doctrinal training and organizational publications on hand or on order are current 4 Ensure administrative publications on hand or on order are current 5 Ensure local and higher headquarters publications are current Refer to local and
318. o Yes No radio button NOTE Select Yes if you want to hear an audible tone when you are reminded or No if you don t want to hear a tone j Place your mouse pointer inside the Reminder Text box and click the left mouse button and type the text that you want to be reminded of 19 May 2005 5 61 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps k Select the Daily tab The system will display the Daily tab fields NOTE The Daily tab is done just like the Once tab The only difference is there is no Month and Day field Select the Weekly tab The system displays the Weekly tab fields NOTE The Weekly tab is done just like the Once tab The only difference is there is you can select more than one day m Select the Monthly tab the system will display the Monthly tab fields NOTE The Monthly tab is done just like the Once tab The only difference is that you can select more than one month to have the reminder n Select the Floating tab The system will display the Floating tab fields NOTE The Floating tab is done just like the Once tab The only difference is you can select more than one month and you can select which week of the month to get the reminder Select the Close button The system closes the Create Reminders dialog box and displays the Ops screen 4 Perform The Personnel Status Report NOTE This function allows the user to update the Personnel Status Report and send it to higher Headquarters At Battalion S1 the
319. o sending the message To take advantage of this capability the default settings should be set for each type of message that the operator is going to use especially for Combat Messages Even if the Default Message addressing has been set for all the message types the message address can be changes from within the Message itself by selecting the Message Addressing button Operators should not change the default settings unless the unit TACSOP directs it 1 Set the Default Message Addressing settings a Select the Messages button from the Function bar or the F4 button on the keyboard The Messages dialog box will display b Select the Create tab NOTE The Create tab group contains the following options 1 Message Type Radio buttons which include Orders Requests Fires Alerts Reports and Overlays 2 Message Sub Type panel which shows a list of the message subtypes 3 Set Default Message Addressing button for setting the default message options for message sub types 4 Edit Address Groups button for creating and editing their own address groups 5 Execute Close and Help buttons c Select a Message Type Radio button Orders Requests Fires Alerts Reports Overlays The radio button will highlight for the message type that was selected and a list of message subtypes will appear in a panel to the right d Select a message subtype from the list by left clicking on the subtype The subtype will highlight NOTE If there is a scr
320. o the Promina 800 Series Operator Interface Manual Chapter 4 Operator Interface Commands 1 Loop the port via the operator interface to verify proper interface performance and to isolate a problem to a specific component or interface NOTE Using the Loop Port command to loop local or remote is independent of setting the loop switch on the card to loop local or remote This is true for data ports but not for trunk and voice cards 2 Loop the card via the operator interface to verify proper interface performance and to isolate a problem to a specific component or interface h Verify establishment of Promina calls routed through the ports query the Call Control Block via the operator interface Refer to the Promina 800 Series Operator Interface Manual Chapter 4 Operator Interface Commands 10 Operate the Switch Multiplexer Unit SMU a Power up the SMU Refer to TM 11 5805 802 13 amp P Chapter 2 for the SMU operating procedures 1 Ensure the SMU is powered and ready for operation a If the SMU is already powered on the Automatic SMU Load procedures may be used in place of the manual start up procedures b If the SMU is initially being powered up perform the manual start up procedures outlined in the TM 2 If the SMU is not powered on follow the start up procedures outlined in the TM a Load the database from DBPOS 1 this is the only position that the Litton Emulator LIM software can load from b If the redundan
321. oard The Messages dialog box will display b Select the Create tab The system will display the Create tab group c Select the Reports radio button under the Msg Type field The Reports radio button will highlight 5 24 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps d Scroll to the Freetext Message in the Msg Type window pane The message will highlight e Select the Execute button The Create Free Text dialog box will display f Type a message in the text window pane with the keyboard or the Virtual keyboard NOTE The user can save the message before being sent or just send it without saving The user can also change the address where the message will be sent by selecting the Message Addressing button g Select the Save As button The system will display the Save As dialog box on top of the Create Free Text dialog box h Select a folder in the window pane to save the message to by highlighting it or create a new folder by selecting the Folder text box and type a name for the new folder and select the Folder button The folder will appear in the Folders window pane Highlight the new folder and select the File text box and type a name for the message that will be save to the folder j Select the OK button The Save As Confirmation dialog box will appear stating Message was saved with an OK button k Select the OK button The system will return to the Create Freetext dialog box Select the Close button The system wi
322. of defective equipment Verify that the operator correctly repairs the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM Ensure the operator verifies the successful repair of the Antenna Group by testing operating NOTE The following performance steps are for the AN TSC 86 only 30 31 32 33 34 Verify that the operator isolates the failure to correct faulted equipment Verify that the operator transfers to standby equipment if available If standby equipment is not available ensure that the soldier prioritizes circuits to receive restored service Ensure the operator isolates the fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment Verify that the operator correctly repairs the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM Ensure the operator verifies the successful repair of the system by testing operating NOTE The following performance step is completed after communications are completely restored 19 May 2005 3 55 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 35 Ensure the operator completes DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407 Performance Measures 1 Verified that the operator checked the alarm monitoring subsystem for visual audible alarm situations 2 Verified that the operator localized fault to a functional uplink downlink or tracking failure 3 Verified that the operator determined the correct functional group
323. of personnel entering or departing 3 Define a buffer zone for more highly classified areas 4 Coordinate with engineer elements for assistance in establishing field fortifications for communication assemblages as required 5 Direct the location and construction of individual and crew served fighting positions a Locate these positions to take maximum advantage of natural cover and concealment b Locate these positions to provide good clear fields of fire so a credible defense of the site is accomplished c Construct individual fighting positions as small as possible but large enough for individual soldiers in full combat gear d Construct overhead protection if time and the tactical situation permit e Construct crew served weapons fighting positions larger than individual fighting positions due to the requirements for two or more soldiers to man the weapons f Construct crew served weapons fighting positions to provide for firing positions for both the crew served weapons and the individual weapons of the soldiers 6 Direct the installation of artificial obstacles as required NOTE Use concertina wire when it is available especially around areas where classified information or materials is located The unit SOP will provide additional guidance on the use of the barrier material 7 Identify and locate focal points for command and control of the site defense 3 102 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps
324. oll bar on the right of the panel then there is more subtypes below e Select the Default Message Addressing button The Message Addressing dialog box will display NOTE This Message Addressing dialog box contains two tabs The Message Settings tab and the Addresses tab f Select the Message Settings tab 19 May 2005 5 9 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps NOTES 1 This tab contains four areas 1 Precedence for Emergency Flash Immediate Priority and Routine 2 Acknowledge Check boxes for MA Machine Acknowledge OA Operator Acknowledge and OR Operator Response MA OA and may be grayed out depending on the message subtype that was selected 3 Security Level Sets the Security level of an outgoing message Grayed out Only available when FBCB2 System is in the Classified mode 4 Perishability DTG Indicates when the message is no longer valid and is not a function of the Default Message Addressing settings 2 The Precedence radio button allows the user to set the message precedence for the selected message subtype The system places the selected precedence in the message header of the outgoing messages This directs the receiving FBCB2 System to place the message into the appropriate incoming message queue The message precedence also ties to the priority the INC uses to forward the message for delivery g Select Precedence radio button The radio button will highlight h
325. on EM 0169 15 June 1997 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Radio Frequency Interconnecting Subsystem AN FSQ 150 15 January 1988 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Modem Group OM 73 V G Electronic Equipment Frame MT 6446 6 Modem Controller C 11640 G Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 1 October 1989 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Network Control Subsystem AN FSC 96 Item also produced in electronic media 15 September 1993 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Network Control Subsystem AN FSC 96 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 September 1993 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Network Monitoring Subsystem AN GSC 51 V 1 and AN GSC 51 V 2 15 September 1993 References 7 STP 11 25814 SM TG TM 11 5895 1358 13 2 TM 11 5895 1368 13 TM 11 5895 1398 13 TM 11 5895 1399 13 TM 11 5895 1401 34 TM 11 5895 1402 34 TM 11 5895 1410 13 TM 11 5895 1433 12 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1433 34 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 TM 11 5895 1434 34 TM 11 5895 1448 10 TM 11 5895 1531 30 References 8 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Network Monitoring Subsystem AN GSC 51 V 1 and AN GSC 51 V 2
326. on from the Function Bar or press the F1 key on the keyboard Select the Background tab if it is not selected Select the Grid tab Select the Center tab Select the Unit Platform tab if it is not already selected Select the Location tab Select the Scroll Tab N OI FB Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG EMPLOY FIPR FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0019 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system with software version 3 4 loaded precision lightweight global positioning system receiver PLGR enhanced position location radio system EPLRS if equipped and single channel ground air radio system SINCGARS with Internet controller INC Standards As a minimum you must Employ screen operations functions to manage and exchange information to include Displaying messages in the FIPR queue Identifying if the message is an Alert the time the message was sent the Message type if an Operator response is required who the Source Originator is the Address type type of Danger Zone distance to the danger zone direction to the danger zone location of the danger zone Originator of the danger zone and view the alerts in the marquee Performanc
327. on the map d Select the box next to the Show Segment Profiles The system will display the Segment Profile dialog box showing the line of sight for that particular segment To show the next segment profile just select the right arrow underneath the Show Segment Profile e Select the box to the left of the Show Segment Profile to uncheck it The Segment Profile dialog box will disappear f Select the Execute button The system will re display the route with red for the areas that have difficulty due to the side slope and Green in areas that are Passable g Select the Show Segment Details button The system will display the Segment Details dialog box on top of the Analyze Route dialog box NOTES 1 If the dialog box is in the way of the Analyze Route dialog box and the route itself then left click on the dark gray area of the dialog box and drag it out of the way The user should be able to have both the Segment Details and the Analyze Route dialog boxes on the screen and still view part of the route 2 The Segment Details dialog box will appear with the side slopes and grids of the difficulty areas of the first segment unless the first segment is passable without difficulty If the segment is passable without difficulty then the Segment Details dialog box will display Segment is passable If the Segment is not passable or has difficulty then the dialog box will display the side slope percentage and the grid of each area that has some dif
328. ontrol Equipment in a Defense Satellite Communications System DSCS Operations System DSCSOC 113 616 7036 Conditions Given shift personnel to maintain the DECS DFCS RFIS FCS PTF SATCOM Set AN USC 28 FMOW and TMDE while working ina DSCSOC and DA Form 2407 DA Form 5988 E DA PAM 738 750 TM 5895 1188 12 TM 11 5895 1188 34 TM 11 5895 1328 13 TM 11 5895 1328 23P TM 11 5895 1357 1 TM 11 5895 1357 2 TM 11 5895 1368 13 TM 11 5895 1399 13 TM 11 5895 808 13 1 through TM 11 5895 808 13 11 and TM 11 5895 808 23P Standards Successfully supervised operators while any of the DSCSOC equipment that was faulted was restored to an operational condition repaired replaced equipment and completed the appropriate maintenance forms Performance Steps NOTE The following performance steps are initiated upon recognition by the operator of a faulted condition in one of the major components at the DSCSOC The supervisor will ensure that the operators take appropriate actions as directed in the operator level critical tasks that cover the specific piece of equipment and IAW governing regulations TMs SOPs 1 Ensure operators properly maintain the RFIS a Verify that operators route signals to redundant spare equipment or path to restore communications before attempting to repair replace faulted portion of the RFIS b Verify that operators isolate the faulty component of the RFIS and perform repair replacement as dictated in the appropriate TM
329. op of the Line Of Sight dialog box just drag the LOS dialog box over so both dialog boxes can be seen The dialog box displays the Line of sight in the form of a graph from the start to the end point Anything above the yellow line is dead space It shows the distance in Km along the bottom and the Height in Ft on the left side of the dialog box g Select the Start point on the map by placing the cursor over the White circle with an S in it and left clicking the mouse holding it and dragging the Start point around NOTE Notice how the view changes on the LOS dialog box as the Start point is moved h Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen 3 Perform the Periodic Reminders function NOTE The Periodic Reminders tool allows the user to create and store message reminders that will at a users determined date and time display a reminder dialog box with a user created text message d time There is an option to trigger an audio alert when the reminder is displayed Zulu time Greenwich Mean Time GMT is the standard a Select the Apps button from the Function bar or the F7 key on the keyboard The system will display the Apps dialog box with the FBCB2 tab selected NOTE The Reminders dialog box has six common push buttons that are in each of the five tabs consisting of OK which applies the changes and closes the dialog box Apply which applies the changes and keeps the dialog box open Defaults which sets t
330. operator correctly troubleshoots and restores the TD 1337 TSSP IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual 7 Ensure the operator correctly troubleshoots and restores the MIDAS IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual 8 Ensure the operator correctly troubleshoots and restores the OM 73 IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual 9 Ensure the operator correctly troubleshoots and restores the MD 1352 BEM IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual 10 Ensure the operator correctly troubleshoots and restores the CQM 248A IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual 11 Ensure the operator correctly troubleshoots and restores the Promina IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual 19 May 2005 3 49 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 12 13 14 15 Ensure the operator correctly troubleshoots and restores the SMU IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual Ensure the operator correctly troubleshoots and restores the Timeplex Link2 IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual Ensure the operator correctly troubleshoots and restores the ICC IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual Verify that the operator returns the DCSS to an operational state a Ensure the operator continues to monitor for further alarms b Verify that all pieces of equipment are passing reliable communications traffic Performance Measures 1 2 10 Ensured the operator monitored the DCSS for faulted degraded equipment At first indication of f
331. opment 1 Competent and confident leaders are a prerequisite to the successful training of units It is important to understand that leader training and leader development are integral parts of unit readiness Leaders are inherently soldiers first and should be technically and tactically proficient in basic soldier skills They are also adaptive capable of sensing their environment adjusting the plan when appropriate and properly applying the proficiency acquired through training 2 Leader training is an expansion of these skills that qualifies them to lead other soldiers As such doctrine and principles of training require the same level of attention of senior commanders Leader training occurs in the Institutional Army the unit the CTCs and through self development Leader training is just one portion of leader development 3 Leader development is the deliberate continuous sequential and progressive process grounded in Army values that grows soldiers and civilians into competent and confident leaders capable of decisive action Leader development is achieved through the lifelong synthesis of the knowledge skills and experiences gained through institutional training and education organizational training operational experience and self development Commanders play the key roll in leader development that ideally produces tactically and technically competent confident and adaptive leaders who act with boldness and initiative in dyn
332. or firing positions for both the crew served weapons and the individual weapons of the soldiers 6 Directed the installation of artificial obstacles as required NOTE Use concertina wire when it is available especially around areas where classified information or materials is located The unit SOP will provide additional guidance on the use of the barrier material 7 Identified and locate focal points for command and control of the site defense 8 Planned for orderly withdrawal to include a Specified instructions for destruction of material which cannot be evacuated NOTE In the event it becomes necessary to withdraw from a location materials ranging from classified papers to equipment may have to be destroyed in place The unit SOP will contain instructions for the implementation of site destruction plans The procedures to follow for the destruction of classified material are contained in the performance steps of task 113 573 0001 b Positive controls for implementation of the destruction plan Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related STP 21 1 SMCT FM 21 75 STP 21 24 SMCT TC 24 21 UNIT OPORD UNIT SOP 3 104 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814
333. or s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Modem Group OM 73 V G Electronic Equipment Frame MT 6446 6 Modem Controller C 11640 G Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 1 October 1989 Operator s Unit and Intermediate Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Network Control Subsystem AN FSC 96 Item also produced in electronic media 15 September 1993 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Signal Generator Group 23 November 1994 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Alarm Monitor Group 23 November 1994 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Frequency Transmitter Group 23 November 1994 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Frequency Converter Group 23 November 1994 Operator s and Unit Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminal AN FSC 78B 23 November 1994 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual RF Amplifier 23 November 1994 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Up Down Converter 23 November 1994 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Network Planning Terminal AN UYK 100 MSE This item is included on EM 0075 1 September 1997 Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminals AN FSC 78B V 1 V 2 V 3 V 4 V 5 AN FSC 79A VM V 2 amp AN GSC 39B Ancillary Equipment O
334. oreference that exist as SA within the visible battle space The Unit Platform tab contains Refresh button which refreshes or updates the unit platform options The Search box allows the user to find the desired unit in a quick manner The Details button allows the user to get information about a selected icon The pull down arrow allows the user the ability to center on Friendly Observed Air and Georeference one time unlike the Auto Center button which continually keeps the user s own platform centered If no units of the type exist the system does not display any units a Select the Unit Platform pull down arrow just under the virtual keyboard The system will display four selections NOTE There must be some friendly observed Air and georeference on the map in order to see how the next steps work The user can place some of these on the map by the SALT report in Combat Messages See Task 171 147 0001 Step 2 After putting some icons on the map go back to the Map button Center tab Unit Platform tab and select the refresh button b Make a selection from the list such as Observed The system will display the observed hostile unknown units and platforms available to the user in the window under the Unit Platform tab c Select one of the available Units or platforms from the window under the Unit Platform tab The system will highlight that selection d Select the Apply button The system will center on the Unit Platform that the user selec
335. orm SNC operations Perform CPC operations Perform GNC operations 2 3 4 Perform ENC operations 5 6 Perform FNC operations 7 Perform DSCSOC operations a Restore host earth terminal communications after the DASA monitoring terminal DMT failure 1 Coordinate with the DSCS Global SATCOM Support Center GSSC Support Element GNOSC or RNOSC for implementation of an operational direction message ODM to modify ODBs or in the absence of an ODB use an alpha scenario to support an interim restoral 2 Ensure the host earth terminal supervisor coordinates with users of links to be restored and advises them of the restoral actions This includes providing contact information for the DSCSOC 3 If applicable coordinate handover of networks or monitoring of spacecraft payloads Resolve conflicts with the Operations NCO Office Automation OA and the DSCS GSSC Support Element 4 Ensure the ODB is modified and downloaded 30 minutes prior to restoral 5 Direct the SNC to notify all terminals involved to include the DSCS GSSC Support Element GNOSC RNOSC and ARSPOC of the pending restoral 6 Confirm preliminary user release for restoral through the host earth terminal supervisor 7 Ensure all connections between the DSCSOC and earth terminal are properly marked b Perform 8 hour report analysis c Perform unauthorized user alarm analysis 1 Direct the SNC to take immediate action when a U A is detected by t
336. ort message is used to report an individual unit s multiple units or a compilation of the units commander s tracked items list CTIL and basic required items list BRIL on hand quantities FBCB2 receives LOGSITREP data from other single FBCB2 platforms FBCB2 will not automatically save multiple LOGSITREPs associated with the same unit or operational facility OPFAC new reports will overwrite old ones If the logistics application is active when a Logistics Report message arrives a flag icon appears on the Redisplay button highlighted in yellow 4 Select the Execute button The system will display the LOG Report dialog box with a Roll up tab and a Single tab NOTE The Roll up tab is divided into three areas 1 The operational Information which includes the Reporting DTG Roll up Unit Quantity Displayed Roll up Check box Roll up Comments button and the Subordinate Unit Information 2 The CTIL Data display which includes the Individual items of the CTIL and the Class of supply on the left side 3 The push buttons which include the Roll up Message Addressing Tailor CTILs Select All Send Redisplay Deselect All Save Close Delete Print and Help There will be from two columns to several columns on the Roll up tab depending on the user s duty position The first column is the Roll up column which is the column below the Roll up Comments button The user s column is the column just to the right of the Roll up column If s
337. orting and notification procedures 1 Perform CPC reporting procedures a Prepare out of limits OOL report Prepare receive level monitor transmit level sensor RLM TLS report c Prepare battery reconditioning reports d Prepare eclipse reports e Prepare site status report 2 Perform operational reporting to the SNC and SDC 3 Perform operational reporting to the 3SOPS 4 8 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 8 Perform DOSS operations 9 Perform SCCE operations a Initialize system 1 Apply power 2 Reinitialization system 3 Restart telemetry processing 4 Select dataspan wrap up reports 5 Configure the SCCE equipment b Perform archival activities 1 Mount tapes 2 Label tapes 3 Perform dataspan archive at wrap up 4 Perform dataspan archive after scheduled wrap up 5 Replace closed archive tape 6 Perform tape closeout activities 7 Perform DSPAN c Perform report generation 1 Configure strip chart recorder 2 Analyze dataspan wrap up reports 3 Perform analysis file data plots 4 Obtain telemetry graphic measures and data displays d Reinitialize the SCCE e Perform SCCE shutdown Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Prepared operational logs Established communications payload configurations Maintained communications payload configurations Performed communications payload analysis
338. ottom of the Combat messages dialog box Select the send button The message Last Subsequent Adjust message sent at Date Time Group DTG p Select the close button The system will return to the FIPR button q Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen r Select the FIPR button The system will display the FIPR dialog box 19 May 2005 5 27 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 5 Select the Tab that has the in it The system will display the list of Messages under the Tab that you selected Highlight the MTO message Select the Display button The system will display the Combat Messages dialog box with the Fire Mission Tab and the Summary Sub Tab displayed Select the Mission that you want to put the Check Fire on The mission will be highlighted Select the Check Fire Tab The Check Fire Template will be displayed Select the proper Check Fire Radio button for the action that you want to do NOTE Check Fire Order is for Checking a certain mission Check Fire All is for checking all missions and Cancel Check Fire is for canceling the Check Fire command y 2 Select the send button The system will display Last Check Fire Message sent at DTG in the Message window Select the Close button The system will return to the FIPR dialog box Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen 3 Perform the Check Fire Function NOTE Remember that
339. p MDL to reach the module to be changed 2 Enter correct variables into each selection 7 Operate MD 1352 Bandwidth Efficient Modem BEM a Poll status of all the modems Refer to TM 11 5895 1687 13 amp P page 3 3 Manual Script Remote and Appendix E 1 b Configure the MD 1352 Modulator VLM7650M c Configure the MD 1352 Demodulator card VLM7650D d Configure the MD 1352 Controller e Access the MD 1352 faults by selecting the Fault Status Screen from the VME controller configuration 1 Monitor the MD 1352 faults and alarms 8 Operate the Comquest Modem CQM 248A a Configure the CQM 248A b Perform CQM 248A loopbacks and utilize the built in bit error rate tester BERT 1 Perform CQM 248A intermediate frequency IF loopback with BERT 2 Enable IF loopback via the remote control command 3 Enable CQM 248A built in BERT either by remote or front panel configuration Verify that the Demodulator locks and that the RxSync lights green 4 Perform CQM 248A Near Data Loopback a Select the LB 2 option on the remote control command or the Loopback Near c Monitor CQM 248A status reporting of operating parameters and status conditions 1 Front panel monitoring 2 Remote control command monitoring a ST query b VS query 9 Operate the Promina a Occupy the Promina with appropriate trunk and port cards according to the TSO or GAA 1 Determine the type of trunk card needed along with the inter
340. perator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Reference Signal Generator 23 November 1994 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Communication Subsystem AN USC 63 MIDAS 14 March 2002 Integrated Control Console Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 1 May 1994 Operator s Organization Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Terminal AN TSC 86 13 May 1983 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Antenna AS 3199 TSC Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 3 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 2 June 1981 Operator s Manual for Multiplexer Digital TD 1337 V 1 G TD 1337 V 2 G TD 1337 V 3 G and TD 1337 V 4 G Item also produced in electronic media 20 August 1982 Organizational Maintenance Manual for Multiplexers Digital TD 1337 V 1 G Through TD 1337 V 4 G Item also produced in electronic media 1 November 1982 Operator s Organizational Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual Air Conditioner Compact Vertical 208V 3 Phase 18 000 BTUH Cooling 12 000 BTUH Heating Trane Models 50 60 Hz Model CE20VAL6 and 400 Hz Model CE20VA 19 May 2005 TM 5 4120 222 24P TM CQT 6400 IOM 02 Training Circulars TC 24 21 Training Support Packages CPS2L3 CPS2L4 CPS2L5
341. perators complete DA Form 5988 E and DA Form 2407 19 May 2005 4 25 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures 1 Ensured operators properly maintained the RFIS 2 Ensured operators properly maintained the PTF 3 Ensured operators properly maintained the FCS 4 Ensured operators properly maintained the Satellite Monitoring System DFCS NCT 5 Ensured operators properly maintained the RT Group OW OZ 52 G 6 Ensured operators properly maintained SATCOM Set AN USC 28 Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related DA FORM 2407 DA FORM 5988 E DA PAM 738 750 TM 11 5895 1188 12 TM 11 5895 1188 34 TM 11 5895 1328 13 TM 11 5895 1328 23P TM 11 5895 1357 13 1 TM 11 5895 1357 13 2 TM 11 5895 1368 13 TM 11 5895 1399 13 TM 11 5895 808 13 1 TM 11 5895 808 13 10 TM 11 5895 808 13 11 TM 11 5895 808 13 2 TM 11 5895 808 13 3 TM 11 5895 808 13 4 TM 11 5895 808 13 5 TM 11 5895 808 13 6 TM 11 5895 808 13 7 TM 11 5895 808 13 8 TM 11 5895 808 13 9 TM 11 5895 808 23P 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Subject Area 9 MILSTAR Operate MILSTAR Command Post Terminal AN FRC 181 V or AN TRC 194 V 113 590 2152 Conditions Given an AN FRC 181 V or AN TRC 194 V DISAC 310 70 1 MILSTA
342. plane for bent pins or other mechanical defects 5 Remove the module and ensure that the module s power supply is correctly plugged in If fault is cleared go to performance step 15 6 Replace the power supply If fault is cleared go to performance step 15 7 Replace the display card If fault is cleared go to performance step 15 8 Replace the digital card If fault is cleared go to performance step 15 e Isolate the OM 73 controller s self test failure 1 Replace the digital card If fault is cleared go to performance step 15 2 Replace the display card If fault is cleared go to performance step 15 3 Replace the module and refer to a higher maintenance level f Isolate the OM 73 failure code while performing a commanded self test Value window will display None or give a card fault code Refer to Table 3 4 in TM 9 Troubleshoot the MD 1352 BEM Refer to TM 11 5895 1687 138 amp P a Isolate the MD 1352 BEM faults by the built in alarms and status indicators or by evaluating other visual or reported evidence that the MD 1352 P U is not functioning in a normal manner Refer to Chapter 5 in TM 1 Alarm condition occurs 2 User or remote terminal operator reports a problem 3 Fault found while performing preventive maintenance b Query the MD 1352 alarms c Localize fault to a module Refer to Chapter 5 in TM 19 May 2005 3 9 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps d Temporary patch to a different module
343. plies NOTE The user can only have one scale checked at once so the user must uncheck the scale that the user doesn t want n Select Set Center button and move your cursor over the world map The cursor changes to a square box o Place the cursor over the area on the map that the user wants to center on and click the left mouse button The system will center the SA map on that location p Select the Close button The system will display the Map Control dialog box q Double click on the Defaults folder on the Location Tab Or select the sign to the left of the Defaults folder to open the folder NOTE Notice the list of Different areas that you can center on r Select a location from the list The system will highlight the selection s Select the Apply button The system will center the map on that area and leave the Map Control dialog box open t Select the Close button This will close the Map Control dialog box 19 May 2005 5 47 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 7 Select the Scroll Tab The system will display the Scroll Tab group NOTE This function allows the user to scroll the map display in the direction of the arrow one full screen at a time This is used when the user needs to view an area close by a Select any arrow and watch the map move one screen in the direction that was selected b Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen Performance Measures 1 Select the Map butt
344. plorer menu option on the OSP Menu to display faults and priorities b If fault and fault code are Rack faults Priority 1 fault use the fault code displayed on the OIU Refer to Table 4 2 in TM c Follow the corrective actions as outlined and in the prescribed sequence until all faults are cleared and communications are restored d If fault and fault code are Card faults Priority 2 fault use the fault code displayed on the OIU Refer to Table 4 2 in TM e Follow the corrective actions as outlined and in the prescribed sequence until all faults are cleared and communications are restored 8 Troubleshoot the OM 73 V G Refer to TM 11 5895 1346 13 a Analyze alarms on the controller for the modulator b Isolate the OM 73 failure code while performing a commanded self test Value window will display None or give a card fault code Refer to Table 3 4 in TM c Identify that the controller fails to respond to the remote controller 1 Check controller baud rate If fault is cleared go to performance step 15 Refer to Table 2 4 2 Replace the digital card If fault is cleared go to performance step 15 3 Replace the controller If fault is cleared go to performance step 15 Isolate the OM 73 module s unsuccessful power up Refer to TM 11 5895 1346 13 1 Verify that power is applied to the module 2 Check fuses 3 Verify that all cables are connected to the module 4 Inspect module pins and modem chassis back
345. ponents and cables for defects and proper connections 22 Verified that the operator isolated fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment 23 Verified that the operator correctly repaired the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM 24 Ensured that the operator verified the successful repair of the Transmitter Group by testing operating NOTE The following performance measures were performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the Antenna Group Did the soldier ensure that the supervisor verified the following performance measures 25 Verified that the operator determined the faulted portion of the Antenna Group 26 Ensured that the operator inspected all components and cables for defects and proper connections 27 Verified that the operator isolated fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment 28 Verified that the operator correctly repaired the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM 29 Ensured that the operator verified the successful repair of the Antenna Group by testing operating 19 May 2005 3 91 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures NOTE The following performance measures were for the AN TSC 86 only Did the soldier ensure that the supervi
346. ppropriate TM manufacturer s manual 15 Verified that the operator returned the DCSS to an operational state 3 50 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related IDNX MANUAL TM 11 5805 795 13 TM 11 5895 1215 20 TM 11 5895 1346 13 TM 11 5895 1630 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1686 13 TM 11 7025 221 20 TM CQT 6400 IOM 02 19 May 2005 3 51 STP 11 25814 SM TG Supervise the Operation of the DCSS 113 583 7096 Conditions Given associated DCSS equipment applicable TMs applicable TSOs Unit SOP and operating requirements Standards Successfully completed all supervisory performance tasks Performance Steps 1 Verify that equipment is configured according to appropriate TSO a Verify equipment settings and parameters b Verify equipment patching 2 Ensure the FCC 100 operates IAW TM 11 5805 795 13 a Verify that operators populate and configure the FCC 100 IAW the TSO b Verify that operators monitor the FCC 100 for alarms 3 Ensure the TD 1389 LRM operates IAW TM 11 5895 1215 10 a Verify that operators configure the LRM IAW the TSO b Verify that operators monitor the LRM for alarms 4 Ensure the TD 1337 TSSP operates IAW TM 11 7025 221 10
347. produced in electronic media 1 November 1982 Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Multiplexer Digital TD 1337 V 1 G Through TD 1337 V 4 G 23 June 1983 Functional User s Manual for Direct Support Unit Standard Supply System DS4 Customer User Procedures Divisional and Nondivisional 1 June 1989 19 May 2005 TM 5 4120 243 14 TM 5 6115 545 12 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 9 4120 360 14 TM 9 6115 464 12 TM CQT 6400 IOM 02 Training Support Packages CPS2L3 CPS2L4 CPS2L5 STP 11 25814 SM TG Operator s Organizational Direct Support General Support and Depot Maintenance Manual for air Conditioner Horizontal Compact 18 000 BTU 208 V 3 Phase 50 60 Hertz Harvey W Hottel Model CH20 6 08 American Air Filter Mod 28 October 1971 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Generator Set Diesel Engine Driven Tactical Skid Mtd 60 KW 3 Phase 4 Wire 120 Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 18 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0086 10 June 1973 Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Generator Set Diesel Engine Driven Tactical Skid Mtd 10 KW 1 Phase 2 Wire Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 12 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0086 25 July 1977 Operator Unit Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Air Conditioner Vertical Compact Type 1 Vertical Size C 18 000 BTU HR Class 1 208 Volt 3 Phase 50 60 He
348. propriate maintenance documentation Performance Steps NOTE The following performance steps are for the initial assessment of a failure in SATCOM strategic terminals AN FSC 78 AN GSC 39 AN GSC 52 The supervisor will ensure the operators take appropriate actions as directed in the operator level critical tasks that cover the specific piece of equipment and IAW governing regulations TMs SOPs When the functional group in which the fault is located has been determined find the appropriate section of this task for further steps in restoral of faulted equipment For maintaining the AN TSC 86 see performance steps 30 through 34 1 Verify that the operator checks the alarm monitoring subsystem for visual audible alarm situations 2 Verify that the operator localizes the fault to a functional uplink downlink or tracking failure 3 Verify that the operator determines the correct functional group Alarm Monitor Group AMG CMA subsystem See performance steps 5 through 9 Signal Generator Group SGG See performance steps 10 through 14 Frequency Conversion Group FCG See performance steps 15 through 19 Transmitter Group See performance steps 20 through 24 Antenna Group See performance steps 25 through 29 4 Verify that the operator restores communications by using spare equipment before beginning repair and replacement procedures on defective equipment NOTE The following performance steps are p
349. r IZAP IAW the appropriate TM 6 Ensure the operator removes and replaces failed card or module IAW with the repair and replacement procedures outlined in the appropriate TM 7 Verify that communications are restored and verified by the operator using the digital data test set 8 Verify that the operator properly prepares and submits appropriate maintenance forms for replacement parts or to request a higher maintenance level Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Verified that operational PMCS activities were accomplished 2 Verified that the operator did an initial assessment of failure identifications and determined if failure affected entire system or was a localized failure 3 Verified that the operator localized failure to a specific area 4 Ensured the operator restored communications on redundant equipment alternate path prior to commencing detailed fault isolation 5 Ensured the operator localized failure using directed AFI verify BITE or IZAP IAW the appropriate TM 6 Ensured the operator removed and replaced the failed card or module IAW the repair and replacement procedures outlined in the appropriate TM 3 68 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 7 Verified that communications was restored and verified by the operator using the digital data test set 8 Verified that the operator properly
350. r components accessories and cables are present secured and properly stowed to avoid damage b Check mounting bolts before extensive equipment use c Check the ram ball mount assembly for tightness if equipped NOTE If the processor unit PU display unit DU keyboard unit KU or connecting cables are missing damaged they are not fully mission capable The system is degraded if PLGR SINCGARS or EPLRS if so equipped are missing damaged 2 Check the Touch screen on display unit DU a Check for cracks severe scratches or other damage to the screen NOTE The touch screen is degraded if Touch screen is cracked or has severe scratches that would prevent its proper operation 3 Check the Grounding strap on display unit DU chassis a Conduct visual check to see if the grounding strap is present and tight on the bottom of the DU NOTE The equipment is not fully mission capable if the grounding strap for the DU chassis is missing frayed or disconnected 4 Check the processor unit PU a Check the battery tray battery box inside the PU for charge NOTE The Processor Unit is degraded if Battery charge indicators show that battery s have a low charge no charge For PU with NSN 7025 01 474 3793 press button twice on front of battery box to display diagnostic codes Ensure that code 05 i e Back up Battery Low is not displayed For PU with NSN 7025 01 475 0217 check front of battery tray to ensure that the cha
351. r patch panel b Patch the modem patch panel c Patch the OW patch panel d Patch multiplexer e Patch data patch panel f Patch baseband patch panel g Patch the KG 194 Configure equipment according to TSO GAA SAA and or SOP Access the satellite with controller s permission with a single carrier a Configure equipment for correct frequencies and data rates according to GAA SAA TSO and SOP b Patch equipment c Request permission from satellite controller to access the satellite Verify that the operating data modes rates and inputs are all correct and functional Repeat performance steps 6 through 8 for each carrier Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 1 oO FB W N Operated generator Operated transfer box 2 Set antenna elevation safety switch on antenna Powered up shelter S L Patched cables 2 Configured equipment according to TSO GAA SAA and or SOP Accessed the satellite with a single carrier 3 34 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 8 Verified that the operating data modes rates and inputs were all correct and functional 9 Repeated performance measures 6 through 8 for each carrier Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was
352. r task review performance Evaluate training against established Use SM task summary as standard for standards evaluation Figure 1 2 Relationship of Battle focused Training and STP 1 4 TASK SUMMARY FORMAT Task summaries outline the wartime performance requirements of each critical task in the SM They provide the soldier and the trainer with the information necessary to prepare conduct and evaluate critical task training As a minimum task summaries include information the soldier must know and the skills that he must perform to standards for each task The format of the task summaries included in this SM is as follows a Task Number A 10 digit number identifies each task or skill This task number along with the task title must be included in any correspondence pertaining to the task b Task Title The task title identifies the action to be performed c Conditions The task conditions identify all the equipment tools references job aids and supporting personnel that the soldier needs to use to perform the task in wartime This section identifies any environmental conditions that can alter task performance such as visibility temperature or wind This section also identifies any specific cues or events that trigger task performance such as a chemical attack or identification of a threat vehicle d Standards The task standards describe how well and to what level the task must be performed under wartime conditions
353. r the Message settings and Addresses as in task 171 147 0005 Apply Message Addressing features in FBCB2 Version 3 4 f After setting the Message Addressing settings select the New button on the Personnel Status Report dialog box The system will display the Add Personnel Record dialog box NOTE The New button allows the user to enter information on new personnel by using the Virtual keyboard Computer keyboard Drop down arrows and Radio buttons Notice how the OK and Apply buttons at the bottom of the Add Personnel Record dialog box are grayed out All the fields must be filled out before the buttons will become available 9 Select the Last Name text box with the mouse pointer or select the virtual keyboard and enter the last name in the text box 5 62 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps NOTE If you select the text box you can enter the information with the computer keyboard If you select the virtual keyboard you must type the information by selecting the characters with the mouse pointer The Last Name must not be more than 20 characters long h Select the First Name text box and enter the name NOTE The First Name cannot be more than 10 characters long i Select the Middle Name text box and enter the name if applicable NOTE The Middle name cannot be more than ten characters long j Select the Suffix text box and enter the suffix if applicable NOTE The Suffix cannot be more than three characters long k S
354. r verifies that the operator monitors communications status of equipment and passes the appropriate reports at the designated time IAW governing regulations SOPs TMs 19 May 2005 3 93 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures 1 Ensured the supervisor verified that the operator performed preoperational adjustments and setup IAW appropriate TM and applicable TSO Ensured the supervisor verified that the operator performed satellite acquisition IAW the appropriate TM and governing SOP Ensured the supervisor verified that the operator performed satellite tracking and ensured that the appropriate satellite was acquired by contacting the DSCSOC Ensured the supervisor verified that the operator performed uplink carrier alignment in conjunction with the DSCSOC and IAW appropriate governing regulations TMs SOPs Ensured the supervisor verified that the operator performed uplink carrier level adjustments in conjunction with the DSCSOC and IAW appropriate governing regulations TMs SOPs Ensured the supervisor verified that the operator performed carrier to noise density ration check Ensured the supervisor verified that the operator configured equipment for automatic switchover as applicable Ensured the supervisor verified that the operator preformed uplink and downlink signal traffic monitoring Ensured the supervisor verified that the operator performed terminal equipment selection and status mon
355. rding to site SOP NOTE The File Save menu item is only available to users with an Operator or System Administrator access level e Perform MIDAS end to end and loopback testing as required 1 Select Change Mode from OSP on the Menu tool bar 2 Select the saved file containing the new configuration from the list in the MIDAS Mode Change window 3 Verify that the Operate radio button is selected under Mode and the Full radio button is selected under Type on the MIDAS Mode Change window 4 Click the OK button on the MIDAS Mode Change window 5 Verify that the new configuration is loaded into the MIDAS 6 Begin end to end and loopback testing as required until circuit path successfully passes the verification tests as per SOP f Place MIDAS circuits on line 1 Remove all test equipment inputs to user path and ensure that the circuit path is clear from end to end 2 Place circuit on line and monitor status 6 Operate the OM 73 V G a Perform the OM 73 power up procedures 1 Ensure power light emitting diode LED illuminates 2 Allow module to perform initial self test observing results in the Data Rate window after 10 seconds 3 Verify that the proper module number is shown in the module window 19 May 2005 3 3 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps b Configure the OM 73 Modulator Demodulator and Controller IAW the TSO GAA and or cut sheets 1 Press Edit to enter configuration and use the Ste
356. re j Mount disk drive and left trailing arm k Check and level antenna 19 May 2005 3 21 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps CAUTION When handling actuators DO NOT turn actuator rod on end or protective boot may be damaged DO NOT let fingers get in between cross elevation actuator and its arm or personal injury may occur Check the actuators and the protective boots to see if damage occurred during installation Install elevation and cross elevation actuators to disk drive m Attach antenna pedals and latch lock in place n Attach lightning rod CAUTION Be careful when handling and working with the feed tube assembly and adaptor The feed tube adaptor has a thin membrane which is easily damaged DO NOT allow anything that could damage the feed tube including fingers to come in contact with it Install feed tube p Set antenna on the correct elevation as shown in the Satellite Access Authorization SAA 5 Position shelter vehicle 6 Install antenna cables a Ground antenna WARNING Care must be taken when installing the waveguide Verify that the O ring is present and that the waveguide is properly seated against the interlock sensor Check for cracks and dents in waveguide Improper installation may inhibit communications cause serious damage to equipment or result in injury to personnel b Attach all cables to both the antenna and shelter c Install messenger strap cable between shelter and antenn
357. re Mission Tab and the Summary Sub tab selected Select the On call Fire Cmd Tab The On Call Fire Cmd Template will be displayed with a message saying FO Command to fire the mission will be transmitted by sending this message Select the Send button if the user wants the mission to fire The message Last On Call Fire Cmd message sent at DTG will be displayed in the message window pane Or select the Cancel button to the right of the message window Select the Close button The system will return to the FIPR dialog box Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 5 Perform the End of Mission EOM function NOTE The End of Mission function is used to direct the end of mission processing of a fire mission selected from the Summary tab group and to provide target surveillance and provide Fire mission refinement data a b f g Select the FIPR button The system will display the FIPR dialog box Select the Tab that has the mission that the user wants to associate the EOM to Select the mission from the list by highlighting it Select the Display button The system will display the Combat messages dialog box with the Fire Mission Tab and the Summary Sub tab Select the EOM Tab The system will display the EOM Template Select the EOM Type pull down arrow The system will display End of Mission and End of Miss
358. re followed IAW appropriate TM Ensured proper cable patching Verified equipment configuration 1 OI A Verified that the translator system loop test was successful and was not accomplished while the tracking the satellite 8 Ensured satellite acquisition and tracking 9 Verified equipment operation 10 Verified termination of communications 11 Ensured equipment shutdown Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task 19 May 2005 3 47 STP 11 25814 SM TG References Required Related 19671 REVA 11 10 14 PX19672 REVA 201 113 0321 B PX19674 REV B TM 11 5895 1433 12 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1433 34 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 TM 11 5895 1434 34 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 9 6115 464 12 UNIT SOP 3 48 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Skill Level 3 Subject Area 6 SATCOM Terminal Supervision Supervise the Maintenance of the DCSS 113 583 7095 Conditions Given associated DCSS equipment applicable TMs applicable TSOs Unit SOP and operating requirements Standards Supervised the restoral of the DCSS to include that the equipment completed the self te
359. re is two additional Equipment Combo boxes if there is more than one type of equipment that is observed e Select the activity pull down arrow The system will display the activity options list f Select an option from the list The system displays the selection in the activity combo box g Select the Map button The Combat Messages dialog box will disappear and the mouse cursor will be replaced with the cross hair h Select a location on the map where the target is located The Combat Messages dialog box will reappear with the location in the location text box or select LRF if the user s platform has a Laser Range Finder and Laser the target The location will appear in the Location text box Select the NOW button Or the DTG button to update the Date Time Group 19 May 2005 5 3 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps NOTE The Date Time Group auto fills when the user opens a message but does not update automatically Selecting the NOW button enters the current DTG Selecting the DTG button makes the user manually enter the DTG j Select the Speed pull down arrow The system will display the Speed options list NOTE If you picked stationary for the Activity field then you would select None for speed k Make a selection from the list The system will display the selection in the Speed text box Select the Course pull down arrow The system will display the Course option list m Select the direction that the equipment is moving
360. re the SMU operates IAW TM 11 5805 802 13 amp P Reference Guide and the Global Circuit Switch Quick Reference Guide a Verify that operators configure the SMU IAW the TSO NOTE Reference Task Number 113 583 2625 Operate Digital Communications Satellite Subsystem as well as applicable manuals for specific steps procedures in configuring the SMU b Verify that operators monitor the SMU for alarms 11 Ensure the AN USC 64 ICC operates IAW the applicable manuals a Verify that ICC equipment is configured to monitor correct devices b Verify that operators monitor the ICC for alarms 12 Ensure the Timeplex Link 2 operates IAW the applicable operator s manuals a Verify that the Timeplex Link 2 is configured IAW the TSO b Verify that operators monitor the Timeplex Link 2 for alarms Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Verified that equipment was configured according to appropriate TSO Ensured the FCC 100 operated IAW applicable TM Ensured the LRM operated IAW applicable TM Ensured the TSSP operated IAW applicable TM Ensured the MIDAS operated IAW applicable TM Ensured the OM 73 operated IAW applicable TM Ensured the BEM operated IAW applicable TM Ensured the CQM 248A operated IAW applicable manuals Ensured the Promina operated IAW applicable operator s manuals o
361. rect rack that contains the failure b Identify the correct half rack drawer that contains the failure c Identify the correct half drawer that contains the failure 4 Restore communications on redundant equipment alternate path prior to commencing detailed fault isolation 5 Localize the failure using the directed AFI verify BITE or IZAP IAW the appropriate TM 6 Remove and replace failed card or module IAW with the repair and replacement procedures outlined in the appropriate TM 7 Verify that communications are restored using the digital data test set 8 Complete all maintenance forms for replacement parts or to request a higher maintenance level Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Conducted operational PMCS activities NOTE The following performance measures were performed when the operator discovered a failure or degradation in equipment during the performance of PMCS or during normal operation 2 Conducted an initial assessment of failure identifications and determined if failure affected the entire system or was a localized failure 3 Localized the failure to a specific area 4 Restored communications on redundant equipment alternate path prior to commencing detailed fault isolation 5 Localized the failure using the directed AFI verify BITE or IZAP IAW the appropriate TM 6 Removed and replaced failed card or module IAW with the repair and
362. red b Verify that hazard fence signs are properly spaced and visible 9 Verify site power a Verify that power cables are connected to the transfer box b Verify that the shelter power cable is properly installed from the transfer box to the shelter 10 Verify fire point a Verify that the fire point is placed at midpoint between the generator set and shelter b Verify that the fire point has all necessary items per SOP Evaluation Preparation Setup Have a copy of the performance steps appropriate TMs and local Unit SOP available Brief soldier Not applicable Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Verified selected site Verified generator Verified shelter Verified the assembly of the antenna support structure Verified siting points Installed antenna cable Verified antenna anchor Verified that radiation hazard fence was place Verified site power i cl ON O a A O N Verified fire point Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task 3 44 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG References Required Related PX19671 REVA PX19674 REV B TB 43 0129 TM 11 589
363. rge indicator displays at least three 3 LCD bars 5 Check the Grounding strap on Processor Unit PU chassis a Check to make sure that the Grounding strap is present not frayed or disconnected NOTE The Processor Unit is not mission capable if the Grounding strap is missing frayed or disconnected or the Grounding strap cannot be fastened securely 6 Check the keyboard unit KU a Check KU for non functioning missing alphanumeric or Enter keys NOTE The keyboard unit is not mission capable if it has missing keys or alphanumeric or Enter keys that do not function 19 May 2005 5 35 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 7 Check the cables and connectors a Check for cables with frayed broken or bare wires b Check to see that all cable connectors are properly mated i e only the blue band should be visible NOTE Cables and Connectors are not mission capable if wires or cables are damaged i e frayed broken or bare Connector s are not properly mated and any red band is visible on connector s Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Check the AN UYK 128 V computer Check the touch screen on display unit DU Check the grounding strap on display unit DU chassis Check the processor unit Check the grounding strap on processor unit PU chassis Check the keyboard unit KU Oc FB Check the cabl
364. rgeants 1SGs and then to other NCOs and enlisted personnel NCOs train soldiers to the non negotiable standards published in STPs Commanders 19 May 2005 1 3 STP 11 25814 SM TG delegate authority to NCOs in the support channel as the primary trainers of individual crew and small team training Commanders hold NCOs responsible for conducting standards based performance oriented battle focused training and providing feedback on individual crew and team proficiency Commanders define responsibilities and authority of their NCOs to their staffs and subordinates b NCOs continue the soldierization process of newly assigned enlisted soldiers and begin their professional development NCOs are responsible for conducting standards based performance oriented battle focused training They identify specific individual crew and small team tasks that support the unit s collective mission essential tasks plan prepare rehearse and execute training and evaluate training and conduct after action reviews AARs to provide feedback to the commander on individual crew and small team proficiency Senior NCOs coach junior NCOs to master a wide range of individual tasks 3 Soldier Responsibility Each soldier is responsible for performing individual tasks identified by the first line supervisor based on the unit s mission essential task list METL Soldiers must perform tasks to the standards included in the task summary If soldiers have quest
365. rigade and Below FBCB2 system loaded with software version 3 4 you have received an operation order OPORD to conduct a tactical operation Default Message Addressing settings have been set Standards You must create and send a Orders Requests message with significant and immediate information both horizontally and vertically on the battlefield As a minimum you must create and send an Fragmentary Order Freetext Message MEDEVAC Request CTIL Action and a LOG Call for Support Performance Steps NOTE The LOG Call for Support Operation Order Operations Plan Unit Ref Query and the Warning Order are completed the same way as the Fragmentary Order For each message type that the user wants to complete the user will need to select the Messages button Create tab Orders Requests radio button and then the Message type for each message 1 Prepare and send a Fragmentary Order NOTE Fragmentary Order is an abbreviated version of the Operations Order and is used by the Commander Staff to issue plans orders to subordinate units to effect the coordinated execution of an operation a Select the Messages button on the Function Bar or the F4 button on the Keyboard The system displays the Messages dialog box NOTE The Messages function displays six tabs Send Create Edit Print Manage and Sent Queue b Select the Create tab The system will display the Create tab group NOTE All the Tabs in the Messages dialog box have three
366. roads major roads rivers and lakes 3 DTED Digital Terrain Elevation Data which is the uniform matrix of terrain elevation values and provides basic quantitative data for all Military systems that require terrain elevation slope and surface roughness and 4 Imagery which is Reconnaissance Imagery that can be sent to the FBCB2 and displayed The Map Control dialog box has standard push buttons at the bottom of each tab Set Defaults which sets the current settings as the Map default settings Restore Defaults which changes the current settings to the map default settings the OK button which applies the changes and closes the dialog box the Apply button which applies the changes and keeps the dialog box open the Close button which closes the dialog box and the Help button which provides help on the background tab 2 Select the Background tab if it is not selected The system will display the Background tab group a Deselect CADRG by unchecking the box to the left of CADRG NOTE You must deselect one background type before you select another due to the fact that if you have more then on type selected you might cover information from one map with the other b Select the VPF by placing your cursor in the box to the left of VPF and clicking which will put a checkmark in the box c Select Apply The system will display a light tan colored map with Cities Lakes Rivers Railroads Names and Roads if they are on the map d Se
367. ropriate TMs 4 Directed personnel that maintenance PMCS was completed on roadside equipment a Supervisor verified that weekly and semiannual maintenance was completed IAW appropriate TMs 5 Supervisors verified that all repairs were made and appropriately annotated IAW TMs and that the appropriate paperwork was completed on equipment that had to go to higher maintenance level 3 84 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required DA FORM 2404 DA PAM 738 750 PX19671 REV A PX19672 REV A PX19674 REV B TM 11 5895 1433 12 1 TM 11 5895 1433 12 2 TM 11 5895 1433 34 TM 11 5895 1434 12 1 TM 11 5895 1434 12 2 TM 11 5895 1434 34 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 9 6115 464 12 19 May 2005 Related TM 11 5820 1128 34 TM 11 5895 1127 20 TM 11 5895 1127 34 TM 11 5895 1128 10 TM 11 5895 1128 20 STP 11 25814 SM TG Direct the Operation of SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 85 or AN TSC 93 V 113 589 7125 Conditions Given a SATCOM terminal AN TSC 85 V or AN TSC 93 V installed antenna group AS 3036 TSC installed generator set PU 405A or PU 753 M on a predetermined site on correct azimuth and elevation TM 9 6115 464 12 TM 5 6115 585 12 TM 11 5895 1433 1
368. ropriate TMs b Isolate localize fault to the LRU c Repair replace fault LRU above operator crew level 7 Complete DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407 IAW DA PAM 738 750 Record all deficiencies that cannot be immediately corrected 8 Schedule next PMCS Evaluation Preparation Setup Have a copy of the performance steps appropriate TMs and local Unit SOP available Brief soldier Not applicable Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Performed before during and after PMCS procedures on the following curbside equipment IAW applicable TMs for equipment being inspected a Generators b User entry panels c Signal conditioning equipment d First level multiplexers e Second level multiplexers f Baseband patches and switches g User interface equipment 2 Performed before during and after PMCS procedures for the following roadside equipment IAW applicable TMs for equipment being inspected Modems IF Translator Patch Panel 85 V Modem Patch Panel 93 V Upconverters HPA HVPS Antenna Assembly and AME Downconverters Modem patch panel DCSCU OW unit and patch panel FAMU 3 Performed weekly semiannual maintenance PMCS procedures on curbside equipment listed in performance step 1 IAW applicable TMs for equipment being inspected 4 Performed weekly and semiannual maintenance PMCS procedures
369. rtz KECO Model F18T 2 Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 6 16 September 1993 Operator and Unit Maintenance Manual for Generator Set Diesel Engine Driven Tactical Skid Mtd 15 KW 3 Phase 4 Wire 120 208 and 240 416 Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0086 30 July 1993 CQM 248A PSK Digital Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual Introduction to the MILSTAR System 1 December 2003 MILSTAR Resource Management 1 December 2003 MILSTAR Cryptographic Management 1 October 2002 Related Publications Related publications are sources of additional information They are not required in order to understand this publication Army Correspondence Course Program Subcourses 0104 0218 0404 0603 0606 0609 0584 110588 1000 OD1403 QM2010 QM2386 QM3069 QM6155 550651 19 2005 Administrative Forms Management Program Using Military Publications and Establishing File Modern Army Recordkeeping System MARKS Maintenance Service Records Repair Parts Supply The Unit Maintenance Program Safety Programs Prepare and Maintain Intelligence Situation Map and Associated Overlays Physical Security Training Shop Safely Check the Accuracy of Prescribed Load List PLL Records Establish a Fire Preventive and Safety Program Evaluate Prescribed Load List PLL Procedures Maintain Files of Accounting Records Shop Practices and Safety Refer
370. s Obstacles Points Units and any groups that the user created a Select the Group pull down arrow The system will display the graphic symbol types b Select a graphic type from the list by highlighting it with the mouse pointer The graphic type will display in the Group text box and a list of graphic sub types will display in the preview windowpane below c Select a graphic sub type from the list The selection will highlight and the Add button will become active d Select the Add button The system will display the Map with the Create Object function bar to the right and the cursor will become a cross hair NOTE Some objects require more than one point on the map to be inserted If more than one point is required and the user selects the OK button without selecting the required amount of points the system will display a Warning dialog box saying Requires at least Three points When adding objects that require more then one point a solid white circle will represent each point e Select a location on the map where the object will be inserted The object will appear on the map f Select the OK button The Overlay Toolbox will be displayed NOTE Continue steps 1 through 6 for all the graphics that need to be inserted g Select the Grab button The Overlay Toolbox dialog box will disappear and the cursor will be replaced with the pencil pointer h Place the pointer on the map to the top left of the object that the user wa
371. s Guide MIDAS Promina 800 Series Node Configuration Manual Promina 800 Series Operator Interface Promina 800 Series quick Reference Guide Promina 800 Series Common Equipment Modules Manual Promina 800 Series Trunk Modules Manual Promina 800 Series Voice Modules Manual Promina 800 Series Data Modules Manual X Band Upconverter Model 6166 03 1 May 2000 X Band Downconverter Model 6167 03 1 May 2000 Installation and Operation Model 3501 01 Modem 29 December 1998 Satellite SAT Station EURSAT Product Quality Deficiency Report Available at http www gsa gov SMCT II Training Guide SMCT II Quick Reference Guide DSCS Operational Support System DOSS User Manual 5 January 1990 DSCS Automatic Spectrum Analyzer DASA System User Manual 31 August 1990 Time Division Subsystem Preprocessor TDSPP Positional Handbook TPH Volume 1 Time Division Subsystem Preprocessor 9TDSPP Positional Handbook TPH Volume 2 Unit Unit s Operation Plan OPLAN Unit Unit s Operation Order OPORD Unit Unit s Standing Operating Procedure SOP References 3 STP 11 25814 SM TG Soldier Training Publications STP 21 1 SMCT STP 21 24 SMCT Technical Bulletins TB 11 5820 890 12 TB 380 41 TB 43 0129 Technical Manuals O TM 11 5810 309 10 TM 11 5805 367 12 TM 11 5805 367 34 5 TM 11 5805 688 14 1 TM 11 5805 705 12 TM 11 5805 705 34 TM 11 5805 711 13 TM 11 5805 722 34 TM 11 5805 795 13 TM 11 5805 795 13 amp P
372. s and files will be displayed in the folder window on the right b Select the sign next to a folder that the user wants to manage or double click the folder name which will also open the folder The folder will open and display all the files within that folder 3 Rename a file a Select one of the files listed under the folder that needs to be renamed The file will be highlighted b Select the Name text box at the bottom of the Messages dialog box The cursor will be blinking inside the text box c Type the new name The name will display in the text box d Select the Rename button The file name will be changed and displayed under the folder in Alphabetical Numerical order by file names NOTE If the user typed a name that is not valid a Rename Error dialog box saying This name is not valid please re enter the new message name with an OK button will appear 4 Rename a folder a Select the Folder name from the folders window The folder name will be highlighted b Select the Name text box at the bottom of the Messages dialog box The cursor will be blinking inside the text box c Type the new name for the folder The name will display in the text box d Select the Rename button The Folder name will change and be displayed in Alphabetical Numerical order by Folders 5 Delete a file or folder NOTE The steps for deleting a file or folder are the same a Select a file from one of the folders The file will be hi
373. s is used when the user s platform travels outside its SINCGARS EPLRS network and must join different network in order to continue to receive SA and C2 data There are two areas in the Radio Net Join function the SINCGARS Hop set and the EPLRS Configuration The SINCGARS Hop set displays the current description and frequency identification The EPLRS Configuration changes the network to a different unit s configuration a Select the Apps button from the Function Bar or the F7 key on the keyboard The system will display the Apps dialog box b Select the Radio Net Join function from the list The Radio Net Join will highlight c Select the Execute button The system will display the Radio Net Join dialog box d Select the New FREQ_ID pull down arrow under the SINCGARS Hop set The system will display the SINCGARS Agent Table dialog box with the available Units and Net ID frequencies e Select the Network that you want Select the Change pull down arrow under the EPLRS Configuration The system will display the Unit Name dialog box NOTE Here the user can select new EPLRS network for FBCB2 communication purposes g Select the Network that the user wants to change to h Select OK if you actually want to switch networks or Close to stay in the same configuration Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Perform Drivers Display Function 2 Perform the Line of Sight Function 3 Perform the Periodic R
374. s the new Release point and the Release point becomes the new Start point 6 Select the Route Attributes button The system will display the Route Attributes dialog box NOTE The Route Attributes allows the user to describe the aspects of the route a Select the Route Description pull down arrow The system will display a list b Select an option from the list The option will be displayed in the text box NOTE Do the same for the Route Classification Movement Rate Open Concealed Indicator and Route type c Select the Virtual Keypad to the right of the Overhead Clearance Height m text box The system will display the Virtual Keypad on the screen d Enter the Height in meters by selecting the appropriate keys and selecting the OK button The system will display the Height in the text box NOTES 1 Notice in the Virtual Keypad at the bottom that there is a number that the user must stay within when entering a number 2 Do the same for Traveled Way Width m and Weight Classification tons e Place the cursor in the Comments text box and left click the mouse f Type any comments that pertain to the Route Attributes if applicable g Select the OK button The system will display the Navigation dialog box 19 May 2005 5 67 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 7 Select the Analyze Route button The system will display the Analyze Route dialog box NOTES 1 Analyze Route button allows the user to analyze an existi
375. screen 2 Prepare and send a Personnel Status Report a b Select the Messages button on the function bar or the F4 button on the keyboard The Messages dialog box will display Select the Create tab The system will display the Create tab group Select the Reports radio button The Report types will display in the Message type window pane Select the Personnel Report The option will be highlighted Select the Default Message Addressing button The system will display the Message Addressing dialog box Select the Message Settings Tab Select the Precedence of the message The proper radio button will highlight Select the desired acknowledge radio button The proper radio button will highlight Select the Addresses Tab The system will display the Addresses tab group Select the Select From pull down arrow The system will display the three Address Books Master User and Battalion 19 May 2005 5 23 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps k Select the Address Book that contains the Unit Platform name that the message will be sent to The Address Book will appear in the Select From text box and all the units in that Address Book will appear in the Select From window pane Select the name of the Unit Platform that the message needs to go to by selecting it from the Select From window pane on the left The Unit Platform name will be highlighted m Select the Add butto
376. search professional reading practice and self assessment Under the self development concept the NCO as an Army professional has the responsibility to remain current in all phases of the MOS The SM is the primary source for the NCO to use in maintaining MOS proficiency b Another important resource for NCO self development is the Army Correspondence Course Program ACCP Soldiers should refer to DA Pamphlet PAM 350 59 Army Correspondence Course Program Catalog for a list of courses and information on enrolling in this program or contact ACCP Student Support at DSN 826 2127 3322 COML 757 878 2127 3322 or E mail at Sectiona atsc army mil Soldiers can also access the Army Correspondence Course Program online at http www atsc army mil accp aipdnew asp 1 8 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG c General Dennis J Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library is an additional resource for NCO self development This electronic library is the single repository of approved Army training and doctrine information Soldiers can access the library online at http atiam train army mil portal index jsp d Unit learning centers are valuable resources for planning self development programs They can help access enlisted career maps training support products and extension training materials such as field manuals FMs and technical manuals TMs It is the soldier s responsibility to use these materials to maintain performance 1 8 TRAIN
377. sor verified the following performance measures 30 Verified that the operator isolated failure to correct faulted equipment 31 Verified that the operator transferred to standby equipment if available If standby equipment was not available ensured that the soldier prioritized circuits to receive 32 33 34 35 restored service Ensured that the operator isolated fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment Verified that the operator correctly repaired the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM Ensured that the operator verified the successful repair of the system by testing operating Soldier reviewed both DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407 for accuracy and forwarded paperwork and defective equipment to the appropriate maintenance level Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required TM 11 5895 1196 13 2 TM 11 5895 1196 13 3 TM 11 5895 1196 13 4 TM 11 5895 1196 13 5 TM 11 5895 1196 13 6 TM 11 5895 1196 13 7 TM 11 5895 1196 13 8 TM 11 5895 1196 13 9 TM 11 5895 1197 13 1 TM 11 5895 1197 13 10 TM 11 5895 1197 13 11 TM 11 5895 11
378. splay the Group menu including the user defined groups if there were any created b Select the Group Name text box The text box will highlight Type a name for the new group folder The name will appear in the Group Name text box d Select the New Group button The system will display the newly created folder in the Group text box 12 Select the Object tab then the Group sub tab a Select the Group down arrow The system will display the Group Menu including the group folder that was just created b Select a group folder from the list The sub file names will display in the Group window c Select a group sub file from the list of sub files The sub file will be highlighted and the icon will be displayed in the preview window 13 Select the Group Setup tab The newly created folder should still be in the Group text box NOTE The Add Icon button will be active now a Select the Add Icon button The sub file will be displayed under the New folder NOTE Repeat this process until all desired icons are in the new Group folder After saving Object Groups they remain in the system until the user deletes them from within the Group Setup tab or by clearing Logs and Queues b Select the new folder that was created by highlighting it in the Group text box c Select the Save Groups button The system saves the Group NOTE If the user wants to delete a group sub file highlight the sub file and select the Delete Icon button If the user
379. ssed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the tasks References Required Related DISAC 310 70 1 CPS2L3 MTPH VOLUME 1 CPS2L4 TM 11 5820 1105 12 amp P CPS2L5 DA PAM 738 750 4 28 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Maintain MILSTAR Command Post Terminal AN FRC 181 V or AN TRC 194 V 113 590 3172 Conditions Given a faulted AN FRC 181 V or AN TRC 194 V DISAC 310 70 1 TM 11 5820 1105 12 amp P MTPH Volume 1 MTPH Volume 2 Time Distribution Subsystem Preprocessor TDSPP Positional Handbooks TPH Volumes 1 and 2 Computer Program Development Specification for Terminal Control Processing Software CPCI 2 User s Manual Volumes 1 and 2 applicable TSOs and operating requirements Standards Restored the MILSTAR Command Post Terminal AN FRC 181 V or AN TRC 194 V to Fully Mission Capable FMC status Performance Steps Refer to TM 11 5820 1105 12 amp P MTPH Volumes 1 2 Time Distribution Subsystem Preprocessor TDSPP Positional Handbooks TPH Volumes 1 and 2 and Computer Program Development Specification for Terminal Control Processing Software CPCI 2 User s Manual Volumes 1 and 2 1 Identify failed LRU using on line built in test indications or IAW the MTPH Volume 1 Procedure 4 6 1 Initiate a Nondisruptive Test or Procedure 4 7 1 Initiate a Disruptive
380. st passed all operational tests and was passing communications Performance Steps 1 Ensure the operator monitors the DCSS for faulted degraded condition NOTE For a detailed checklist of all steps at the operator level for maintaining the DCSS reference Task Number 113 583 3273 Maintain Digital Communications Satellite Subsystem 2 At first indication of fault degradation to equipment within the DCSS ensure operator isolates the faults to the correct piece of equipment a Verify that the operator checks alarms on the individual pieces of equipment contained within the DCSS b Verify that the operator performs loop testing to isolate to the individual piece of faulted degraded equipment 3 Ensure the operator performs the correct troubleshooting procedures on the faulted degraded equipment NOTE The following performance steps are not an all inclusive list of possible equipment for the DCSS Individual sites may have varying configurations containing additional equipment not listed here In the event that is the case reference the appropriate TM or manufacturer s manual for that specific piece of equipment for troubleshooting removal and replacement procedures and fault isolation 4 Ensure the operator correctly troubleshoots and restores the FCC 100 IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual 5 Ensure the operator correctly troubleshoots and restores the TD 1389 LRM IAW appropriate TM manufacturer s manual 6 Ensure the
381. stablish networks performed network analysis and conducted transfer control operations utilizing the TCCC DFCS NCT and DOSS IAW published procedures Performance Steps 1 Prepare operational logs 2 Establish DFCS networks 3 Maintain DFCS networks a Perform a database download to the standby NCT b Administer links in the DFCS database 1 Define a new carrier uplink 2 Define a new carrier downlink 3 Delete a link from the DFCS database Perform an off line characterization using the DFCS Perform an on line characterization using the DFCS e Perform a link nominalization 1 Perform NT transmit power calibration 2 Select carrier to be nominalized 3 Set carrier to nominal Eb No 4 Set number of samples 5 6 Perform nominalization Return carrier to Auto control f Perform manual noise slot assignment 1 Determine the lower noise slot 2 Determine the upper noise slot 3 Input noise slots into the DFCS Perform manual control of a DFCS link Perform manual database functions Conduct an NT transmit power calibration Perform OM 73 remote control with the DFCS Administer the DFCS poll 1 Integrate an NT to the DFCS poll 2 Change the transmit carrier to the Auto control mode or NCT Manual mode 3 Remove an NT from the DFCS poll J Q AUC 4 Perform DFCS network analysis 5 Perform DFCS control transfer operations a Perform notification procedures b Per
382. stalled ground and power cables Installed external user cables N O A N Installed sun shade if appropriate 3 32 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures GO NOGO 11 Installed radiation hazard fence 12 Applied site power 13 Positioned fire point Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related TM 11 5895 1162 10 TM 11 5895 846 14 UNIT SOP 19 May 2005 3 33 STP 11 25814 SM TG Operate SATCOM Terminal AN TSC 86A 113 590 2047 Conditions Given the requirement to establish communications with another terminal using an AN TSC 86 V terminal and TM 11 5895 846 14 Standards Successfully established communications Performance Steps 1 8 9 Operate generator set a Set generator frequency and voltage b Apply power to the transfer box Operate transfer box a Set generator on line switch to correct generator b If it is necessary to swap generators follow procedures according to appropriate TM Set antenna elevation safety switch Power up shelter according to TM 11 5895 846 14 Cable patching a Patch IF translato
383. support Refer to TM 11 5895 1448 10 paragraph numbers are identified at the end of each subtask Determine data rate requirement for the exercise paragraph 6 2 Determine method of communication to utilize paragraph 6 4 Prepare the LRM Configuration Worksheet paragraph 6 10 Prepare the Terminal Configuration Worksheet paragraph 6 9 e Prepare the Terminal Deployment Authorization paragraph 6 12 Submit communications requirements to DISA Military Satellite Communications Systems Office MSO for approval and assignment of a user requirements database URDB number Coordinate the DSCS GMF gateway assignment with the appropriate DISA element prior to formally submitting the satellite access request SAR Prepare the SAR IAW ASC 1 Generate and submit the SAR to the appropriate Regional Signal Support Center RSSC Coordinate between the RSSC and the mission area commander to modify mission plans when DSCS satellite resources are not available for the desired mission support Develop modified SARs as necessary to respond to user request for changes in SATCOM services during a mission Coordinate with the local frequency manager to obtain frequency clearance for each GMF terminal location Prepare and issue to each GMF terminal and DSCS gateway if applicable terminal deployment orders consistent with the SAA and the circuit level communications require
384. t Check Fire On Call Fire Cmd and EOM messages are grayed out until a Fire mission is received from the Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System AFATDS 1 Prepare and send a Airborne Fire Mission a Select the Messages button on the Function Bar or the F4 button on the Keyboard The system will display the Message dialog box b Select the Create tab box NOTE Default Transmission Settings should have been completed prior to PCC PCIs You cannot send or save a message until you have set your Default Transmission settings for each type of message or set the Transmission settings from within the message c Select the Fires Alerts from the Msg Types field The Fires Alerts radio button will highlight NOTE The Fires Alerts function contains message templates for Airborne Fire Mission Call for Fire Check Fire EOM amp Surveillance Fire Support Coord Measures Free Text Message MAYDAY Message MOPP Alert Observer Readiness Report On Call Fire Cmd REDCON and Strike Warning d Select the Airborne Fire Mission The System will highlight the Airborne Fire Mission e Select the Execute button The system will display the Create Airborne Fire Mission Template f Select the Outline Tab The system will display the M Mandatory O Optional and OG Optional Group fields for this particular message NOTE All of the fields with an M in front of them and are Red in color are mandatory fields and must be entered in order to
385. t SMU is used ensure that it is powered on and the AUTO MANUAL Switch is set to AUTO 19 May 2005 3 5 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps b Configure the SMU Refer to the Network Nodal Managers NNM Reference Guide Chapter 2 unless otherwise indicated 1 Verify that the external communications equipment and encryption devices are on and connected to the SMU Refer to applicable equipment manual for any external equipment 2 Perform the Assign Switch Initialization procedures 3 Perform the Assign Terminal Type Loop Key Generators and Local Remote Call Service Positions procedures 4 Perform the Assign Switch Classmarks procedures NOTE The following steps are for programming the SMU for Digital Trunks to Home Area Code using Flood Search 5 Perform the Assign Digital Transmission Group DTG using the NNM Reference Guide Chapter 2 and the TSO 6 Perform the Assign T1CEPT procedures if necessary 7 Perform the Assign Trunk Group Cluster command if necessary 8 Perform the Assign Terminal Service procedures 9 Perform the Assign Multiple Trunks command if necessary 10 Perform the Assign Interswitch Link Initialization command after the SMU is on line NOTE The following steps are for programming the SMU for Digital Trunks to Home Area Code using digital in band trunk signaling DIBTS in a small extension node SEN or radio access unit RAU ADJ area non flood non flood DSN and analog 11
386. t a new Add Personnel Record dialog box NOTE Complete a record for each individual After a record is done on each individual select the Close button to get back to the Personnel Status Report dialog box v Select the SEARCH BY pull down arrow at the bottom of the Personnel Status Report dialog box The system will display the list of option that can be searched by w Select an option from the list The option will display in the SEARCH BY text box NOTE If the user selects Last Name then the user will have to type the Last Name in the Search text box x Select the Search text box to the right of the SEARCH BY pull down arrow The cursor will blink inside the text box y Type the Last name of the individual that the user is looking for The name will appear in the Search text box z Select the Search button The system will highlight the record in the Personnel Status Report list at the top of the dialog box and activate the Modify button aa Select the Modify button The system will display the Modify Personnel Record dialog box with the information on the individual being searched NOTE The user can make changes to the record and apply them ab Select the Cancel button The system will return to the Personnel Status Report dialog box ac Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops screen 3 Prepare and send a Freetext message a Select the Messages button on the function bar or the F4 button on the keyb
387. t the Close button 9 Select OK TN Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 19 May 2005 5 73 STP 11 25814 SM TG EMPLOY FILTERS FUNCTIONS USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0025 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system with software version 3 4 loaded precision lightweight global positioning system receiver PLGR enhanced position location radio system EPLRS if equipped and single channel ground air radio system SINCGARS with Internet controller INC Standards As a minimum you must Employ screen operations functions to manage and exchange information to include Select the desired radio button for the Labels Friendly Enemy Unknown and Georeference for the SA tab Select Units to Collapse or Expand Select the desired radio button for the labels for the Overlays tab Load and Unload an overlay Display and Hide an Overlay Performance Steps NOTE The FBCB2 system maintains near real time data for friendly enemy unknown unit positions and targets The FBCB2 system also maintains data for fixed Geo references such as bridges mountains and rivers The Filters function permits the user to view or filter out friendly and enemy platforms or units according to currency dimension unit typ
388. t the Show Segment Details button again The Segment Details dialog box will display with the side slopes and grids of the next segment NOTE Again the Segment Details dialog box will display either Segment is Passable or it will display all the side slope percentages and grids of each point on the route that has some difficulty in travel m Select the close button The system will return to the Analyze Route dialog box 8 Select the Circular Line of Sight button on the bottom of the Analyze Route dialog box The system will display the Circular Line of Sight dialog box NOTE The Circular Line of Sight button allows the user to analyze a 360 degree line of sight from any point on the map The user can control the analysis by entering the desired radius of the circle the Spacing distance between center points along a route and the Vertical Offset height from the ground to the desired eye level at the circle center in the appropriate text box a Select the Points along a route button if the user wants to check the circular line of sight along the route otherwise select the select points from map button to check the circular line of sight anywhere on the map b Select the Virtual Keypad next the Line of Sight Radius m text box and use the mouse pointer to enter the radius in meters between 1 and 10000 or place the cursor inside the text box and enter the number from the keyboard NOTE Do the same for the Spacing m and the Vert
389. tch control knob can be found If elevation is above 200 the switch must be set to 160 Set at least 40 less than antenna elevation 3 Set the antenna elevation safety switch control knob AN TSC 93 V only WARNING DO NOT operate shelter unless all three phases are present and shelter vents are open or damage to equipment may occur 4 Power up shelter according to appropriate TM 5 Patch equipment IAW cut sheets a Patch IF translator patch panel AN TSC 85 V only b Patch the modem patch panel c Patch the orderwire OW patch panel AN TSC 85 V only d Patch baseband patch panel e Select proper Second Level Multiplexer at the TSSP select panel AN TSC 85 V only f Patch baseband patch panel 6 Configure equipment IAW cut sheets a Configure signal conditioning equipment b Configure multiplexer equipment c Configure modulators and demodulators d Configure upconverters and downconverters e Tune Klystron 7 Operate crypto equipment a Obtain sign for communications security COMSEC key from COMSEC vault or appropriate facility b Load fill devices KOI 18 KYK 15 or KYK 13 with new key 19 May 2005 3 25 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps c Load new COMSEC key into secure sets KY 57 and KG 194 d Maintain positive COMSEC control and records NOTE The translator system loop test should NOT be performed while tracking the satellite 8 Perform translator system loop test 9 Acquire sate
390. ted e Select the Unit Platform pull down arrow The system will display the same four selections f Select Friendly The system will display Friendly in the text box and display all the friendly Units Platforms that are on the map in the window below the Unit Platform tab g Select one of the Unit Platforms from the list The system will highlight the selection h Select the Apply button The system will center on that Unit Platform 6 Select the Location tab The system will display the Location tab group with a list of all the available pre loaded Map Data Groups and Georeference NOTE The Location tab gives the user five methods of changing the map display area Map data groups Georeference which is the window with the list of all the available pre loaded map data groups and georeference Fill Location button which allows the user to pick a location using the mouse cursor Manual Fill location text box which allow the user to type in the Location The Edit Locations button which allows the user to create and modify a desired map data group and World Coverage button which allows the user to choose and load a SA map anywhere in the world provided that the map area is loaded into the software a Select the Fill Loc button The Map control dialog box will disappear and the mouse cursor will be replaced with a cross hair b Select a location on the map The system will display the Map control dialog box with the location in the Locatio
391. tegic communications link 1 Direct earth terminals to conduct the modem performance test once completed fax or e mail the results to the DSCSOC for review 2 Review modem performance test data 3 Direct transmit and receive terminals to conduct in house IF to IF characterizations once completed fax or e mail the results to the DSCSOC for review 4 Review in house IF to IF characterization data 5 Direct transmit and receive terminals to conduct in house RF to RF characterizations once completed fax or e mail the results to the Wideband SATCOM Operations Center WSOC for review Review in house RF to RF characterization data Direct the terminal to commence with the RF translator loopback 24 hour stability test Monitor in house 24 hour stability test Direct the receive terminal to prepare the downlink equipment for carrier access Direct the transmit terminal to prepare the uplink equipment for carrier access Create and implement an operational database ODB change for a primary satellite Determine authorized C N N Direct the transmit terminal to access the carrier Analyze the transmit carrier Verify end to end connectivity with the terminals Perform over the satellite characterization Perform notification procedures 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Se NS rr SO a 3 Maintain networks a Perform satellite link characterization of a non DFCS
392. tem will display the selection in the MEDEVAC Priority text box n Select the NBC Contamination pull down arrow The system will display the NBC Contamination option list Make a selection 4 Prepare and send a CTIL Action NOTE The CTIL Action message allows the authorized user Access Level 4 to modify the Commander s Tracked Items List CTIL to meet the Unit s specific requirements Upon receipt and acceptance by the receiver this message overwrites the previously received CTIL FBCB2 user should validate the message sender prior to accepting the new CTIL message If an errant CTIL message is loaded the only way to replace it is to call for another CTIL message from the proper logistic source a Select the Messages button on the Function Bar or the F4 button on the keyboard The Messages dialog box will display b Select the Create tab The system will display the Create tab group c Select the Orders Request radio button from the Msg Type field The button will highlight d Select the CTIL Action message by highlighting it The message will highlight e Select the Execute button The system will display the Using Default CTILS dialog box 5 32 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps f Place a checkmark in the box to the left of each item that is specific to the unit A checkmark will display in each box that was selected g Select the Message Addressing button The system will display the Message Addressing d
393. tenance Manual Analog Digital Converter CV 3034 G 11 March 1977 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 1 May 1994 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 1 May 1994 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 2 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 15 August 1988 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V Reprinted w Basic Incl C1 7 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 21 November 1983 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance for Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V Reprinted w Basic Incl C 1 6 Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 26 October 1983 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance for Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V 4 October 1983 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Satellite Communications Set AN USC 28 V Item also produced in electronic media and included on EM 0169 1 May 1994 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Satel
394. teps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until the task can be performed correctly References Required Related DA FORM 2404 TB 11 5820 890 12 TM 11 5820 890 10 8 5 2 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG PREPARE SEND COMBAT MESSAGES USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0001 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational AN UYK 128 Force Battle Command Brigade and Below 2 system with software version 3 4 loaded SINCGARS GPS and EPLRS if equipped and tactical situation requiring you to prepare and send combat messages Default Message Addressing settings have already been set Standards As a minimum you must prepare and send one of each of the Combat Messages SALT MEDEVAC NBC 1 FIRE MISSION CHECK FIRE ALL and SITREP using FBCB2 Performance Steps 1 Select the Combat Msgs button from the Function bar or the F3 button on the keyboard The system will display the Combat Messages dialog box NOTE Combat Messages are designed to quickly create and send mission essential messages during combat operations Combat Messages are easier and require fewer steps than Long Form Messages Use the Touch screen or embedded pointing device to make the entries Combat Messages do not require keystrokes to make the entries Combat Messages with programmed transmission settings provide the capability to
395. the Unit field and the symbol in the preview pane f Select the Attributes button and enter the attributes for the symbol and select OK The system will return to the Overlay Toolbox g Select the Add button The system will display the unit symbol on the overlay h Select the OK button The system will return to the Overlay Toolbox NOTE Continue sub steps 1 through 8 until all symbols are on the overlay 10 Select the Overlay tab The system will display the overlay tab fields NOTE Scroll up to the Overlay Type Ensure that it still shows the Overlay type that was selected at the beginning Scroll down to the Storage field Ensure that the Folder and File display the correct name Scroll down to Version to view the Creation DTG Revision DTG and Revision Scroll down to the Recalc Size button under the Message Size field Select the Recalc button to display the size of the overlay in bytes The user can center on an object by selecting the Details button then highlighting the object from the list and selecting the Center on Object button The user can set the Message Addressing settings and re save the overlay from here 11 Select the Group Setup Tab The system will display the Group Setup tab fields and buttons NOTE The Group Setup Tab creates user defined object group files and sub files User defined object groups can be developed and used to expedite the creation of overlays a Select the Group down arrow The system will di
396. the F3 button on the keyboard a Select the Combat Msgs button on the Function Bar or the F3 button on the keyboard b Select the MEDEVAC tab The system will display the MEDEVAC template c Select the Map button The Combat Messages dialog box will disappear and the mouse cursor will be replaced with a cross hair d Select a location on the map and the grid location will appear in the Pick Up Location text box e Or Select the LRF button The system will input the location provided by the Laser Range Finder NOTE This function only works if your vehicle is equipped with the Laser Range finder f Select the Amb Patients or buttons to input the amount of Amb patients or place the cursor in the Amb Patients text box and enter the amount with the keyboard NOTE Holding down on the or button will scroll through the numbers at a fast pace g Select the Ltr Patients or buttons to input the amount of Litter patients or place the cursor in the Litter Patients text box and enter the amount with the keyboard h Select the Marking pull down arrow The system will display the Marking options list i Select an option from the list The system displays the selection in the Marking text box j Select the Color pull down arrow The system will display the Color options list k Select an option from the list The system displays the selection in the Color text box Select the Pickup Zone Hot check box The system will display a
397. the FCG Ensure the supervisor verifies the following performance steps 15 16 17 18 19 Verify that the operator determines the faulted portion of the FCG Ensure the operator inspects all components and cables for defects and proper connections Verify that the operator isolates fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment Verify that the operator correctly repairs the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM Ensure the operator verifies the successful repair of the FCG by testing operating NOTE The following performance steps are performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the Transmitter Group Ensure the supervisor verifies the following performance steps 20 21 22 23 24 Verify that the operator determines the faulted portion of the Transmitter Group Ensure the operator inspects all components and cables for defects and proper connections Verify that the operator isolates fault to the correct LRU of defective equipment Verify that the operator correctly repairs the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM Ensure the operator verifies the successful repair of the Transmitter Group by testing operating NOTE The following performance steps are performed for repair and replacement of defective equipment located in the Antenna Group Ensure the supervisor verifies the followi
398. the Outline window pane Select the Altitude Virtual Keypad and enter the altitude or select the text box and enter the altitude with the keyboard Select the Save As button The Save As dialog box will be displayed Select the Folder Text box and type the name for the folder that the message will be saved in and select the New Folder button The new folder will be displayed in the Folders window pane NOTE If a folder was created earlier then the user can highlight the folder and save the file to that folder w X y 7 Select the File text box at the bottom of the Save As dialog box Type the name for the message The name will appear in the File text box Select the OK button The Save As Confirmation dialog box will be displayed Select the OK button The system will return to the Create Airborne Artillery FCR Template Select the Send button The Message Sent dialog box will appear stating The message was sent with an OK button NOTE If the Default Message Addressing Settings or Message Addressing Settings within the message were not set prior to sending the message the user would receive a Send Error dialog box saying No addressee selected with an OK button The user would select the OK button and select the Message Addressing button and set the address ab ac Select the OK button The system will return to the Create Airborne Artillery FCR template Select the Close button The system will return to the Ops
399. there is 18 33 Volts Direct Current VDC power available This could possibly result in a dead vehicle battery if left in this condition over an extended period CAUTION The keyboard should be disconnected and properly stowed when not in use to prevent it from causing equipment damage 1 Perform AN UYK 128 V computer shutdown a Select the F6 Admin button The Admin dialog box is displayed b Select the Exit Ops button The Exit Ops confirmation dialog box is displayed c Select the Yes button Exit Ops confirmation dialog box closes The Ops Auto Log in dialog box opens with countdown timer started Select Cancel Time out button The Ops Auto Log in dialog box closes Select the Start button The Start button option menu is displayed Select the Shutdown option The Shut down option menu is displayed Select the Shutdown option Shut down confirmation dialog box is displayed Select the Yes button Screen displays Shutting Down the System Safe to power off when the Screen message says Type any key to continue or approximately 10 seconds after syncing file systems done is displayed i Press DU PWR button for up to 4 seconds and release after DU PWR LED goes dark j Set the circuit breaker switch on the PU to the OFF position The circuit breaker switch is pointed toward the outside edge of the PU k Ensure system is properly secured e g PU DU and KU locked and secured 0 2 Perform PLGR shutdown a Press th
400. tion s wars Success in battle does not happen by accident it is a direct result of tough realistic and challenging training a Operational Environment 1 Commanders and leaders at all levels must conduct training with respect to a wide variety of operational missions across the full spectrum of operations these operations may include combined arms joint multinational and interagency considerations and span the entire breadth of terrain and environmental possibilities Commanders must strive to set the daily training conditions as closely as possible to those expected for actual operations 2 The operational missions of the Army include not only war but also military operations other than war MOOTW Operations may be conducted as major combat operations a small scale contingency or a peacetime military engagement Offensive and defensive operations normally dominate military operations in war along with some small scale contingencies Stability operations and support operations dominate in MOOTW Commanders at all echelons may combine different types of operations simultaneously and sequentially to accomplish missions in war and MOOTW These missions require training since future conflict will likely involve a mix of combat and MOOTW often concurrently The range of possible missions complicates training Army forces cannot train for every possible mission they train for war and prepare for specific missions as time and circumstances p
401. tivities It is recognized that a unit cannot attain proficiency to standard on every task whether due to time or other resource constraints However unit commanders can achieve a successful training program by consciously focusing on a reduced number of METL tasks that are essential to mission accomplishment a Linkage between METL and STP A critical aspect of the battle focus concept is to understand the responsibility for and the linkage between the collective mission essential tasks and the individual tasks that support them For example the commander and the CSM 1SG must jointly coordinate the collective mission essential tasks and supporting individual tasks on which the unit will concentrate its efforts during a given period This task hierarchy is provided in the task database at the Reimer Digital Library The CSM 1SG must select the specific individual tasks that support each collective task to be trained Although NCOs have the primary role in training and sustaining individual soldier skills officers at every echelon remain responsible for training to established standards during both individual and collective training Battle focus is applied to all missions across the full spectrum of operations b Relationship of STPs to Battle focused Training The two key components of any STP are the soldier s manual SM and trainer s guide TG Each gives leaders important information to help implement the battle focused training process The tr
402. tly repaired the LRU IAW the removal and replacement or alignment adjustment procedures in the appropriate TM 34 Ensured the operator verified the successful repair of the system by testing operating NOTE The following performance measure was completed after communications was completely restored 35 Verified that the operator completed DA Form 2404 and or DA Form 2407 19 May 2005 3 57 STP 11 25814 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required Related DA FORM 2404 DA FORM 2407 DA PAM 738 750 TM 11 5895 1196 13 2 TM 11 5895 1196 13 3 TM 11 5895 1196 13 4 TM 11 5895 1196 13 5 TM 11 5895 1196 13 6 TM 11 5895 1196 13 7 TM 11 5895 1196 13 8 TM 11 5895 1196 13 9 TM 11 5895 1197 13 1 TM 11 5895 1197 13 10 TM 11 5895 1197 13 11 TM 11 5895 1197 13 3 TM 11 5895 1197 13 4 TM 11 5895 1197 13 5 TM 11 5895 1197 13 6 TM 11 5895 1197 13 7 TM 11 5895 1197 13 8 TM 11 5895 1197 13 9 TM 11 5895 1531 30 TM 11 5895 1532 30 TM 11 5895 1533 30 TM 11 5895 1534 30 TM 11 5895 1535 12 TM 11 5895 1536 13 TM 11 5895 846 14 TM 11 5985 398 13 UNIT SOP 3 58 19 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Supervise the Operation of SATCOM Terminal AN GSC 39 AN FSC 78
403. twork operations 17 Ensure the user communications data is established a Load and initialize the KGV 9 b Verify the performance of user data links Performance Measures 1 Powered on the AN USC 28 V 2 Loaded the program disc 3 Performed the initialization procedures NOTE Performance measures 4 through 10 pertain to configuration and operation of the CSU 4 Configured the CSU as an NCT or NT as applicable 5 Configured the UTE for CCC TCC unit for operation 6 Configured the TSEC KG 84 CCC TCC 7 Loaded the TSEC KG 84 CCC TCC for network operations 8 Entered the ECCM network in TDI or TIME APPROX 9 Exited the ECCM network 10 Entered the ECCM in standard time 11 Performed a coordinated ECCM network control transfer SOP and appropriate TM as required NOTE Performance measures 12 through 17 pertain to configuration and operation of the COMM RT 12 Performed necessary patching of the equipment 13 Configured the COMM RT IAW applicable TM and NCB and scheduled the COMM RT 14 Configured the UTE 15 Placed the UTE in LOW mode 16 Configured the KG 84 and loaded for LOW network operations 17 Ensured user communications data was established 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier a NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier pr
404. uarters for major elements of the command c Deployment of signal facilities d Lists and locations of reserve equipment 3 Review the situation map for correct tactical data 4 Update the situation map a Remove obsolete data b Post new data c Update security classifications as required d Record time period covered or time posted Evaluation Preparation Setup OPORD map of area of operation and situation reports will be available Brief soldier You will maintain a map and post current information Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Leader reviewed the mission SOP 2 Leader reviewed the data to be posted on situation map a Tactical situation b Location of the headquarters for major elements of the command c Deployment of signal facilities d Lists and locations of reserve equipment 3 Leaded reviewed the situation map for correct tactical data 4 Leader updated the situation map a Removed obsolete data b Posted new data c Updated security classifications as required d Recorded time period covered or time posted 3 100 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required
405. uation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 5 12 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG PERFORM MESSAGE MANAGEMENT USING FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0006 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system with software version 3 4 loaded To better organize FBCB2 information you have received you need to manage your messages Standards As a minimum you must rename delete files and folders and move files from one folder to another by using the Manage tab on the Messages function Performance Steps 1 Select the Messages button from the Function Bar or the F4 button on the keyboard 2 Select the Manage Tab The system will display the Manage fields and push buttons NOTE The Manage tab allows the user to create delete move and rename folders and delete messages There are eight push buttons consisting of New Folder which creates a folder Delete which deletes folders and files Rename which rename folders and files Move which moves files from one folder to another Execute which activates a message Grayed Out Close which closes the Messages dialog box and Help which gives help on the Manage Tab and a Virtual Keyboard a Ensure that all of the message type boxes are checked under the Msg Type so that all the folder
406. ubordinate platforms will be sending their LOG Report to this platform then there will be several more columns to the right of the user s column 5 Select the Single tab The system displays the Single tab group NOTE The Single Tab is similar to the Roll up tab The Single tab is the tab that the quantities will be entered into 6 Select the text box under the On Hand Operational Item Count column for the first item The system will display NS highlighted in black 7 Enter the amount that the user has on hand in the text box The system will display the amount in the text box NOTE If the number will not enter in the text box then go back to he Roll up Tab and uncheck the User s column then go back to the Single tab and enter the number 8 Select the text box under the Authorized Item Count column The system will display the NS highlighted in black 19 May 2005 5 41 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 9 10 11 12 Enter the amount that the user is authorized The system will display the amount in the text box Place the cursor in the text box under the Required Item Count Column for the first item and click the left mouse button The system will automatically calculate the difference Select the Save button The system will display a Successful Save dialog box stating Saved the logistics record for the user s platform name with an OK button Select the OK button The system will return to the Singl
407. uick Reference Guide Promina 800 Series Common Equipment Modules Manual Promina 800 Series Trunk Modules Manual Promina 800 Series Voice Modules Manual Promina 800 Series Data Modules Manual TM 11 5805 795 13 TM 11 5805 802 13 amp P TM 11 5895 1215 10 11 5895 1630 13 amp P TM 11 7025 221 10 6400 02 applicable TSOs Unit SOP and operating requirements Standards Successfully completed all managerial performance measures Performance Steps 1 Ensure that all site personnel are appropriately trained on all DCSS equipment prior to operating and configuring identified equipment 2 Ensure that site personnel and supervisors have appropriate configuration paperwork aka TSOs and Telecommunications Service Requests TSRs to verify equipment settings 3 Ensure that all equipment has associated TMs and commercial manuals that support its operations and configurations Reference Task Number 113 583 7096 Supervise the Operation of DCSS for specific equipment 4 Ensure that supervisors track any problems that may occur with equipment setup or operation Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Ensured that personnel were appropriately trained on all DCSS equipment prior to operating and configuring identified equipment 2 Ensured that personnel and supervisors had appropriate configuration paperwork aka TSOs and TSRs to verify equipment settings 3 Ensured that all equipment h
408. ule 2 Delete a polling schedule 3 Perform a polling download 4 Receive a polling download 5 Set polling alarm levels 4 2 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 6 Perform polling on a non DECS site 7 Display complete pollback data from a DECS site e Perform LPM operations 1 Create a new LPM schedule 2 Modify an LPM schedule 3 Copy an LPM schedule 4 Delete an LPM schedule 5 Edit the current LPM schedule 6 Perform an LPM download 7 Receive an LPM download 8 Set LPM alarm levels f Perform high power link HPL operations 1 Verify HPL parameters 2 Dwell on the HPL chedule an NCB download to an NT 1 Schedule a background download to a terminal 2 Modify the background download schedule 3 Start the background download 4 Schedule a high priority download to a terminal 5 Verify that the download is completed 6 7 9 0 5 Verify the acceptance of the NCB Verify the implementation of the NCB Perform notification procedures h Schedule a background download to an ALTNCT 1 Create a background download schedule 2 Modify the background download schedule 3 Start the background download 4 Verify the download is completed 8 Remove power from terminals 9 Perform AN USC 28 operations a Initialize the AN USC 28 system Apply power to the interface unit IU Apply power to the CSU power supplies Apply power to the CSU cabinet
409. under the Labels field The system will redisplay the Labels 19 May 2005 5 75 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps Select the Selected radio button under the Overlays field The system will display the names of all the overlays that have been created received and saved on the system along with the Load Unload Selected and Unload All buttons NOTE The Load button will load the overlays that have been check marked The Unload Selected will unload all the overlays that have been check marked The Unload All button will unload all overlays that have been saved on the system If the user received any overlays from other platforms they must be saved to a folder on the user s computer before the system will load them The overlays that the user creates and saves can also be loaded and unloaded d e f Select the Load button The system will display the Overlay Loader dialog box with all the folders that have been created on the system Select the folder that has the overlay s that the user wants to load by double clicking the folder or selecting the sign The system will highlight the overlay name Select the OK button The system will return to the Filters dialog box with the name of the overlay displayed NOTE If there are more overlays that the user wants to load then the user will have to do the same steps to load them g h Select the overlay that was just loaded by left clicking on the name The overlay
410. ure performance levels against the established Army standard The evaluation can be as fundamental as an informal internal evaluation performed by the leader conducting the training Evaluation is conducted specifically to enable the individual undergoing the training to know whether the training standard has been achieved Commanders must establish a climate that encourages candid and accurate feedback for the purpose of developing leaders and trained soldiers 2 Evaluation of training is not a test it is not used to find reasons to punish leaders and soldiers Evaluation tells soldiers whether or not they achieved the Army standard and therefore assists them in determining the overall effectiveness of their training plans Evaluation produces disciplined soldiers leaders and units Training without evaluation is a waste of time and resources 3 Leaders use evaluations as an opportunity to coach and mentor soldiers A key element in developing leaders is immediate positive feedback that coaches and leads subordinate leaders to achieve the Army standard This is a tested and proven path to develop competent confident adaptive leaders b Evaluators Commanders must plan for formal evaluation and must ensure the evaluators are trained These evaluators must also be trained as facilitators to conduct AARs that elicit maximum participation from those being trained External evaluators will be certified in the tasks they are evaluating and norma
411. ures GO NOGO 1 Prepare and send a Fragmentary Order 2 Perform a Free Text Message 3 Prepare send MEDEVAC Request 4 Prepare and send a CTIL Action 5 Create and send a LOG Call for Support Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier scores NO GO show him what was done wrong and how to do it correctly 5 34 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG PERFORM BEFORE OPERATIONS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES ON FBCB2 VERSION 3 4 171 147 0011 Conditions Given a vehicle with an operational Force Battle Command Brigade and Below FBCB2 system with software version 3 4 loaded and a TM 11 7010 326 10 Standards As a minimum you must Make sure that the vehicle s MASTER POWER has been turned off Check the following components for damage AN UYK 128 V Computer Display Unit Processor unit Keyboard unit and Cables and Connector s Notify unit maintenance of any damaged or missing parts Follow all warnings and cautions in the TM to prevent injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Performance Steps NOTE The Appliqu V4 computer requires daily and weekly checks Daily checks are to be performed before operation during operation and after operation as indicated in the Service Interval column 1 Check the AN UYK 128 V Computer a Ensure all compute
412. utton and use the or keys to enter the DTG or select the NOW button for the current DTG and select the OK button The system will display the DTG in the DTG text box e Place the cursor in the Identification Num text box and enter the Identification number numeric 00 to 99 in the text box The system will display the number in the Identification Num text box NOTE This number ties the overlay to an Operations Order or an Operations Plan f Scroll down and select the Recalc Size button to calculate the size in bytes and display the overlay file size in the Message Size information box NOTE This function only works after you have placed symbols on the overlay This is to inform the operator of how large the overlay size is in Bytes See the equipment operator s manual or pocket guide for maximum overlay size that can be transmitted g Scroll down and select the Details button under the Statistics field The system will display the Objects Details dialog box NOTE There will not be data in the Object Details dialog box until the operator has placed objects on the overlay This function is used to quickly center on an object and view it s attributes h Select the Close button to close the Objects Details dialog box The system will go back to the Overlay Toolbox i Select the Comment Set radio button to activate the comments field The system will display the Comment text box and make the Virtual Keyboard button become active NO
413. vate and the cursor will blink Type the Name that you want to call the OPORD The Name will be displayed in the text box 5 30 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps NOTE Once the mandatory fields are completed you may send the Order or Request You may also select optional fields like FRAGO ID Number and optional groups like Annex Data 0 20 and enter them However if you select an optional group you will need to enter the mandatory fields from within that group j Select the Save As button The system will display the Save As dialog box k Select the Folder text box and type the Folder Name and select the New Folder button or select a folder that was already created by highlighting the folder name in the folders window Select the File text box and type the name that you want to call the Order or Request m Select the Ok button The system will display the Save As Confirmation dialog box saying Message was saved with the OK button n Select the OK button The system will return to the Create FRAGO Template o Select the Send button The message The Message was sent with an OK button will be displayed NOTE If the Default Transmission Settings or Transmission Settings were not set prior to sending this Order or request you would receive an Error message saying No addressee selected with an OK button You would have to select the OK button and select the Transmission Settings button and set the address th
414. view Social Security Number standby sexually transmitted disease standard tactical standard operating procedure Training Aids Devices Simulators and Simulations telecommunications center terrestrial critical control time date initializer time figure of merit trainer s guide Tactical Internet test instrument technical inspection 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Section Il Terms MOS training plan MTP The MTP is a guide for the conduct of individual training in units The MTP is developed for each MOS AOC and addresses all skill levels of an MOS AOC all duty positions The MTP lists all MOS AOC specific and shared critical tasks for which the MOS AOC is responsible It will not include common tasks performance measures PM Those behavior or product characteristics which the trainer observes checks to determine if the soldier has performed the task correctly Performance step A single discrete operation movement or action that comprises part of a task shared task A critical task performed by soldiers from two or more MOSs skill level SL A number that denotes the level of qualification within the total MOS Characters 0 through 5 in the position of the MOS code identify levels of qualification Soldier training publication STP Publications that contain critical tasks and other training information used to train soldiers and serve to standardize individual training for the whole Army provide infor
415. which are Go Green diagnostic test indicated that the component is operative at the optimal level Degraded Amber diagnostic test indicated that the test is operative at an acceptable level No GO RED diagnostic test indicated that the component is inoperative or not operative within acceptable parameters Not Tested WHITE device unavailable or not configured for the system a Select the sign to the immediate left of the GPS folder symbol Or double click on the folder symbol itself to open the contents You should see the associated sub components and their corresponding status indications If there is no sign showing then there is no information available for that component NOTE You should see the following status indications TIME displays the Time Figure of Merit TFOM quality HEADING displays the quality of the heading received from the GPS POSITION displays the Figure of Merit FOM quality b Close the GPS Component by selecting the sign to the immediate left of the GPS folder symbol Or double click the GPS folder symbol c Open the LOCAL COMM folder by selecting the sign or double clicking the LOCAL COMM folder 19 May 2005 5 53 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps NOTE The Local Comm status tells the user how the communication devices located on the platform are functioning The List of devices and interfaces will vary based on the platform role and configuration Opening the LOCAL COMM displays the su
416. y the correct download and to observe any obvious network problems in respect to carrier to noise density ratio C KT or spectral shape 7 Request any ongoing network information from the relinquishing SNC The relinquishing SNC must provide the assuming SNC with any ongoing network problems or any upcoming network events 8 Advise the GNOSC appropriate Regional Network Operations and Security Center RNOSC ARSPOC and the assuming SNC that they are ready to assume network control c Enter the time and initials of all agencies authorizing the network handover into the operational log d Perform post handover activities 6 Identify control hierarchy 19 May 2005 4 11 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 7 Perform SMCT II operations a Perform reporting and notification procedures 1 Perform SNC reporting procedures a Prepare FDMA 8 hour status report b Prepare DOR c Prepare U A report d Prepare SER e Prepare quicklook report f Prepare HAZCON report g Prepare site status report 2 Perform operational reporting to the SDC and DISA 8 Perform DOSS operations a Perform manual DSCS network planning software DNPS processing 1 Save the active database Perform analysis support Perform allocation Perform network performance Save the active database change for a prime DSCSOC Receive ODM and supporting documents Modify a scenario in analyst account Perform manual DNPS processing
417. y one chassis may not have a Bus Extender Card installed in slot 24 which will then make that slot available for any Dual Multiplexer Demultiplexer DMD card Determine type of DMD card needed to support user requirements and determine the correct slot for card placement in the chassis 1 Using replacement instructions outlined in TM 11 5895 1630 13 amp P paragraph 4 22 install necessary type and number of DMD cards as needed to support specified user data multiplexing requirements d Configure MIDAS software at the Operator Interface Unit OIU to support TSOs GAA and or cut sheets NOTE Card placement in the chassis is limited by software and hardware limitations The software on the OIU will only allow card placement in areas designated for the chosen card type 1 On the OIU log into the Windows NT workstation 2 On the OIU double click on the MIDAS icon 3 Enter user name and password then press enter 3 2 19 May 2005 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Steps 4 Load current configuration by selecting Upload Configuration from OSP from the pull down menu OSP and select the most current operating configuration 5 Using the TSO determine the number and type of I O cards needed to support the new configuration 6 Click on desired I O card type located on the Card Pallet and place in specified location on the chassis card complement window 7 Double click on the I O card and configure the card according to the
418. y standard patch panel Operate baseband patch panel Acquire satellite beacon tracking Acquire satellite power density tracking o N Oo A Operate transmitter Operate in combined power N Operate downconverter 13 Complete DA Form 2404 and DD Form 1970 Performance Measures GO NOGO 1 Operated generator under unusual conditions DANGER RF RADIATION HAZARD 2 Adjusted antenna elevation safety switches Operated power transfer switch Powered up shelter 3 4 5 Operated IF RF patch panel 6 Operated frequency standard patch panel 7 Operated baseband patch panel 19 May 2005 3 37 STP 11 25814 SM TG Performance Measures 8 Acquired satellite beacon tracking 9 Acquired satellite power density tracking 10 Operated transmitter 11 Operated in combined power 12 Operated downconverter 13 Completed DA Form 2404 and DD Form 1970 Evaluation Guidance Score the soldier if all steps are passed Score the soldier NO GO if any step is failed If the soldier fails any step show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the soldier practice until he can correctly perform the task References Required DA FORM 2404 DA PAM 738 750 DD FORM 1970 DISA CIR 800 E70 11 TM 11 5895 1162 10 TM 5 6115 545 12 UNIT SOP Related TM 11 5895 808 13 1 19 M

MOS 25S - AskTOP.net

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents